User’s

Manual
Model DX1002/DX1004/DX1006/DX1012/
DX1002N/DX1004N/DX1006N/DX1012N
Daqstation DX1000/DX1000N

IM 04L41B01-01E
8th Edition
 Introduction
Thank you for purchasing the Daqstation DX1000 (hereafter referred to as “DX”).
This User’s Manual explains how to use the DX. To ensure correct use, please read this
manual thoroughly before operation.
The following manuals are provided for the DX:

• Paper Manual
Manual Title Manual No. Description
DX1000 Operation Guide IM 04L41B01-02E Explains the basic operations of the DX.
Control of Pollution Caused IM 04L41B01-91C Gives a description of pollution control.
by the Product
About the Usage of Open IM 04L41B01-81Z1 Gives a description of the licenses.
Source Software

• Electronic Manuals
Manual Title Manual No. Description
DX1000/DX1000N IM 04L41B01-02E This is the electronic version of the paper
Operation Guide manual.
DX1000/DX1000N IM 04L41B01-01E Describes how to use the DX. The
User’s Manual communication and network functions,
custom display functions, and some of the
options are excluded.
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-03E Describes how to use the multi batch
Multi Batch (/BT2) function (/BT2 option).
User’s Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-04E Describes how to use the custom display
Custom Display function.
User’s Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-05EN Describes how to use the advanced
Advanced Security Function security function (/AS1 option).
(/AS1) User’s Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-17E Describes how to use communication
Communication Interface functions through an Ethernet or serial
User’s Manual interface.
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-18E Describes how to use communication
EtherNet/IP functions through an EtherNet/IP interface.
Communication Interface
User’s Manual
DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 IM 04L41B01-19E Describes how to use communication
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1) functions through the PROFIBUS-DP
Communication Interface interface (/CP1 option).
User’s Manual

• DAQSTANDARD Manuals
All manuals other than IM 04L41B01-66EN are contained in the DAQSTANDARD CD.
Manual Title Manual No.
DAQSTANDARD Data Viewer User’s Manual IM 04L41B01-63EN
DAQSTANDARD Hardware Configurator User’s Manual IM 04L41B01-64EN
DAQSTANDARD DX100P/DX200P Configurator User’s Manual IM 04L41B01-65EN
Installing DAQSTANDARD IM 04L41B01-66EN

8th Edition: March 2016 (YK)

All Rights Reserved, Copyright © 2005, Yokogawa Electric Corporation

IM 04L41B01-01E i
 Notes
• The contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice as a result of
continuing improvements to the instrument’s performance and functions.
• Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy
of its contents. However, should you have any questions or find any errors, please
contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
• Copying or reproducing all or any part of the contents of this manual without
YOKOGAWA’s permission is strictly prohibited.
• The TCP/IP software of this product and the document concerning the TCP/IP
software have been developed/created by YOKOGAWA based on the BSD Networking
Software, Release 1 that has been licensed from the Regents of the University of
California.

Trademarks
• vigilantplant, DAQSTATION, Daqstation, and DXAdvanced are registered trademarks
of Yokogawa Electric Corporation.
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
• Adobe and Acrobat are registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated.
• Kerberos is a trademark of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology (MIT).
• Company and product names that appear in this manual are registered trademarks or
trademarks of their respective holders.
• The company and product names used in this manual are not accompanied by the
registered trademark or trademark symbols (® and ™).

Revisions
1st edition: December 2005
2nd edition: October 2006
3rd edition: April 2007
4th edition: December 2007
5th Edition: November 2008
6th edition: March 2010
7th edition: December 2010
8th edition: March 2016

ii IM 04L41B01-01E
 DX’s Version and Functions Described in This
Manual
The contents of this manual corresponds to the DX1000 with release number 4 and style
number 4., and the DX1000N with release number 4 and style number 3.

DX’s Version and Functions

For the procedure to check the version, see section 2.5.
Edition DX Addition and change to functions Refer to
2 Version (Added) German, French, and Chinese as display language. Section 2.6
1.11 (Added) Modbus client connection retry interval: 10 s, 20 s, and Section 1.0 in IM04L41B01-17E
30 s.
(Added) 24 VDC/AC power supply (/P1 option). IM04L41B01-02E
Version (Added) Tab key on the USB keyboard corresponds to arrow Section 2.11
1.21 keys.
(Added) Operations to request and release network information. Section 1.3 in IM04L41B01-17E
(Changed) Modbus client: Function to connect a server with a unit Section 1.10 in IM04L41B01-17E
number is changed.
(Added) Modbus client: Connection timeout value. Section 1.10 in IM04L41B01-17E
(Added) Modbus registers (floating point type for communication Section 6.3 in IM04L41B01-17E
input data).
(Added) A data output format (Skip or OFF channel data not Section 3.7 in IM04L41B01-17E
output). CB command
(Changed) Error messages 105, 221, and 222 are added. Section 10.1
(Changed) Error messages 215, 218, and 536 are changed. Section 10.1
3 Release (Added) Improvement to the operability on the historical trend Section 4.3
number display.
2 (Changed) Displaying the date in the grid time of the trend display Sections 1.3 and 2.4
(Version when the trend interval is greater than or equal to 1
h/div.
2.0x)
(Added) Improvement to the display group setup operation. Section 5.1
(Added) Addition of the Upper and Lower settings to the bar Section 5.11
graph base position.
(Added) Addition of the relay action when alarm ACK is Sections 1.2, 3.5, and 3.8
executed to the alarm output relay settings.
(Added) Ability to reset the computed value during computation. Section 9.4
(Changed) Changes to how the data files are named. Section 1.4
(Added) Sorting the files by the update date/time. Sections 6.7, 6.8, and 6.9
(Added) Storage method for constantly retaining the most Sections 1.4 and 6.2
recent data files in the CF card (Media FIFO).
(Added) Progress display when saving all data of the internal Sections 4.8
memory.
(Changed) Changing the initial display selection menu. Sections 4.8 and 5.17
(Changed) Improvement to the data save operation to the USB Sections 2.12 and 5.17
flash memory.
(Changed) Retaining the state of the CapsLock and NumLock Section 2.11
keys on the USB keyboard.
(Changed) Changing the default setting of the web server function. IM04L42B01-02E,
Section 1.5 in IM04L41B01-17E
(Added) Error messages, 513, 514, 515, and 516 have been Section 10.1
added.
Style (Added) The waterproof construction of the DX front panel Section 12.6
number 2 complies with the NEMA4 standard.
4 Same as Added explanations. Fixed explanations. -
edition 3 Changed the direction of the clamp input terminal (/H2 option). IM04L4101-02E

IM 04L41B01-01E iii
DX’s Version and Functions Described in This Manual

Edition DX Addition and change to functions Refer to

5 Release Divided the setting mode displays with tabs. All setting displays
number 3 Added method for switching from setting mode to basic setting Section 2.14
(Version mode.
3.0x) Improved numeric input operation. Numeric input display
Added the ability to input the following characters: [ ] and :. Character string input display
Added new input type (GOST; /N3 option). Section 3.3
Increased measurement range for TC Type N. Section 12.5
Custom display. IM04L41B01-04E.
Multi Batch (/BT2 option). IM04L41B01-03E
Alarm level display. Section 3.7
Alarm annunciator. Section 3.12
Common alarm (/F1 option). Section 2.9
32-character tag comments and 16-character tag numbers. Section 5.2
Faster display update interval. Section 3.1
Secondary trend interval changeable during recording. Section 5.3
Added 15-, 20-, and 30-minute event data sample rates. Section 6.1
Fine grid. Sections 4.2 and 4.3
Auto zone display. Sections 4.2 and 4.3
Indication that the DX is waiting for a trigger. Section 1.3
Decimal point types “Point” and “Comma”. Section 2.13
Added favorite key operations. Section 5.15
Data searching with date and time. Section 4.3
Historical trend relative time display, auto span display, and top Section 4.3
channel display.
Number of batch text fields changed to 24. Section 6.3
The start recording screen appears when you press the start key Section 6.3
while using the batch function.
Changed contents of the system and network information displays. Section 2.5
Limits on setting load function. Section 8.1
Event switch. Section 7.1
Added “CommentDisplay” and “FavoriteDisplay” actions to the event Section 7.1
action function.
Remote control contact input changed from operating on Close to Section 7.1
operating on Open (/R1 and /PM1 options).
Match time timer reset (/M1 and /PM1 Options). Section 7.1
Added “Year” to match time timer conditions (/M1 and /PM1 options) Section 7.1
Match time timer usable for TLOG computation (/M1 and /PM1 Section 9.1
options).
Stacked bar graphs for report data (/M1 and /PM1 options). Section 4.10
Added recording condition variables to equations (/M1 and /PM1 Section 1.8
options).
Added USB barcode reader support (/USB1 option). Section 2.11
Saving of data from the internal memory to USB flash memory or a Section 2.12
CF card (/USB1 option).
Added data searching, report layout display, a print button, and an Section 1.5 in IM04L41B01-17E
FTP link to the Web server function.
Modbus register map expansion and floating-point data writing. Section 6.3 in IM04L41B01-17E
Only send alarm e-mails when an alarm has occurred. Section 1.4 in IM04L41B01-17E
Added tag and channel number to alarm e-mails. Section 1.4 in IM04L41B01-17E
E-mail transfer authentication (Pop Before SMTP). Section 1.4 in IM04L41B01-17E
“°C” displayed in e-mails and the Web settings. Section 1.5 in IM04L41B01-17E
Added the ability to input the square and cube characters (² and ³) in Appendix 3 in IM04L41B01-17E
communications (only for English, German, and French).
Added FTP data transfer wait operation. Section 1.7 in IM04L41B01-17E
FTP server directory output format can be set to MS-DOS and Section 1.6 in IM04L41B01-17E
UNIX.
EtherNet/IP. IM04L41B01-18E
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1 option). IM04L41B01-19E
Style Changed the boot ROM. -
number 3

iv IM 04L41B01-01E
 DX’s Version and Functions Described in This Manual

Edition DX Addition and change to functions Reference

6 Release Advanced security function (/AS1 option). IM04L41B01-05EN
number 4 Report template (/M1 and /PM1 options). Section 9.6
(Version Added the “Seprt2” report file separation method. Section 9.5
4.0x) Calibration management (/CC1 option). Section 3.13
Style Added functions and improvements to the custom display. The main IM04L41B01-04E
number 3 changes are listed below.
The status display section can be hidden.
Items have been added (system icons, group names, memory bar,
date and time labels, batch group numbers, batch names, Modbus
input).
Custom grids can be displayed on the trend display.
The bitmap data of the INTERNAL 1 to 3 screens is saved to internal
memory.
Labels and tags can be displayed vertically.
Additional types of current value marks for the scale have been
added.
The scale unit indication can be hidden.
Time can be displayed on all grids on the trend display.
Group switching can be stopped.
Added an alarm sound to the Web server function. Section 1.5 in IM04L41B01-17E
The DX outputs the Modbus input value specified in the custom display. Sections 1.10 and 2.6
The “E-M” command has been added for the Modbus client and master. in IM04L41B01-17E
IM04L41B01-04E
Authenticated e-mail transmission (Authentication SMTP). Section 1.4 in IM04L41B01-17E
A switch from on to off can be specified as an event. Section 7.1
The duration for which the reflash relays are deactivated can be set to 500 Section 3.5
ms, 1 s, or 2 s.
Added new input type (Pt200(WEED); /N3 option). Section 3.3
Text fields can be input when the batch function is being used and Section 6.3
recording starts.
The length of the user password that can be registered with the login Section 8.2
function has been extended to 20 characters.
Operations can be assigned to the output relays (/F1 and /F2 options). Section 2.9
Models with 400 MB of internal memory have been added (internal IM04L41B01-02E
memory size suffix code: “-3”). MODEL and SUFFIX Code
7 Same as Additions and improvements to explanations. -
edition 6
8 Release Additions and improvements to explanations. -
number 4 NLF is supported. IM04L41B01-02E
(Version User’s manuals are supplied by downloading them on the web site. IM04L41B01-02E
4.0x) DX1000 : A 5.7-inch LCD with LED back light replaced a 5.5-inch LCD IM04L41B01-02E
Style with CFL back light. Recommended Replacement
number, Periods for Worn Parts
DX1000: 4
DX1000N: 3

IM 04L41B01-01E v
 How to Use This Manual

Structure of the Manual

Read the Operation Guide first to familiarize yourself with the basic operation,
and then read this manual. For a description of the communication function and the
accompanying software program, DAQSTANDARD, read the respective manual.
This user’s manual consists of the following sections.
Chapter Title and Contents
1 Overview of Functions
Describes the functions of the DX.
2 Common Operations
Describes the procedure to set the time and the operating procedure using the
remote control terminal (/KB1 or /KB2 option) and keyboard (/USB1 option).
3 Measurement Channels and Alarms
Describes how to set the measurement conditions and alarms.
4 Switching Operation Screens
Describes the operations on the operation screen.
5 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
Describes how to change the displayed contents on the operation screen and how
to write messages.
6 Saving and Loading Data
Describes how to acquire and store the data. Also describes the procedure to
load measured data/setup data on the CF card or the USB flash memory (/USB1
option).
7 Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control Functions
(/R1 and /PM1 Options)
Describes how to carry out specific actions when a given event occurs, when a
remote control signal is applied, and when the USER key is pressed.
8 Using the Security Function
Describes how to use the key lock function and the function that allows only
registered users to operate the DX.
9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)
Describes how to use computation channels and how to create reports such as
hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
10 Troubleshooting
Describes error messages and troubleshooting.
11 Maintenance
Describes periodic inspection and calibration.
12 Specifications
Lists the specifications of the DX.
Appendix Describes how to estimate the file size, the types of data that the DX can
generated and how to use them, the data format of text files, etc.
Index

Note
• This user’s manual covers information regarding DX1000s that have a suffix code for
language “-2” (English).
• For details on setting the display language, see section 2.6, “Changing the Displayed
Language.”

vi IM 04L41B01-01E
 How to Use This Manual

Conventions Used in This Manual

Unit
K Denotes 1024. Example: 768 KB (file size)
k Denotes 1000.

Markings
Improper handling or use can lead to injury to the user or
damage to the instrument. This symbol appears on the
instrument to indicate that the user must refer to the user's
manual for special instructions. The same symbol appears in
the corresponding place in the user's manual to identify those
instructions. In the manual, the symbol is used in conjunction
with the word “WARNING” or “CAUTION.”

Calls attention to actions or conditions that could cause serious

WARNING
or fatal injury to the user, and precautions that can be taken to
prevent such occurrences.

Calls attentions to actions or conditions that could cause light

CAUTION
injury to the user or damage to the instrument or user’s data, and
precautions that can be taken to prevent such occurrences.

Note Calls attention to information that is important for proper

operation of the instrument.
Subheadings
Bold characters Denotes key or character strings that appear on the screen.
Example: Volt

Aa#1 Indicates character types that can be used.

A Uppercase alphabet, a lowercase alphabet, # symbols,

1 numbers.

Procedure Carry out the procedure according to the step numbers.

All procedures are written with inexperienced users in mind;
Explanation depending on the operation, not all steps need to be taken.
Explanation gives information such as limitations related the
procedure.

Setup Screen Indicates the setup screen and explains the settings. A
detailed description of the function is not provided in this
Setup Items section. For details on the function, see chapter 1.

IM 04L41B01-01E vii
 Contents
Introduction.........................................................................................................................................i
DX’s Version and Functions Described in This Manual.................................................................... iii
How to Use This Manual................................................................................................................... vi

Chapter 1 Overview of Functions

1.1 Input Section......................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.2 Alarms................................................................................................................................... 1-4
1.3 Display.................................................................................................................................. 1-9
1.4 Data Storage Function........................................................................................................ 1-26
1.5 Batch Function.................................................................................................................... 1-36
1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)............................... 1-37
1.7 Security Function................................................................................................................ 1-42
1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)............................................... 1-44
1.9 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 Option).......................................................................... 1-52
1.10 Other Functions.................................................................................................................. 1-54

Chapter 2 Common Operations

2.1 Setting the Date/Time........................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Setting the Time Difference from GMT................................................................................. 2-2
2.3 Setting the Time Correction Operation during Memory Sampling........................................ 2-3
2.4 Setting the Date Format........................................................................................................ 2-4
2.5 Viewing the DX Information.................................................................................................. 2-5
2.6 Changing the Displayed Language....................................................................................... 2-7
2.7 Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight Saver................................................................. 2-8
2.8 Initializing Settings and Clearing the Internal Memory.......................................................... 2-9
2.9 Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact (/F1 Option)..............................................2-11
2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)................ 2-14
2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 option)............................ 2-19
2.12 Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)................................................................... 2-24
2.13 Setting the Decimal Point Type (Release number 3 or later).............................................. 2-26
2.14 Showing or Hiding the Menu Item for Switching from Setting Mode to Basic Setting Mode
(Release number 3 or later)................................................................................................ 2-27

Chapter 3 Measurement Channels and Alarms

3.1 Setting the Scan Interval and the Integration Time of the A/D Converter............................. 3-1
3.2 Setting the Burnout Detection and the Reference Junction Compensation of the
Thermocouple Input.............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.3 Setting the Input Range........................................................................................................ 3-3
3.4 Setting the Moving Average of the Input............................................................................... 3-6
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function..................................................................................... 3-7
3.6 Hiding the Alarm Indication................................................................................................. 3-10
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels................................................................................................3-11
3.8 Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK Operation).......................................................... 3-15
3.9 Performing Calibration Correction (/CC1 Option)............................................................... 3-16
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option).......................................................................................... 3-17
3.11 Setting the Method of Detecting Over-Range Values of Linearly Scaled Measurement
Channels............................................................................................................................. 3-20
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)................................... 3-21
3.13 Managing the Input Calibration Interval (/CC1 option; release numbers 4 and later)......... 3-30

viii IM 04L41B01-01E
 Contents

Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens 1

4.1 Operations in Operation Mode.............................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs ............................... 4-4
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display).................................................. 4-9
2
4.4 Display the Statuses of All Channels on One Screen (Overview Display).......................... 4-22
4.5 Displaying Various Information........................................................................................... 4-25
4.6 Using the Alarm Summary.................................................................................................. 4-28
4.7 Using the Message Summary............................................................................................. 4-30 3
4.8 Using the Memory Summary.............................................................................................. 4-32
4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs.................................................................................... 4-35
4.10 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later)......... 4-40
4
Chapter 5 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents
5.1 Setting Display Groups......................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers.................................................................................. 5-3
5
5.3 Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the Secondary Trend Interval........................... 5-5
5.4 Writing Messages................................................................................................................. 5-7
5.5 Changing the Channel Display Colors................................................................................ 5-10
5.6 Displaying Channels in Display Zones................................................................................5-11 6
5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display............................................................................ 5-12
5.8 Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale Band on the Scale.................................... 5-15
5.9 Partially Expanding the Waveform...................................................................................... 5-17
5.10 Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the Waveform at Start, Message Display Direction, 7
Waveform Line Width, and Grid.......................................................................................... 5-19
5.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method........................................................................... 5-20
5.12 Changing the Background Color of the Display.................................................................. 5-23
5.13 Automatically Switching Display Groups............................................................................ 5-24
8
5.14 Automatically Switching Back to the Default Display.......................................................... 5-25
5.15 Using the Favorite Key....................................................................................................... 5-26
5.16 Writing a Message When the DX Recovers from a Power Failure..................................... 5-28 9
5.17 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu............................................. 5-29
5.18 Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or later)............................................................ 5-33

Chapter 6 Saving and Loading Data 10

6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data...................................................... 6-1
6.2 Setting the Method for Saving the Data................................................................................ 6-4
6.3 Using the Batch Function...................................................................................................... 6-6
6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured Data, Saving the Measured Data
11
through Key Operation........................................................................................................ 6-10
6.5 Manually Saving the Measured Data (Manual Sample)..................................................... 6-14
6.6 Saving the Screen Image Data (Snapshot)........................................................................ 6-15 12
6.7 Managing the Files on the Storage Medium....................................................................... 6-16
6.8 Loading and Displaying the Measured Data in the Storage Medium.................................. 6-18
6.9 Saving/Loading the Setup Data.......................................................................................... 6-19
6.10 Loading and Saving Report Templates (/M1 and /PM1 options; release numbers 4 and later) App
............................................................................................................................................ 6-22

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E ix
Contents

Chapter 7 Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control
Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1
options and the USER key).................................................................................................. 7-1
7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action........................................................................................... 7-7
7.3 Changing the Response to Remote Contact Input Opening and Closing (/R1 and /PM1
options; release number 3 or later)..................................................................................... 7-10

Chapter 8 Using the Security Function

8.1 Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock Function)................................................................ 8-1
8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function).................................. 8-3
8.3 Logging in and Logging Out.................................................................................................. 8-6

Chapter 9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation
Channels............................................................................................................................... 9-1
9.2 Writing Expressions.............................................................................................................. 9-5
9.3 Displaying the Computation Channels.................................................................................9-11
9.4 Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting Computation, and Releasing Computation Data
Dropout Display.................................................................................................................. 9-14
9.5 Creating Reports................................................................................................................. 9-16
9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later).............................................. 9-19

Chapter 10 Troubleshooting
10.1 A List of Messages.............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.2 Troubleshooting................................................................................................................ 10-20

Chapter 11 Calibration
11.1 Periodic Inspection..............................................................................................................11-1
11.2 Calibrating the DX................................................................................................................11-2
11.3 Pulling Out the Inner Instrument (DX1000N).......................................................................11-4

Chapter 12 Specifications
12.1 Signal Input and Alarm........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2 Display Function................................................................................................................. 12-3
12.3 Data Saving Function......................................................................................................... 12-6
12.4 Other Standard Functions................................................................................................... 12-9
12.5 Options..............................................................................................................................12-11
12.6 General Specifications...................................................................................................... 12-19
12.7 External Dimensions......................................................................................................... 12-24

Appendix
Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data.......................................................... App-1
Appendix 2 Types of Data FilesThat the DX Can Create and Their Application................... App-4
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format......................................................................................... App-5

Index

x IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 1 Overview of Functions

1.1 Input Section 1

Overview of Functions
Measurement Channel
• Number of Measurement Channels and Scan Interval 2
The DX samples the input signals on the measurement channels at the scan interval
to obtain the measured values. The table below shows the relationship between the
number of measurement channels and the scan interval.
No. of Scan Interval
3
Model Measurement
Channels Normal Mode Fast Sampling Mode*
DX1002, DX1002N 2
125 ms, 250 ms 25 ms
DX1004,
DX1004N 4
DX1006, DX1006N 6
4
1 s, 2 s, 5 s 2 s, 5 s 125 ms
DX1012, DX1012N 12
A/D Converter Integration Time 60 Hz/50 Hz 60 Hz/50 Hz/100 ms 600 Hz (fixed)

* When using the multi batch function (/BT2) the DX do not have a fast sampling mode.
5
For the setting procedure, see section 3.1.

• Integration Time of the A/D Converter

The DX uses an A/D converter to convert the sampled analog signal to a digital
signal. By setting the integration time of the A/D converter to match the time period 6
corresponding to one cycle of the power supply or an integer multiple of one cycle, the
power supply frequency noise can be effectively eliminated.
• Because 100 ms is an integer multiple of 16.7 ms and 20 ms, this setting can be used to
eliminate the power frequency noise for both frequency, 50 Hz and 60 Hz.
7
• In fast sampling mode, the performance of eliminating power frequency noise is worse than in
normal mode. We recommend that you use normal mode when making measurements in an
environment affected by power frequency noise.
8
For the setting procedure, see section 3.1.

Input Type and Computation

You can make measurements using the following input types. 9
Description Input Type
DC voltage
You can measure DC voltages in the range of ±20 mV to ±50 V.
DC current
You can measure a DC current signal by converting it to a voltage signal using
a shunt*1 resistor attached to the input terminal.
The converted signal can be measured within the DC voltage range (see above). 10
Thermocouple You can measure temperatures corresponding to these thermocouple types:
R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N, W, L, U, and WRe3-25.
It is also possible to measure using other thermocouples, such as PR40-20 and
PLATINEL.*2
RTD You can measure temperatures using RTD types Pt100 and JPt100. 11
It is also possible to measure using other RTD types such as Cu10, Cu25,*3
Pt50, and Ni100.*2
ON/OFF input You can display contact input or voltage input signals correlated to 0% or 100%
of the display range.
Contact input: A closed contact is on (1). An open contact is off (0).
Voltage input: Less than 2.4 V is off (0). 2.4 V or more is on (1).
12
Pulse input*4 You can count pulses.
*1 Item sold separately. For example, you can use a 250-Ω shunt resistor to convert a
4- to 20-mA signal to a 1- to 5-V signal.
*2 /N3 option App
*3 /N1 option
*4 /PM1 option

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-1
1.1 Input Section

The following input processing and computation are available.

Moving average Linear Calibration Low cut Difference Measured

scaling correction computation value
(/CC1 option)
DC Voltage

Shunt resistor
DC current
√
Square root computation
1-5V
Burnout detection

RJC

Thermocouple
Burnout detection

RTD

ON/OFF input

Convert to number of pulses over 1 second

Pulse
(/PM1 option) Dotted lines indicate that the function can be selected.

Reference Junction Compensation Burnout Detection

Detects and indicates a burnout in the sensor.
Performs reference junction compensation on
the thermocouple. DX Burnout
1-5V
Indicated as
Thermocouple Detected on the Burnout.
Internal 1-5 V value.
reference
Thermocouple junction

Burnout Thermoelectromotive
force
Indicated as
External reference junction Burnout.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.2. For the setting procedure, see section 3.2.
Moving Average

Eliminates noise.
Operation example when the number New sampled New sampled
of moving average data points is 3 data data

1 10.0 mV 15.0 mV 10.0 mV Number of moving

Sampling data 2 5.0 mV 10.0 mV 15.0 mV average data points: 2 to 400
in the buffer 3 0.0 mV 5.0 mV 10.0 mV
Clear Clear
Measured (Moving average) 5.0 mV 10.0 mV 11.7 mV
value
Sampling nth time n + 1th time n + 2th time

For the setting procedure, see section 3.4.

1-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.1 Input Section

Square Root Computation Linear Scaling 1

Takes the square root of the input value and converts Converts the unit to obtain the measured value.
the unit to obtain the measured value.

Overview of Functions
b B
Input X Measured 10 V 300 °c 2
value x value Input Measured
a A B value value
x–a 0V –100 °c
X = (B – A)
b–a
+A
A
3
a b
For the setting procedure, see section 3.3. For the setting procedure, see section 3.3.
Calibration Correction (/CC1 Option) Low-cut

Corrects the input value with the characteristics

For square root computation, measured values below 4
the specified value are cut.
specified by segments to obtain the measured value.
For 1-5 V input, values below 0 % are cut.
Measured
Number of break value
Output
points: Up to 16
Result of square root
5
value computation
Measured
( value ) Low-cut value
Input
Input value 6
value
For the setting procedure, see section 3.9. For the setting procedure, see section 3.3.
Difference computation Pulse Input (/PM1 Option)
The measured value of the channel is set to the Pulse that can be counted Input to the DX 7
difference with respect to the measured value of the
reference channel. Pulse
100 Hz or less Contact
Input
value
Measured
value or DX 8
–
Open
Measured value on the reference channel 5 ms or more collector

9
Count on the DX
The contact changes from open to close.
The signal level at the input terminal changes from high
to low.
10
For the setting procedure, see section 3.3. For the setting procedure, see section 3.10.

Note
Difference computation is executed even if the input type or range is not the same between
11
the difference computation channel and the reference channel. The difference is computed
discarding the decimal place and unit, and the decimal place and unit of the difference
computation channel are applied.
Example 1: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 and the measured
12
value of the reference channel is 100.0, the computed result is
10.00 – 100.0 = –90.00.
Example 2: If the input value of the difference computation channel is 10.00 V and the
measured value of the reference channel is 5.00 mV, the computed result is
App
10.00 V – 5.00 mV = 5.00 V.

Calibration Management (/CC1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

You can use this function to make sure that calibration is performed regularly.
When you enable calibration management, a screen (the calibration notification screen)
Index
appears to notify you in advance that the calibration due date is approaching.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.13.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-3
 1.2 Alarms
This function generates an alarm when the measured data meets a certain condition. Up
to four alarms can be set for each channel.
Alarm Type
You can use the alarms shown below. The character inside the parentheses is the
symbol denoting each alarm.
For the alarm setting procedure, see section 3.7.
High Limit Alarm (H) Low Limit Alarm (L)
Measured value Hysteresis Measured value Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm value

Alarm output ON Alarm output ON

Delay High Limit Alarm (T) Delay Low Limit Alarm (t)
Measured value Measured value
Alarm value Alarm value

Delay time Delay time

Alarm output ON Alarm output ON
High Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (R) Low Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm (r)
Measured value Change in the Measured value
measured value
T2 T2 Amount of change in
Amount of change in the setting
the setting | T2-T1 |
T1 T1
T2-T1 |
Change in the measured value
t1 t2 t1 t2
Time Time
Interval (t2-t1) Interval (t2-t1)
Difference High Limit Alarm (h) Difference Low Limit Alarm (l)
Difference in the measured values of two channels Difference in the measured values of two channels
Hysteresis Hysteresis
Alarm value
Alarm value

Alarm output ON Alarm output ON

• Alarm Hysteresis
You can set a width (hysteresis) to the value used to activate and release alarms.

• Delay High Limit Alarm and Delay Low Limit Alarm

An alarm occurs when the measured value remains above or below the alarm value
for a specified time period (delay period).

• H
 igh Limit on Rate-of-Change Alarm and Low Limit on Rate-of-Change
Alarm
The rate-of-change of the measured values is checked over a certain time (interval).
An alarm occurs if the rate-of-change of the measured value in the rising/falling
direction is greater than or equal to the specified value.
The alarm value of the rate-of-change alarm is set using an absolute value. The
interval is derived using the following equation and set using the number of samples.
Interval = the scan interval × the number of samples
For the setting procedure, see section 3.5.

• Difference Upper Limit Alarm and Difference Lower Limit Alarm

An alarm occurs when the difference in the measured values of two channels is
greater/less than or equal to the specified value. These alarms can be specified on
measurement channels set to difference computation.

1-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.2 Alarms

Alarm Indication 1
The alarm conditions are displayed as alarm icons in the status display section and on
the operation screen such as the trend, digital, bar graph, overview displays. Detailed

Overview of Functions
information about the alarms is displayed in the alarm summary.
• Alarm Levels and Colors (Release number 3 or later) 2
Y
 ou can set separate levels and colors for the four alarms on a single channel. When
multiple alarms occur, the DX gives higher priority to the display of alarms with higher
levels. It is easy to understand what processes are taking place when alarms occur if
you associate an alarm’s color with its level. Level and color settings are the same for
3
each channel.
• In the overview display, the channel display area appears in the color of the alarm
that has occurred. 4

• The following items also appear in the color of the alarm that has occurred.
• Alarm marks in the trend, digital, and bar graph displays 7
• The alarm point marks on scales (when they are set to “Alarm”)
• The alarm occurrence mark in the alarm summary

When multiple alarms occur on the same channel, the various displays respond as 8
described below:
• In the overview display, the channel display area is displayed using the color of the
alarm with the highest priority level.
• In the trend and digital displays, the alarm type is displayed using the symbol for 9
the alarm with the highest priority level.
• In the annunciator display, the display window is displayed using the color of the
alarm with the highest priority level.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.7. 10
• Alarm-Activated Text Display (Release number 3 or later)
Using the Event Action function, you can display a previously set string of text (comment
text block) when an alarm occurs. 11
For the procedure to set comment text blocks and event action, see sections 5.18 and
7.1, respectively.

• Hold/Non-hold of Indications 12
The alarm indication can be set to operate in the following fashion when the condition
is no longer met.
• Clear the alarm indication (non-hold).
• Hold the alarm indication until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold). App
The default setting is non-hold.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.5.

• Alarm Hide Function Index

No indication is made when an alarm occurs. The alarm is also not recorded in the
alarm summary. The alarm is output to the relay (/A[ ] option) or internal switch. This
function can be set for each channel and each alarm.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.6.
IM 04L41B01-01E 1-5
1.2 Alarms

Alarm Output Relay Operation

Contact signals can be generated from alarm output relays (/A_ option) when alarms
occur. The alarm output relay operation can be changed.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.5.
Reflash Non-hold/Hold

Channel 1 Alarm ACK Alarm ACK

Alarm
Alarm Occurrence
Channel 2
Channel 3 Release

Non-hold
Alarm
Alarm output relay
(Reflash on) Normal

Display
500 ms, 1 s, or 2 s

Alarm output relay Alarm

Hold
(Reflash off) (when a relay is set to OR logic)
Normal
AND/OR

Non-hold
Channel 1 Activated

Relay Action on ACK Normal

Alarm
Channel 2 Deactivated

Alarm output relay AND Activated or

or
internal switch OR Deactivated
Hold

(You can set AND/OR for the alarm output relay and internal Relay is activated
Alarm output relay

switch. For details about the internal switch, see the next at the next scan
page.) interval.

Energize or De-energize
Non-hold

When power Normal When an alarm Activated

Relay Action on ACK Reset

is shut down operation is occurring

Deactivated
Energize
NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Activated or

De-energize Deactivated
Hold

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Relay is activated
NO: Normally Opened when the next
C: Common alarm occurs.
NC: Normally Closed

• Reflash
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, this function notifies the
occurrence of subsequent alarms after the relay is activated by the first alarm. When
subsequent alarms occur, the output relay is released temporarily.The duration for which
the relays are deactivated can be set to 500 ms, 1 s, or 2 s.
The reflash function is set on the first three output relays.
* I01 to I03. I01 and I02 for the /A1 option.

Note
When reflash is enabled, the first three output relays are used exclusively as reflash relays.
The first three output relays are set to OR logic and de-energize operation regardless of the
AND/OR and energize/de-energize settings explained below.

• AND/OR
When multiple alarms are assigned to one alarm output relay, the condition for
activating the output relay can be selected from the following: You can select AND
operation also for the internal switch.
• AND: Activated when all assigned alarms are occurring simultaneously.
• OR: Activated when any of the specified alarms is occurring.
1-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.2 Alarms

• Energize or De-energize Operation 1

You can select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an
alarm occurs. If de-energized is selected, the status of the alarm output relay when an

Overview of Functions
alarm occurs is the same as the status that results when the DX power is shut down.
The setting applies to all alarm output relays. 2
• Non-Hold/Hold
The alarm output relay can be set to operate in the following fashion when the alarm
condition is no longer met. 3
• Turn OFF the relay output (non-hold).
• Hold the relay at ON until the alarm ACK operation is executed (hold).
The setting applies to all alarm output relays.
4
• Alarm ACK Operation
The alarm acknowledge (alarm ACK) operation releases all alarm indications and
relay outputs. For the action of alarm indication and alarm output relay when you
carried out the alarm ACK operation, see the previous page. 5
• Individual Alarm ACK Operation (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced
security option)
This operation releases the relay output of individual alarms. This operation is referred 6
to as “individual alarm ACK.” For information about how alarm display and output
relay operations respond to an individual alarm ACK, see the previous page. You can
perform individual alarm ACK from the overview display.
For operating instructions, see section 4.4. 7
Note
When you enter the basic setting mode, the hold/non-hold condition of the alarm output relay
immediately before is retained. In the basic setting mode, alarms are not detected, and you
8
cannot acknowledge alarms.

Internal Switch 9
The alarm status can be output to software switches (30 internal switches). The values of
the internal switch are shown below. Like the alarm output relay, you can specify AND/
OR operation (see the previous page). The internal switches cannot be operated other
than for alarm output.
10
Alarm occurrence
Alarm
Alarm release

1
11
Internal switch
0

The internal switches can be used events of the event action function (see section 1.6).
In addition, the internal switches can be written in calculation expressions of computation 12
channels (/M1 or /PM1 option).

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-7
1.2 Alarms

Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

You can use the DX as an alarm annunciator. No lock-in, lock-in, and double lock-in
sequences are supported. The alarm display and alarm output relay operations follow the
annunciator sequence.

For the setting procedure, see section 3.12.

1-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display 1

Overview of Functions
Common Items Related to the Display
• TFT Color LCD and the Screen Configuration 2
The DX has a TFT color LCD (240 × 320 dot resolution). The screen consists of the
status display section and the data display section.
Status display section
3

Data display section 4

5
• Status Display Section
The status display section shows the display name, date/time, batch name (when
using the batch function), user name (when using the login function), usage of the 6
internal memory or CF card, alarm occurrence, computation status (/M1 or /PM1
option), and usage of key lock or e-mail transmission.
• Data Display Section
The data display section shows the measured data using numeric values, 7
waveforms, and bar graphs. It also shows the setup screen when setting functions.

• Group Display
On the trend, digital, and bar graph displays, the data of channels is displayed by 8
groups that are set in advance. Up to 10 groups can be registered, and up to six
channels can be assigned to each group. Groups are common to the trend, digital,
and bar graph displays.
The displayed group can be switched automatically at a specified time interval (5 s to 9
1 min).
For the setting procedure, see section 5.1.

• Channel Number Display and Tag Display 10

You can choose to label displayed channels according to their tags or according
to their channel numbers. In the tag display, you can display tag numbers and
comments. This setting applies to all channels.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.2. For the tag number and tag comment 11
display example, see section 4.2.

• Update Interval of Measured Values

The values are updated every second. However, if the scan interval is greater than 1 s, 12
the values are updated at the scan interval.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.3.

• Alarm Indication App

Alarms that are set for each channel are checked at all times and are indicated with
the symbol representing the alarm type on each display.
Alarm Type Symbol Alarm Type Symbol
High limit alarm H High limit on rate-of-change alarm R Index

Low limit alarm L Low limit on rate-of-change alarm r
Difference high limit alarm h Delay high limit alarm T
Difference low limit alarm l Delay low limit alarm t

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-9
1.3 Display

Status Display Section

The following information is displayed in the status display section during operation mode
or setting mode.

Memory sampling status

Data type
Memory sampling
DISP: Display data
stopped
EVENT: Event data
Memory sampling progress
Memory sampling Displays the progress using a green bar graph. The frame indicates the file
in progress save interval (display data) or the data length (event data).
Error in internal memory.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Memory sampling icon Displays the remaining memory sampling time for the left bar graph.

Alarm icon
Display name or group name Displayed when any alarm is activated.
For all channel display on the trend display, “All” is Blinks when there are alarms that are
displayed.
(Red) occurring but have not been acknowledged.
Date and time
Displayed in yellow while the time is being corrected. All alarms have been released after they
have occurred, but there are alarms that
When using the batch function
Batch name and the display (Green) have not been acknowledged.
name are shown alternately. Status icon
Date and time The status assigned to the status output
(/F1 option) is occurring.
If the “batch number-lot number” exceeds 20 characters,
the “date and time” position is used to display the “batch User locked icon (/AS1 option)
number-lot number.” Displayed when the user is locked.

When using the login function Keys are locked.

Name of the user logged in
E-mail transmission is enabled.
Date and time and the
display name are shown Computation icon (/M1 or /PM1 option)
alternately.
White icon: Computation started
When using the login and batch functions
Name of the user logged in Yellow icon: Computation data dropout occurred
Batch name, the display
name, and date and time are CF card icon
shown alternately.
CF card is being accessed.

The green level display indicates the amount of Waiting.

CF card used. If Media FIFO* is not enabled and
Light blue icon: CF card in the slot is not
the free space on the CF card falls below 10%,
recognized. Remove and reset it.
the level indicator changes to red.
* See section 1.4, in the DX1000/DX1000N User's CF card error.
Manual. Media FIFO is a function available on Carry out the procedure below to reset the CF
release number 2 or later. card icon to normal.
• Remove the CF card, and then reinsert it.
• Replace the CF card with a normal one.
• Format the CF card on the DX (the data on
the CF card will be erased).

Bar Graph
When event data recording is set to pretrigger, the DX will start recording pretrigger data
after you press the START key. “Waiting” appears in the bar graph (release number 3 or
later). At this time, the progress bar will turn orange. After the pretrigger time elapses,
the length of the bar fixed at that point. However, the relevant data is updated until the
trigger condition is met. When the trigger condition is met, the bar turns green, and data
is recorded after the data in the pretrigger section.

1-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Trend Display (T-Y) 1

Measured data is displayed in a waveform. For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
Current value mark

Overview of Functions
Scale
See section 5.7
2
Trend Space function Trend interval
Inserts a division-wide See section 5.3
space here. Grid
See section 4.2
1 division
See section 5.10 3
Trip line (up to four lines)
(30 dots) See section 5.1

Time at the grid position Numeric display section

See section 4.2
Either displays the time,
or the date and time. Tag or channel number,
4
See sections 2.4 and 5.3 measured value, unit, and specified alarm
Waveform (displayed with the set channel color)
To change channel colors, see section 5.5.
To change waveform line width, see section 5.10. 5
To display every channel's waveform, see section 4.2.
Maximum value
Minimum value
1 dot 6
Displays the maximum and minimum values Color scale band
sampled in the time corresponding to one dot. See section 5.8
Display layout See section 5.10 Current value indicated
by bar
7
Horizontal display See section 5.7
Alarm point mark
See section 5.8
8
Alarm mark
Alarm type

9
Horizontal split display (displays two groups)
The waveforms of two consecutive groups are
displayed. The numeric display sections show
the data for the first four channels in their
Horizontal wide display groups. 10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-11
1.3 Display

• Updating of the Waveform

On the screen, 30 dots along the time axis is represented by a unit called division (see
the figure on the previous page). The displayed waveform is updated at an interval
corresponding to one dot. This interval is determined by the time corresponding to one
division (referred to as the trend interval). The relationship between the trend interval
and the speed of movement of waveforms on the screen is as follows:
*1 *1 *2
Trend interval (/DIV) 5s 10 s 15 s 30 s 1 min
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds) 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h) 10000 5000 2500 1250 625
Trend interval (/DIV) 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds) 4 10 20 30 40
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h) 312 156 78 42 31
Trend interval (/DIV) 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10 h
Time corresponding to one dot (in seconds) 60 120 240 480 1200
Speed of waveform movement (approximation in mm/h) 21 10 5.2 2.6 1.0
*1 40 dots per division. Selectable on the DX1002, DX1002N, DX1004, and DX1004N
(release number 3 or later).
*2 Selectable on the DX1006, DX1006N, DX1012, and DX1012N when the scan
interval is set to fast sampling mode (release number 3 or later).

Switching the Trend Interval

You can switch from the normal trend interval to the secondary trend interval during
memory sampling and vice versa. For the operating procedure, see section 5.3.

• Writing Messages
Trend display
Preset messages
1 Start
2 Material 1
3
4

Free message
Set the message when writing the message

Preset Messages
Preset messages are recalled and written.
The number of messages that you can use are 100 (message 1 to 10 are shared with
free messages). For the operating procedure, see section 5.4

Free Messages
Messages are entered when you need to enter them. The number of messages that
you can use are 10. For the operating procedure, see section 5.4.
Automatic Message Writing
• A message is written when the trend interval is switched during memory sampling.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.3.
• A message is written when the power recovers from a power failure during memory
sampling. For the operating procedure, see section 5.16.
• A message is written when the setting mode setup items are changed during
memory sampling (only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option).

1-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Message display method 1

• Except for the vertical display, you can set the direction in which messages are
displayed to horizontal or vertical. For the setting procedure, see section 5.10.

Overview of Functions
• Messages can be displayed consolidated at the upper left of the screen (list
display). For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
List display
2

3
Vertical display

• Zone Display
You can display channels in specified zones. This function can be used to keep the 5
waveforms from overlapping for easier view.
In the example below, channel 1 is displayed in the 0 to 30% zone, channel 2 in the
30 to 60% zone, and channel 3 in the 60 to 100% zone.
Normal display Zone display 6
Zone 1 Zone 2 Zone 3
0% 30% 60% 100%

0% 100%

Channel1 Channel2 Channel3

For the setting procedure, see section 5.6.
9
Auto Zone (Release number 3 or later)
You can divide the waveform display area evenly between each channel in a group.
For operating instructions, see section 4.2.
10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-13
1.3 Display

• Partial Expanded Display

By compressing a section of the waveform display range, the rest of the section is
expanded.
In the example below, 0 V (boundary value) is moved to the 30% position of
the display range (new boundary position). The 30% area below the boundary
corresponds to “– 6 V to 0 V” and 70% area above the boundary corresponds to “0 V
to 6 V.”
Normal Display Partial Expanded Dispaly
Compressed portion Expanded portion
% of full display span
0 50 100 0 30 100

–6V 0 6V –6V 0 6V
Measured value Measured value
For the setting procedure, see section 5.9.

• Alarm Indication
Alarm mark, alarm type, and measured value are displayed as follows according to
the alarm status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or
later), the alarm mark follows the annunciator sequence.
When indication is When indication is
set to non-hold set to hold
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Occurrence
Alarm
Release

Alarm mark Green Red Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red green red

Alarm type None Red None None Red None None None Red Red None

Measured Blue Red Blue Blue Red Blue Blue Blue Red Red Blue
value

1-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Digital Display 1
Displays the measured data numerically using large numbers. For the operating
procedure, see section 4.2.

Overview of Functions
2
Measured value
Unit
Alarm mark
Tag or channel number
3

4

Note
• Numeric display of measurement channels
If a measured value of a measurement channel is over range (see below), the measured
5
value is indicated as “+Over” or “–Over.” If a burnout is detected on a channel whose
burnout detection function is enabled, the word “Burnout” is indicated. Otherwise, a numeric
value is displayed.
Over range of measurement channels
6
• For DC voltage input, over range occurs when the measured value of the measurement
channel exceeds ±5% of the measurable range. For example, the measurable range
when the measurement range is 2 V is –2.000 to 2.000 V. If the measured value exceeds
2.200 V, + over range occurs; if the measured value falls below –2.200 V, – over range
7
occurs.
• For thermocouple or RTD input, over range occurs when the measured value exceeds
approximately ±10°C of the measurable range. For example, the measurable range
when the measurement range is R is 0.0 to 1760.0°C. If the measured value exceeds
approximately 1770.0°C, + over range occurs; if the measured value falls below
8
approximately –10.0°C, – over range occurs.
• For channels that are linearly scaled, + over range occurs when the value exceeds
30000 excluding the decimal point; – over range occurs when the value falls below
–30000. However, + over range can be changed to greater than or equal to 105% of the
9
scale width and – over range to less than or equal to –5% of the scale width within ±
30000. For the setting procedure, see section 3.11.
• Numeric display of computation channels
See section 1.8, “Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)
10

• Alarm Indication
Alarm mark and measured value are displayed as follows according to the alarm 11
status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the
alarm mark follows the annunciator sequence.
When indication is When indication
set to non-hold is set to hold
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
12
Occurrence
Alarm
Release

Alarm mark Green Red Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red green red App
Measured Blue Red Blue Blue Red Blue Blue Blue Red Red Blue
value

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-15
1.3 Display

Bar Graph Display

Waveform data is displayed in a bar graph. For the operating procedure, see section 4.2.
Vertical

Tag or channel number

Alarm mark
Upper limit
Scale marks
See section 5.7
Alarm point mark
Bar (displayed with
the set channel color)
See section 5.11
Unit of measurement
and lower limit
Measured value
Bar graph base position is set to Center.

See section 5.11

Horizontal See section 5.10

Bar graph base position is set to

Normal, Lower, or Upper.
You can select Lower or Upper on a DX
with release number 2 or later.
See section 5.11
Bar graph base position is set to
Center.
See section 5.11

• Updating of the Bar Graph

The bar graph is updated at the same interval as numeric values.

• Alarm Indication
Alarm mark, alarm point mark, and measured value are displayed as follows according
to the alarm status. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3
or later), the alarm marks and alarm point marks follow the annunciator sequence.

When indication is When indication is

set to non-hold set to hold
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Occurrence
Alarm
Release

Alarm mark Green Red Green Green Blinking Blinking Green Green Blinking Red Green
red green red

Point mark Green Red Green Green Red Green Green Green Red Red Green

Measured Blue Red Blue Blue Red Blue Blue Blue Red Red Blue
value

1-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Historical Trend Display 1

The waveform of the past measured data (display or event data) in the internal memory

Overview of Functions
or external storage medium can be displayed. This function is called Historical trend.
• Methods of Displaying the Historical Trend
There are four methods to display the historical trend of the measured data in the
2
internal memory.
• Display from the alarm summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.6.
• Display from the message summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.7.
3
• Display from the memory summary. For the operating procedure, see section 4.8.
• Recall from the display selection menu. For the operating procedure, see section 4.3.
Measured data on an external storage medium can also be displayed as historical
trend. For the operating procedure, see section 6.8. 4
• Displayed Contents
Waveform (channel display color)
Location of the most
Background color
Message (changeable)
recent data 5
Date and time at the right end of the time
axis*2, or the time at the cursor location
The time at the cursor location is
surrounded by a yellow square. 6
Trip line
Cursor
Date and time at the left end of the time
axis*2 7
Tag or channel number
(channel display color)
Unit
Measured values (maximum and
minimum values for the entire display)*1
Measured values (maximum and
8

minimum values at the cursor position)*1
*1 You can also view a digital display of just the value at the cursor position
(release number 3 or later).
*2 You can also display the relative time from the start of recording
(release number 3 or later). 9
Half screen display

10
Present trend

Historical trend
11

Item Description 12
Alarm summary Displays an alarm summary of the displayed data.
Message summary Displays a message summary of the displayed data.
Data information Shows information about the displayed data (file name, sample start
time, end time, etc.). App

• Added Messages
Added messages can be written. For the operating procedure, see section 5.4.
Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-17
1.3 Display

• Auto Span Display (Release number 3 or later)

*
The DX can automatically adjust the display span of the selected channel. It sets the
span based on the maximum and minimum displayed historical data values. This
setting is deactivated when you switch to another group.
* Auto span affects channels that are in the same scale position as the selected channel.

When the maximum or minimum values are outside of the set display span
0 0

Time axis

Time axis

Auto
span

When the maximum or minimum values are within the set display span
0 0
Time axis

Time axis

Auto
span

If the maximum or minimum data value falls outside the maximum selectable display
span, the DX adjusts the display span to the maximum or minimum possible value.
The DX responds in the same way when it encounters overflow data.

• Top Channel Display (Release number 3 or later)

Displays the selected channel’s historical trend waveform in front of all of the others.
This setting is deactivated when you switch to another group.

• Signature (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)

See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

1-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Overview Display 1
Displays a list of the statuses of all channels.
You can move the cursor to select a channel and display the trend, digital, or bar graph

Overview of Functions
of the group containing the selected channel.
For the operating procedure, see section 4.4. 2

Channels on which an alarm is

occurring are indicated in red
Alarm type
3
Cursor

Tag or channel number 4

Measured value and unit

• Alarm Indication 5
Channel display area, tag/channel number, alarm type, and measured value
are displayed as follows according to the alarm status. When you use the alarm
annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the displays of the previously listed
items follow the annunciator sequence. 6
When indication is When indication is
set to non-hold set to hold
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Occurrence
Alarm
Release
7
Tag/Channel Black White Black Black Blinking Blinking Black Black Blinking White Black
white black white

Channel Green Red Green Green Red Green Green Green Red Red Green 8
area

Alarm type None White None None White None None None White White None

Measured Black White Black Black White Black Black Black White White Black 9
value

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-19
1.3 Display

Alarm Summary
Displays a list of the most recent alarms.
• Up to 1000 alarms can be displayed.
• You can select arbitrary alarm information and recall the historical trend of the display
data or event data that contains the alarm information.
For the setting procedure, see section 4.6.

To the historical trend display

Date and time of alarm occurrence/release

Alarm level number (1, 2, 3, or 4) and type
Channel (H, L, h, l, R, r, T, or t)
: Alarm occurrence
( blinks until the AlarmACK operation is
carried out if Indicator is set to Hold.)
: Alarm release
: Alarm output release (when blinking is cleared through the
AlarmACK operation)
Cursor (selects an alarm)
The alarm information number displayed on the screen's bottom line
and the internal memory alarm information number.

When you use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the alarm
occurrence mark follows the annunciator sequence. If the alarm sequence is no lock-in
(ISA-A-4):
• The alarm occurrence mark does not blink.
• “ACK” is recorded when the alarm is released.

1-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Message Summary 1
Displays a list of written messages and the time the messages were written.
• Up to 450 messages can be displayed.

Overview of Functions
• Up to 50 messages that are added to the past data section (added messages) can be
displayed. 2
• You can select arbitrary message information and recall the historical trend of the
display data or event data that contains the message.
For the setting procedure, see section 4.7.
3

To the historical trend display

4

Message Destination group to write the message

Added message
(displayed in blue)
All groups “A”or a group number, or
the second of the date/time when the
6
message was written.
Cursor (selects the message) Date/Time when the message was written
Number of the message displayed on the bottom line/number
of messages in the internal memory 7
• Switching of the Display Items
You can switch between two sets of display contents.
• Message, time when the message was written, and group to which the message 8
was written or second of the time when the message was written
• Message, user name that wrote the message

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-21
1.3 Display

Memory Summary
Displays the information pertaining to the display data and event data in the internal
memory.
• By selecting the display data or event data, the historical trend display can be recalled.
• The number of manual sampled data and report data (/M1 and /PM1 options) in the
internal memory is displayed.

For the operating procedure, see section 4.8.

• You can display file information (only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option).
See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

Date/Time of the most recent data

Number of data points in the internal
memory/maximum number of data
points that can be recorded in the
internal memory
Data type
• Display data
• Event data
To the historical trend display

Status
Sampling count
Date/Time of memory stop
Date/Time of memory start
Cursor (selects the file)

• Switching of the Display Items

You can switch between two display methods.
• Display the start and end times
• Display the file name

• Saving the Data

The data in the internal memory can be saved to a CF card or USB flash memory
(/USB1 option).

1-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Report Data (/M1 and /PM1 Options) 1

Report data residing in the internal memory can be displayed.
For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.

Overview of Functions
Report type 2
Start: Start date/time
Timeup: Report date/time
Report data status
Indicates that the following occurred 3
between the report interval.
E: Error data
O: Over data
P: Power failure
C: Time change 4
B: Burnout
Unit Average, maximum, minimum, sum,
or instantaneous value
Channel number
Number of the displayed report data/number of report data in the internal memory
5
Stacked Bar Graph (/M1 and /PM1 options)
You can display the report data (that is stored in the internal memory) of each report
group in a stacked bar graph. 6
For operating instructions, see section 4.10.
For information about report groups, see section 9.5.

• Types of Displayed Data

The type of displayed data is determined by the report kind, which is set using the 7
report function.
Report Kind Displayed Report Data
Hour, H + D Sums for each hour and sums for the day
Day + Week Sums for each day and sums for the week 8
Day, D + M Sums for each day and sums for the month

Example: Hourly + daily display

9
Daily sums of each channel and the
daily sums of all channels of the
report group
If you select a bar graph, the sum
of the hour selected with the cursor 10
is displayed.
Sums for the day (bar graph)
of a report group
11
Hourly report group sums (bar graph)

• Display Modes
You can switch the bar graph between single graph and dual graph display. 12
Dual graph display (Shows the data from
Single graph display two consecutive periods)

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-23
1.3 Display

Status Display
The following displays are available.
For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
• Relay Status Display
Displays the status of the alarm output relay and internal switch.

• Modbus Client Status Display and Modbus Master Status Display

Displays the command status.

• Event Level Switch Status (Release number 3 or later)

Displays the status of the event level switches.

Log Display
Displays various logs (operation log).
For the operating procedure, see section 4.9.
Log Type Description
*1
Login Log of login/logout, log of time setting, and log of power failure
Error Log of error messages
Communications Log of communication commands
FTP transfer Log of FTP transfers
WEB Log of Web operations
E-mail transmission Log of e-mail transmissions
SNTP Log of accesses to the SNTP server
DHCP Log of accesses to the DHCP server
MODBUS Log of communications using Modbus client or Modbus master
*2
Operation Log of operations
*2
Change settings Log of setting changes
*1 Only on DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
*2 Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

Other Useful Functions

• Automatically Reverting to the Specified Display
Show a preset display when there is no operation for a specific time.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.14.

• Favorite Key
Register a frequently used display to the Favorite key and enable the display to be
shown through simple operation.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.15.

• Customizing the Menus

Change the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed and the
screen menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed.
For the setting procedure, see section 5.17.

1-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.3 Display

Setting the Display Conditions of the LCD 1

The display conditions of the LCD can be configured.

Overview of Functions
Display Attribute Setting
Background color of the The background color of the display can be set to white or black. The
operation display default value is White. For the setting procedure, see section 5.12. 2
Background color of the You can select white, cream, black, or light gray for the background
historical trend screen color of the screen. The default value is Black. For the setting
procedure, see section 5.12.
LCD brightness

The brightness of the LCD can be set among eight levels. The default
brightness is 2. For the setting procedure, see section 2.7.
3
Backlight saver The lifetime of the LCD backlight can be extended by automatically
turning OFF or dimming the light when there is no key operation for a
specified amount of time. The display returns to the original
brightness with a key operation or an alarm occurrence. By default, 4
the backlight saver is disabled. For the setting procedure, see
section 2.7.

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-25
 1.4 Data Storage Function
This section explains the types of data that the DX can record and how to store them.
For information about the data storage function on DXs with the /AS1 advanced
security option, see the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual,
IM04L41B01-05EN.

Data Types
The types of data that the DX can record are as follows:
Data Type Description
Display data • Waveform data displayed on the trend display. The measured data is recorded
as a specified sampling interval. The sampling interval is specified using the
trend interval.
• The minimum and maximum values among the measured data within the
sampling interval are saved.
• A header string (common to other files) can be written in the file.
• The display data contains alarm and message information.
• Data format: Binary (Undisclosed)
Event data • Measured data that is recorded at a specified sampling interval. There are two
modes. One mode starts recording when a trigger event occurs. The other
mode records at all times.
• A header string (common to other files) can be written in the file.
• The event data contains alarm and message information.
• Data format: Binary (Undisclosed)
Manual sampled • Instantaneous value of the measured data when a manual sample operation is
data executed.
• A header string (common to other files) can be written in the file.
• Data format: Text
Report data • Hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly report data. Report data is created at an
(/M1 and /PM1 interval that is determined by the report type (one hour for hourly reports, one
options) day for daily reports, and so on).
• A header string (common to other files) can be written in the file.
• Data format: Text
• The data can be converted to XML spreadsheet data (release numbers 4 and
later).
Snapshot data • The image data of the DX screen when the snapshot operation is executed.
(screen image • The data can be saved to a CF card.
data) • Data format: PNG
Setup data • The setup data of the DX.
• Data format: Binary (Undisclosed)
Custom Display • The custom display setup data of the DX.
Setup Data • Data format: text

• Display data and event data

Display data can be likened to the conventional recording on the chart sheet and
are useful for long-term recording. Event data is useful when you wish to record the
measured data in detail.
Display data
Maximum value per sampling interval
Minimum value per sampling interval
Event data
Instantaneous value during sampling

Measured data per

scan interval
Time
Scan interval
Sampling interval of event data
Sampling interval of display data

1-26 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.4 Data Storage Function

Flow of Data Recording and Storage 1

Measured data is recorded once to the internal memory and then saved to the external
storage medium.

Overview of Functions
Measurement Computation
channel channel
2
Data of another device
. . (via communication)
. .
. .

3
Display Setup data
Sampling

Internal memory
4

Screen image Save 5

Save the data data
FTP server on Load
the network Display/Event
data
6

CF card USB memory (/USB1 option) 7

External storage medium

Internal Memory
Display data and event data are held in files in the internal memory. The data area also
8
stored on the external storage medium in files.
Sampling

Internal memory
9
Manual
Display data and event data Report data
sampled data

10
File
......

11
Save the data
FTP server on
the network

12
......

Directory on the external storage medium

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-27
1.4 Data Storage Function

Recording Method of Display Data and Event Data

For the setting procedure, see section 6.1.
• Types of Data to Be Acquired
Select display data only, display data and event data, or event data only.
Deciding the Data to Be Recorded
Record the data that suits your application. Refer to the following examples.
Example 1: Continuously record the waveform data as with the conventional chart
recorder.
Record the display data.
Example 2: Record waveform data under normal conditions but record details around
the point of alarm occurrence when alarms occur.
Continuously record display data and record event data when alarms
occur.
Example 3: Only record the most-detailed data at all times.
Record event data by specifying the sampling interval.
Example 4: No need to continuously record data. Record data only when alarms
occur.
Record event data only when alarms occur.

• Internal Memory
The recorded measured data is divided at a specific time interval and saved to files.
If the internal memory is full or if the number of display data files and event data files
exceeds 400, files are overwritten from the oldest file.

• Recording Conditions of Display Data

Item Description
Source channels Select from measurement channels and computation channels.
Sampling interval Specify the sampling interval with the trend interval (see the table
below). You cannot specify a sampling interval that is faster than the
scan interval.
File creation Files are created at the specified file save interval.

Time

File File File Adding data

Files are also created in the following cases.

• When a file is created manually.
• When the memory sampling is stopped.
• When file creation is executed with the event action function.
• After recovering from a power failure.
Memory start/stop Press the START key to start recording (memory start) and the
STOP key to stop the recording (memory stop).

Trend interval and the sampling interval of display data

*1 *1 *2
Trend interval 5s 10 s 15 s 30 s 1 min
Sample rate 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s
Trend interval 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min
Sample rate 4s 10 s 20 s 30 s 40 s
Trend interval 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10 h
Sample rate 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min 20 min
*1 Selectable on the DX1002, DX1002N, DX1004, and DX1004N (release number 3 or later).
*2 Selectable in fast sampling mode on the DX1006, DX1006N, DX1012, and DX1012N (release
number 3 or later).

1-28 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.4 Data Storage Function

• Recording Conditions of Event Data 1

Item Description

Overview of Functions
Source channels Same as the display data.
Sampling interval Select from the available settings between 25 ms to 30 min. However,
you cannot specify an interval that is faster than the scan interval.
2
File creation A file is created when the specified data length is reached.
Files are also created in the following cases.
• When a file is created manually.
• When the memory sampling is stopped.
• When file creation is executed with the event action function. 3
• After recovering from a power failure.
Mode The available modes are Free (continuously record), Single, and
Repeat. The recording operation varies depending on the mode as
follows:
Free 4
Press the START key to start recording (memory start) and the STOP
key to stop the recording (memory stop) .

Time 5
File File File Adding data
Single
Pressing the START key places the DX in the trigger-wait state. When
the trigger condition is met, the DX records data for a specified time (data 6
length) and stops. From this point, the DX does not record even if the
trigger condition is met.
Trigger condition met
7
Time

File
Repeat 8
Pressing the START key places the DX in the trigger-wait state. When
the trigger condition is met, the DX records data for a specified time
(data length) and stops. The DX enters the trigger-wait sate again and
keeps recording the data for a specified time (data length) each time the
trigger condition is met. To stop the recording of the event data, press
the STOP key.
9
Trigger condition met Trigger condition met

Time
10
File File

Pretrigger of Event Data

The pretrigger can be specified in trigger mode. 11
This function is used to save the data before the point where the trigger condition
is met as event data. This function is convenient when you wish to record the data
before the occurrence of a certain event such as when an alarm occurs.
Specify the pretrigger as a percentage (0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, or 100%) of the recording 12
time (data length) of the event data. If set to 0%, the data after the trigger condition is
met is recorded.
Trigger condition met
App
Time

Data before Data after

the trigger the trigger Index
Trigger for Starting the Event Data Recording
When set to trigger mode, you can set various conditions for starting the recording.
Example: Key operation, alarm occurrence, specific time, or remote control
IM 04L41B01-01E 1-29
1.4 Data Storage Function

• Creating Files through Key Operation

Files can be created using keys.
Key operation

Time

File File File
Previous files Current file

For operating instructions, see “Saving the Display Data or Event Data during Memory
Sampling through Key Operation” in section 6.4.

Manual Sampled Data

Manual sampled data is recorded to the internal memory. When the number of manual
sampled data exceeds 400, the data is overwritten from the oldest data.

Time

Manual sampled data

Report Data
Report data is recorded to the internal memory. When the number of report data
exceeds 100, the data is overwritten from the oldest data.

Time

Report data

1-30 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.4 Data Storage Function

Saving Data to the External Storage Medium 1

For the setting and operating procedure, see sections 6.2 and 6.4 respectively.

Overview of Functions
• Type of External Storage Medium
• CF card (32 MB or more)
• USB flash memory (/USB1 option) 2
• Auto Save
Have the CF card inserted in the slot at all times. The data in the internal memory is
automatically saved to the CF card.
Auto Save Timing
3
Data Type Description
Display data The file is saved when the file is created.

Time 4
File File File

Save to the CF card

5
Event data Same as the display data.
Manual sampled data The first time manual sample is executed, a manual sampled data file is created on the CF card. The
data is appended to this file for each subsequent manual sample operation. A new file is created after
manual sampled data has been stored 100 times.
For operating instructions, see section 6.5. 6
Report data The first time report data is generated, a report data file is created on the CF card and report data is
stored. The report data is appended to this file every time of report.
Dividing of the report files
The appending of the report data to the file is stopped at a specified time, and subsequent reports are
saved to a new file. The file is divided in the unit shown in the table below. Also, when recording is
7
stopped (memory stop), all report files are divided.
Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)
When the report file is divided, a report data file of the format specified by the XML spreadsheet
template is created. This function is disabled in the cases listed under “Seprt2” below. 8
For the setting procedure, see section 9.5.
Report Type Report File
*1
File for Each Type One File Seprt2
Hourly report hourly reports of a day hourly reports of a day hourly reports for a day 9
Daily report daily reports for a month daily reports for a month daily reports for a month
Hourly and daily a file for each daily report hourly reports for a day and a daily daily reports for a month
reports hourly reports of a day report hourly reports for a day
*2
Daily and weekly a file for each weekly report daily reports for a week and a weekly weekly report (not divided)
reports daily reports for a week report daily reports for a week 10
*2
Daily and monthly a file for each monthly report daily reports for a month and a monthly report (not divided)
reports daily reports for a month monthly report daily reports for a month

*1 Available for release numbers 4 and later.

11
*2 When media FIFO is enabled, files are divided at approximately every 100 KB.

Save Destination
CF card. 12
Data Save Destination Directory
You can set the data save destination directory name (DATA0 by default). The
specified directory is created on the CF card, and the data is saved in the directory.
App
Save Operation (If Media FIFO Is Disabled)
The data in the internal memory can be saved only if there is sufficient free space on
the CF card. Replace the CF card and save the data before the data in the internal Index
memory is overwritten.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-31
1.4 Data Storage Function

Save Operation (Constantly Retaining the Most Recent Data Files Using Media
FIFO) (Release Number 2 or Later)
When saving the data files automatically, you can save the data so that the most
recent data files are constantly retained in the CF card. This method allow you to use
the DX continuously without having to replace the CF card.

• Operation
Old Update date New

Deleted File 1 File 2 File 3 Saved File 4

Medium

If not enough free space is available when saving a new data file to the CF card,
files are deleted in order from the oldest data update date/time to save the new file.
This operation is referred to as FIFO (First In First Out).
• The FIFO operation is carried out only when saving the following files
automatically. It is not carried out when saving files to the save destination
directory using another method. Display data files, event data files, report data
files, manual sample data files, and snapshot data files
• Files that are deleted
All the files in the save destination directory are applicable to be deleted.
However, the following files are excluded. Hidden files, read-only files, files in
the subdirectory within the save destination directory
• The most recent 1000 files are retained. If the number of files in the save
destination directory exceeds 1000, the number of files is held at 1000 by
deleting old files even if there is enough free space.
• f there are more than 1000 files already in the save destination directory, one or
more files are always deleted before saving the new file. The number of files is
not kept within 1000 in this case.

• Manual Save (Collectively Storing Unsaved Data)

Unsaved data in the internal memory is stored in unit of files to the external storage
medium when an external storage medium is inserted and a given operation is carried
out.
Save operation

Time

File File File
Saved the
previous time Saved this time

When using manual save, it is important that you save the data in the internal memory
to the external storage medium before the data is overwritten. Determine the usage
condition of the internal memory and save the data to the external storage medium at
appropriate times.

Save Destination
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

Data Save Destination Directory

You can set the data save destination directory name (DATA0 by default).

1-32 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.4 Data Storage Function

• File Name 1
You can select the file name configuration from three types.

Overview of Functions
Structure Description
Date Display data
Event data 7-digit Specified string Date . Extension 2
Manual sampled data Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633.DAD
Snapshot data

Report data 7-digit Specified string Date Type . Extension

Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633HD.DAR 3
Serial Display data
Event data 7-digit Specified string . Extension
Manual sampled data Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD
Snapshot data
4
Report data 7-digit Specified string Type . Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA0HD.DAR

Batch name Display data 7-digit . Extension

5
Batch name
Event data Ex.: 000123_BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB.DAD

Report data 7-digit Date Type . Extension

Ex.: 000123_050928_174633HD.DAR

Manual sampled data 7-digit Date . Extension 6

Snapshot data Ex.: 000123_050928_174633.DAM

Item Description
7-digit Consists of a 6-digit number and 1-character delimiter. 7
6-digit A sequence number in the order of occurrence. The number ranges from
number 000001 to 999999. If the number reaches 999999, it returns to 000000.
1-character Starts with ‘_’ and takes on the following values: A to Z and 0 to 9.
delimiter If a file with the same name exists in the specified directory, the file is
saved by changing the delimiter to prevent overwriting. 8
Example: If a file named “000123_AAAAAAAAAAA.DAD” already exists,
the file is saved to the name “000123AAAAAAAAAAAA.DAD.”
Date YYMMDD_hhmmss YY: Year (lower two digits), MM: Month, DD: Day
hh: Hour, mm: Minute, ss: Second 9
Specified string AAAAAAAAA•••A Up to 16 alphanumeric characters can be used
Batch name BBBBBBBBBBB•••B Up to 40 alphanumeric characters can be used
Type H_, D_, W_, M_, Report data type
HD, DW, DM H_: Hourly, D_: Daily, W_: Weekly, M_: Monthly, 10
HD: Hourly and daily, DW: Daily and weekly,
DM: Daily and monthly
Extension Display data :DAD Report data :DAR
Event data
Manual sampled data
:DAE
:DAM
Report data :xml
Snapshot data :PNG
(Report template; release numbers 4 and later)
11

Note
Differences from the File Names up to Now
• The “ID” item at the end of the file name is deleted and its functionality is included in the
12
“Separator” of the 7-digit sequence.
Example
DXs before release number 2: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_1746330.DAD
The “ID” functionarity App
has been shifted.
DXs with release number 2 or later: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633.DAD
• The sequence section of the display data and event data file names is changed to 7 digits,
and the “ID” function is included in the “Separator” when using the “Batch name.” Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-33
1.4 Data Storage Function

File Names on DXs before Release Number 2

The table below shows the file name that is assigned when the measured data is saved
to the CF card.
Structure Description
Date Display data
Event data 7-digit Specified string Date ID . Extension
Manual sampled data Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_1746330.DAD
Snapshot data
Report data 7-digit Specified string Date Type ID . Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA050928_174633DH0.DAR
Serial Display data
Event data 7-digit Specified string ID . Extension
Manual sampled data Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAA0.DAD
Snapshot data
Report data 7-digit Specified string Type ID . Extension
Ex.: 000123_AAAAAAAAAAAHD0.DAR

Batch Display data 3-digit Batch name ID . Extension

name Event data Ex.: 123BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB0.DAD
Report data 7-digit Date Type ID . Extension
Ex.: 000123_050928_174633HD0.DAR

Manual sampled data 7-digit Date ID . Extension
Snapshot data Ex.: 000123_050928_1746330.DAM

Item Description
Date YYMMDD_hhmmss Same as release number 2 and later.

7-digit sequence 000001 to 999999 Consists of a 6-digit number and an underscore as a separator.
A sequence number in the order of occurrence.
3-digit sequence 001 to 999 A sequence number in the order of occurrence.
Type H_, D_, W_, M_, Report data type
HD, DW, DM Same as release number 2 and later.
ID 0 to 9, A to Z When a file with the same name exists in the specified directory,
the file is saved by changing the ID character to prevent
overwriting.
Example: If a file named
“000123_AAAAA050907_1036480.DAD”
already exists, the file is saved to the name
“000123_AAAAA050907_1036481.DAD.”
Extension Except for xml, same as release numbers 2 and later.

1-34 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.4 Data Storage Function

• Saving Data through Key Operation 1

You can carry out the following data save operations regardless of whether auto save
or manual save is used.

Overview of Functions
Data Storage Description
All save Collectively saves all the data in the internal memory. 2
Selective save Saves the specified display data or event data file.
Manual sampled data save Collectively saves all the manual sampled data in the internal
memory.
Report data save Collectively saves all the report data in the internal memory. 3

Save Destination
You can select a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
4
Data Save Destination Directory
Creates a directory with the name of the data save destination directory name with the
date/time added and saves the data.
Directory name: “Specified string”_YYMMDD_HHMMSS 5
Example: If the data is saved at 17 hours 6 minutes 42 seconds on September 30,
2005, the data is saved to a directory named “DATA0_050930_170642.”
“DATA0” is the specified string.
6
Note
The number of directories that you can create on the external storage medium varies
depending on the length of the directory names. If the length of the “specified string” is 5
characters, approximately 170 directories can be created. If it is 20 characters, approximately 7
120 directories can be created. An error occurs, if you try to create directories exceeding this
limit.

8
Other Types of Data That Can Be Stored
• Setup Data
The setup data of the DX is saved to a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
The setup data is saved to the root directory. 9
Name of the setup data file Specified . PDL

Example: ABCD10005.PDL

• Snapshot Data 10
The screen that the DX displays is saved to a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1
option) in PNG format. The data is saved to the same directory as the display data
and event data. For the file name, see the previous page.
11
Time

Snapshot
CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option) Data file
12
• Custom Display Setup Data
See the Custom Display User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-04E.

Saving Data via the Ethernet Network App

Display data, event data, report data (/M1 or /PM1 option), and screen image data
(snapshot data) can be automatically transferred and saved to an FTP server via the
Ethernet network by using the FTP client function. Conversely, the DX can function as an
FTP server. The DX can be accessed from a PC and the data files in the internal memory Index
or the external storage medium can be retrieved to be stored on the PC.
See the Communication Interface User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-17E.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-35
 1.5 Batch Function
This section explains the DX batch function. For information about the multi batch
function (/BT2 option), see the Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

Overview
You can add batch information to the display data and event data files. The files can be
managed using the batch information.
For the setting and operating procedure, see section 6.3.

Batch Information
• Batch Number and Lot Number
Display data and event data files can be identified by their “batch number-lot number”
(hereinafter referred to as batch name). The lot number does not have to be specified.
• Batch number (up to 32 characters).
• Lot number (up to 8 digits)

• Automatic Increment of the Lot Number
The lot number can be automatically incremented when the memory sampling is
stopped.

• Text Field
You can enter text fields into a file. There are 24 available text fields (release number
3 or later). Each text field consists of the following:
• Field title (up to 20 characters)
• Field string (up to 30 characters)

The text field can be shown on the DX screen through key operation.

• Batch Comment
Three arbitrary comments can be entered in a file. A single comment can be entered
while memory sampling is in progress.
• Comment 1, Comment 2, and Comment 3 (up to 50 characters each)

Using the Batch Function

See the figure below. For example, enter the operator and administrator in the text field.
Comment
Memory start Memory stop
Batch number + lot number
Text field Time
Comment

Data file

1-36 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions 1
(/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Overview of Functions
A specified action is carried out when an event occurs. This function is called event
action. The remote control function (/R1 and /PM1 options) allows you to specify actions 2
to be performed when the terminal receives a contact input or an open collector signal.
The remote control function is configured using the event action function.
For the setting procedure, see section 7.1.
3
Events
• Events
Select from the following events.
*1
Event
Remote
Level/Edge
Level/Edge
Description
ON/OFF of the remote control input.
4
Output relay Level/Edge Activated/Deactivated condition of the alarm output relay.
*3
Relay-Off
Internal switch Level/Edge The value, 0 (off) or 1 (on), of the internal switch.
Switch-Off
*3 5
Timer Edge Timer timeout.
Match time timer Edge When the time matches.
Alarm Level/Edge The state in which any alarm is occurring and the state in
6
*3
Alarm-Off which no alarm is occurring.
USER key Edge The operation of pressing the USER key.
*2
Event edge switch Edge Can be caused by:
• The Edge Switch soft key in the FUNC key menu.
• A dedicated communication command or Modbus
communication. 7
• The custom display
*2
Event level switch Level  ou can view the status of the switch in the event level
Y
switch status display. Can be caused by:
EventLevelSwitch-
*3
• A dedicated communication command or Modbus 8
Off communication.
• The custom display.
*1 For a description of level and edge, see “Miscellaneous” in this section.
*2 This function is available for release numbers 3 and later. 9
*3 This function is available for release numbers 4 and later.

• Output Relay, Internal Switch, Alarm, Event Level Switch

The output relay, internal switch, alarm, and event level switch have two states, state 10
A and state B, which are explained in the table below. In explanations, “Output relay”
and similar states are referred to as “ON events,” and “Relay-Off” and similar states
are referred to as “OFF events.”
Event State A State B 11
Output relay Deactivated Activated
Internal switch OFF ON
Alarm No alarms At least one alarm
Event level switch OFF ON 12
When Edge Is Selected
An ON event occurs when state A changes to state B. An OFF event occurs when
state B changes to state A.
When Level Is Selected App
If the action states that correspond to states A and B during an ON event are called
“state 2” and “state 1,” respectively, the action states that correspond to states A and
B during an OFF event will be state 1 and state 2, respectively.
Index
See “Miscellaneous” and “Level and Edge” in this section.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-37
1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

• Timers
Four timers are available. The timers are also used with the TLOG computation
function (/M1 and /PM1 options).
Timer Type
Absolute timer Relative timer
Set the timer
Set the timer Ref. time Reset the timer
Time Time

A A A A B B
Timeout A: Interval B: Interval

• Absolute Time Mode

The timer expires at the times determined by the reference time and the interval. The
reference time is set on the hour (00 to 23).
Example: Reference time: 00:00
Interval: 10 min
The timer expires at 0 hour, 0 hour 10 min, 0 hour 20 min, ... 23 hour 40
min, and 23 hour 50 min. For example, if the timer is set at 9 hour 36
min, the timer expires at 09 hour 40 min, 09 hour 50 min, 10 hour, and
so on.

• Relative Time Mode

The timer is started when the timer is set, and the timer expires every specified
interval. In this mode, the timer stops when a power failure occurs.
Example: Interval: 00:15
The timer expires every 15 minutes.

• Match Time
You can set the time matching conditions for the four match time timers. Specify
the date/time using the method described below. For each condition, you can select
whether to use the condition once or continuously. The timers are also used with the
TLOG computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Specified Date/Time Description
Y hour of the X day of the Z year The condition is met once a year. This function is available
for release numbers 3 and later.
Y hour of the X day The condition is met once a month.
Y hour of the X day of the week The condition is met once a week.
Y hour The condition is met once a day.

1-38 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Action 1
• Actions
Select from the following actions.

Overview of Functions
*1
Action Level/Edge Description
Memory start/stop Level Starts/stops memory sampling. 2
Memory start Edge Starts the memory sampling.
Memory stop Edge Stops the memory sampling.
*4
Event trigger Edge Applies a trigger for starting the event data
recording.
This is valid when recording event data in trigger 3
mode. See the next page.
Alarm acknowledge Edge Releases the alarm output.
This is valid when the use of the alarm ACK

*2
operation is enabled. 4
Computation start/stop Level It is used to start/stop the computation.
*2
Computation start Edge Starts the computation.
*2
Computation stop Edge Stops the computation.
*2
Computation reset Edge Resets the computed values on all computation
channels. 5
Save display data Edge The display data being recorded is saved to the
internal memory as a file. This is the same function
as the data save operation using the FUNC key.
Save event data Edge The event data being recorded is saved to the
internal memory as a file.
6
This is the same function as the data save operation
using the FUNC key.
Message Edge Writes a message.
This action can be executed while memory sampling 7
is in progress.
Snapshot Edge Saves the screen image data.
Switch the display rate Level Toggles between the trend interval and the
secondary trend interval.
This action is valid when the DX is configured to use 8
trend interval switching.
Manual sample Edge Executes manual sampling.
Reset the relative timer Edge Resets the relative timer. The timer restarts from

Switch the display group Edge

that point.
Switches the display group when the trend, digital,
9
or bar graph is displayed.
*2
Flag Level The flag is zero for normal conditions and 1 when an
event occurs. When the event is an edge operation,
the value alternates between 0 and 1 whenever an 10
event occurs.
The flag can be written in a calculation expression
of a computation channel.
*4
Load the setup Edge Loads the setup data file in the root directory of the
CF card into the DX and updates the DX settings. 11
See below.
Adjust the time Edge Synchronizes the time to the nearest hour. See the
next page.
*3
Display comment Edge Displays a preset text string (comment text block).
For information about how to set comment text
12
blocks, see section 5.18.
*3
Show favorite display Edge Shows the display that is registered to the Favorite
key. For information about how to register a display

*3
to the Favorite key, see section 5.15. App
Reset alarm display Edge An operation for when you are using a double lock-
in sequence (ISA-M) with the alarm annunciator
function. Resets the alarm display. For information
about annunciator settings, see section 3.12.
*1 For a description of level and edge, see “Miscellaneous” in this section. Index
*2 This is an option.
*3 This function is available for release numbers 3 and later.
*4 This action is not available on models with the /AS1 advanced security option.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-39
1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Resetting the Relative Timer

If the event is set to output relay, internal switch, match time timer, or alarm, the
resetting of the timer is not considered a timeout. (The action is not executed even if
the timer is used as an event.)

Loading the Setup

Can be specified as an action only when the event is set to remote control input.
Loads the setup data file, LOAD1.PDL, LOAD2.PDL, or LOAD3.PDL, in the root
directory of the CF card into the DX and updates the DX settings.
You must create a setup file and save it to the CF card in advance.

Event Trigger Operation

When the event is set to output relay, internal switch, or alarm
If the output relay is activated, the internal switch is 1, or the alarm is occurring during
memory sampling, the event trigger is always activated. However, the number of times
the trigger is activated depends on the event data mode (single or repeat).

Time Adjustment
Time adjustment can be specified as an action only when the event is set to remote
control input. The internal clock of the DX is adjusted to the nearest hour through
remote control input.

• Operation When Memory Sampling Is Stopped

Difference from the Nearest Hour Operation
00 min 00 s to 01 min to 59 s Truncates the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 01 min 50 s becomes 10 hours 00 min
00 s.
02 min 00 s to 57 min to 59 s The time is not changed.
58 min 00 s to 59 min to 59 s Rounds up the minutes and seconds.
Example: 10 hours 59 min 50 s becomes 11 hours 00 min
00 s.

• Operation during Memory Sampling

If the time difference between the time the remote control signal is applied and
the nearest hour is within the preset time, the time is gradually corrected. If the
time difference exceeds the preset time but is less than two minutes, the time is
immediately corrected. If the time difference is two minutes or more, the time is not
corrected. For details, see section 1.10.

On DXs with the /AS1 Advanced Security Option and Release Number 4 or
Later
Event Conditions for Execution
Output relay, internal switch, When these events occur, their corresponding actions are
timer, match time timer, and performed regardless of the user privilege settings and whether
alarm users are logged in.
User Key The same as the key operation itself. In setting mode, memory
start cannot be performed.
Event edge switch and event The same as the key operations themselves. Even in setting
level switch mode, memory start cannot be performed.
Remote When a remote control signal is received, the corresponding
action is performed regardless of the user privilege settings
and whether users are logged in. In setting mode, memory start
cannot be performed.

1-40 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.6 Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Miscellaneous 1
• Limitations on the Combinations of Events and Actions

Overview of Functions
The combinations that are checked in the table below can be used.
Event Remote Output Internal Timer Match Alarm User Event Event
Relay Switch Time Key Edge Level 2
Action Timer Switch Switch
Alarm ACK      
Reset the relative timer        
Load the settings 
Adjust the time  3
Reset the alarm display   
Other actions         

• Level and Edge

The combinations of events and actions are summarized in the figure below. 4
Type Operation
Event
Edge Edge
5
Level

OFF event
Edge Edge 6
Level

Action State 1 7
Level Edge
State 2 Operation Operation
executed executed

Event Action Example 8

The following is an example for when the event is Internal switch (Level or Edge) and
the action is Memory start/stop (Level) or Manual sample (Edge).
Event Action Operation
Level Edge 9
(internal switch)

Switch
ON
Event

OFF

Switch-Off
ON 10
OFF
Action

Memory start Memory stop Execution Execution 11

Memory start/stop Manual sample

Level and Edge of the Remote Control Input Signal

Level Edge
12
ON

OFF
250 ms or more App
For contact inputs, the remote signal rises when the contact switches from open to
closed and falls when the contact switches from closed to open. For open collector
signals, the remote signal rises when the collector signal (voltage level of the remote
terminal) goes from high to low and falls when the collector signal goes low to high. Index
You can reverse the above operations (see section 7.3 for details).

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-41
 1.7 Security Function
This section explains the DX security functions.
For information about the security functions on DXs with the /AS1 advanced
security option, see the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual,
IM04L41B01-05EN.

Key Lock Function

Key lock is a function that prohibits key operations. You enter a password to release the
key lock.
For the setting procedure, see section 8.1.
Key Lock Items Description
Keys The following keys can be locked independently.
START key, STOP key, MENU key, USER key, DISP/ENTER
key (prohibits switching the operation screen), and Favorite key.
Access to the storage medium Prohibits all operations listed below.
• Manually save the data
• Load the display data and event data files
• Save/Load setup data files
• List the files on the storage medium
• Delete the files on the storage medium
• Format the storage medium
Setup loading Prevents external storage medium access for the purpose of
loading setup files (release number 3 or later).
Function operation
The following FUNC key operations can be locked
independently.
*1
• [Alarm ACK], [Alarm DispRST]
• [Message], [Free message], [Batch],
[Add Message], [Add Free Message]
[Text field]
*2 *2 *2
• [Math start], [Math stop], [Math reset],
*2
[Math ACK]
• [Save display], [Save event],
[Manual sample], [Trigger],
[Snap shot], [Timer reset], [Save stop],
*1 *1
[Edge Switch], [Match T Reset]
• [E-Mail start], [E-Mail stop], [E-Mail test], [FTP test],
Operations to [Request] or [Release] network information
• [SNTP], time setting (operation in the setting mode)
• [Favorite regist], [Standard display],
*1
[Second speed], [Normal speed], [Builder]
*1 Available for release numbers 3 and later.
*2 Optional.

1-42 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.7 Security Function

Login Function 1
Only registered users can operate the DX. Access from communication functions can
also be limited to users registered here.

Overview of Functions
For the setting and operating procedure, see sections 8.2 and 8.3 respectively.
• Login and Logout 2
You enter your user name and password to log into the DX in the following cases.
Method of Accessing the DX Login Required
Keys • When the power is turned ON
• When logging in after exiting the basic setting mode
3
• When logging in after logging out
Communication When accessing the setting/measurement server, FTP server,
maintenance/test server, or Web server.
4
Auto Logout (When Logged in Using Keys)
When logged in using keys, you are automatically logged out when there is no key
operation for a specified time. If you are automatically logged out from the setting
mode, the setting changes are cancelled. You are not automatically logged out during
5
basic setting mode.

Operations That Can Be Carried Out When Logged Out

When logged out, you can switch the operation screen using the DISP/ENTER key, 6
arrow keys and Favorite key.

• User Levels
A user can be an “administrator” or a “user.” 7
Administrator
Administrators can perform all operations on the DX. At least one administrator must
be registered to use the login function.
Item Description
8
Number of users that 5
can be registered
Range of operations All operations.
Login method Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
9
ID information User name and password

User 10
Item Description
Number of users that 30
can be registered
Range of operations Key operations 11
Operation Limitation
Basic setting mode Not allowed
Setting mode Customize menus Not allowed

Other Specified by user privileges
Operation mode Key operation Specified by user privileges 12

• User privileges
You can set operation privileges for each user. The privileges are the
same as with the key lock function.
App
Operations via communication
See the Communications Interface User’s Manual.
Login method Select key operation, via communication, or Web server login.
ID information User name and password
Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-43
 1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and
/PM1 Options)
Computation Function
Equations can be defined in computation channels by using the measured data or
computed data as variables. The result of the computation can be displayed or stored.
For the setting procedure, see section 9.1.
• Channels Dedicated to Computations
Model Number of Channels Channel Numbers
DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N, DX1004N 12 101 to 112
DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, DX1012N 24 101 to 124

• Computation Types
In the table below, [001] represents the measured value of channel 001.
Type Example Description of the Example
Four arithmetic 001+002 Determines the sum of [001] and [002].
operation 001-002 Determines the difference between [001] and [002].
001*002 Determines the product of [001] and [002].
001/002 Divides [001] by [002].
n
Power 001**002 Determines [001] to the power of [002]. y = X
Square root SQR(001) Determines the square root of [001].
Absolute value ABS(001) Determines the absolute value of [001].
Common logarithm LOG(001) Determines the common logarithm of [001]. y = log10x
Natural logarithm LN(001) Determines the natural logarithm of [001]. y = lnx
x
Exponent EXP(001) Determines e to the power of [001]. y = e
Relational 001.LT.002 The result is 1 when [001] is less than [002] or 0
computation otherwise.
001.LE.002 The result is 1 when [001] is less than equal to [002] or
0 otherwise.
001.GT.002 The result is 1 when [001] is greater than [002] or 0
otherwise.
001.GE.002 The result is 1 when [001] is greater than equal to [002]
or 0 otherwise.
001.EQ.002 The result is 1 when [001] is equal to [002] or 0
otherwise.
001.NE.002 The result is 1 when [001] is not equal to [002] or 0
otherwise.
Logical computation 001AND002 The result is 1 when [001] and [002] are nonzero or 0
otherwise.
001OR002 The result is 1 when [001] or [002] or both are nonzero
or 0 otherwise.
001XOR002 The result is 0 when [001] and [002] are nonzero or 1
otherwise.
NOT001 The result is 1 when [001] is zero or 0 otherwise.
TLOG computation* TLOG.SUM(001) Determines the sum of [001].
TLOG.MAX(001) Determines the maximum value of [001].
TLOG.MIN(001) Determines the minimum value of [001].
TLOG.AVE(001) Determines the average value of [001].
TLOG.P-P(001) Determines the difference between the maximum value
and minimum value of [001].
* See “Usage of TLOG Computations” in this section.

1-44 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

1
Type Example Description of the Example
CLOG computation CLOG.SUM(001.002.003)

Overview of Functions
Determines the sum of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.MAX(001.002.003) 2
Determines the maximum value among [001], [002],
and [003].
CLOG.MIN(001.002.003)

[003].
Determines the minimum value among [001], [002], and
3
CLOG.AVE(001.002.003)
Determines the average value of [001], [002], and [003].
CLOG.P-P(001.002.003)
Determines the difference between the maximum value
4
and the minimum value among [001], [002], and [003].
Special computation PRE(001) Determines the previous value of [001].
101=HOLD(001.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried 5
out to derive the computed value. When [001] exceeds
K01, the previous computed value is held.

K01
6
Description
HOLD(a):b When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed
value. Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.
RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
7
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried
out to derive the computed value. When [101] exceeds
K01, the previous computed value is reset, and
TLOG.SUM(001) is carried out. 8
K01 Reset

Description
RESET(a):b When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed
9
value. Otherwise, the previous computed value is
reset, and b is carried out to derive the computed value.
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)
Under normal conditions, TLOG.SUM(001) is carried 10
out to derive the computed value. When the computed
value is greater than or equal to K01, the computed
result is the excess (computed value – K01).

K01 11
Description
CARRY(a):b Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the
computed value X of b is less than a, the computed 12
result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a, the
computed result is the excess (X – a).
Conditional equation [001.GT.K01?001:001+002]
When [001] is greater than K01, the computed value is
set to the value of [001]. Otherwise, the computed
App
value is set to the value of [001] + [002].
Description
[a?b:c] If the computed result of a is nonzero, b is carried out.
Otherwise, c is carried out. Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-45
1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

• Data That Can Be Used in Equations

The data listed below can be used.
Data Notation Description
Measurement channel data 001, etc. Specify the computed data using a channel number.
*1
Computation Channel data 101, etc. Specify the computed data using a channel number.
Constant K01 to K60 A value.
Communication input data C01 to C24 Data set through communications.
*2
Status of the remote control D01 to D08 The value is 1 when the remote control input is ON
*1
input or 0 when it is OFF.
*1 *2
Pulse input P01 to P08 Counts the number of pulses per scan interval.
*2
Q01 to Q08 Counts the number of pulses per second.
Internal switch status S01 to S30 1 or 0.
*1
Alarm output relay status I01 to I06 The value is 1 when activated or 0 when
deactivated.
*1
Flag F01 to F08 1 or 0. Set the flag using the event action function
(see section 1.6).
Recording (memory M01 to M06 The value is 1 when recording is taking place and
sampling) status 0 when recording is stopped. When the multi batch
function is not being used (release number 3 or
later; /BT2 option), M01 indicates the recording
(memory sampling) status. When the multi batch
function is being used, M01 to M06 indicate the
recording (memory sampling) statuses of each
batch. The recording status of an inactive batch
group is 0. This function is available for release
numbers 3 and later.
*1 An option.
*2 Values such as 01 are terminal numbers.
Only the data that are checked in the table below can be used in TLOG, CLOG, and
PRE.
Data Meas. Comp. Constant Comm. Remote Pulse Internal Relay Flag Record
Comp. Type Channel Channel Input Switch status
TLOG      
CLOG  
PRE     
Other computations         
Example: TLOG.SUM(S01), CLOG.AVE(001.002.K01), and PRE(S01) are not allowed.

• Processing Order of Computation

Computation is processed in order from the smallest event action number for each
scan interval.
Example: If you specify 102 = 101 + 103, the value of the previous scan interval is
used for the 103 value.
• Handing of the Unit in Computations
In computations, measured values are handled as values without units. For example,
if the measured data from channel 001 is 20 mV and the measured data from channel
002 is 20 V, the computed result of 001 + 002 is 40.
• Displaying the Computed Data
The computed data is displayed by setting a measurement span for each computation
channel. Computation channels can be displayed on various operation screens in the
same fashion as the measurement channels.
For the setting procedure, see section 9.3.
• Alarm
Up to 4 alarms can be assigned to each computation channel. The alarm types are
high limit alarm (H), low limit alarm (L), delay high limit alarm (T), and delay low limit
alarm (t).
• Saving Computed Data
As with the measured data, the computed data can be saved to display data, event
data, manual sampled data, and report data.

1-46 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

• Computation Data Dropout 1

A computation data dropout occurs if the computation is not completed within the scan
interval. For the operating procedure, see section 9.4.

Overview of Functions
• The computation icon in the status display section turns yellow.
• When a computation data dropout occurs, the computed data of the scan interval in 2
which the dropout occurred is set to the data immediately before the dropout.
• If computation data dropout occurs frequently, lessen the load on the CPU by
reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval.
3
• Numeric Display and Recording
The range of displayed values of computed data is from –9999999 to 99999999
excluding the decimal point. The decimal place corresponds to the decimal place of
the lower limit span of the computation channel. On the numeric display, values are 4
displayed if the computed result is within the above range regardless of the upper and
lower limits of span. The following table indicates special displays.
Display/Recording Computed Data Status
+Over • +Display over: When the computed result exceeds 99999999 5
• +Computation over: When the value exceeds approximately
1.79E+308 in the middle of the computation
• When a computation error* occurs (select +Over or –Over.)
–Over • –Display over: When the computed result is less than –9999999 6
• –Computation over: When the value is less than approximately
–1.79E+308 in the middle of the computation
• When a computation error* occurs (select +Over or –Over.)
* Computation error occurs when the following computation is carried out. 7
• X/0, SQR(–X), or LOG(–X)
• If a channel number set to skip or Off is used in the equation

• Rolling Average
The rolling average of the computed result of the equation specified for the 8
computation channel is determined, and the result is the computed data for that
channel. The number of samples and the sampling interval can be specified for each
computation channel. The rolling average is applied over the time corresponding to “the
number of data samples × the sampling interval.” The maximum sampling interval is 1 9
hour, and the maximum number of samples is 1500.

• Starting the Computation

You can configure the DX to start the computation when you press the START key. 10
• Usage of TLOG Computations
TLOG computation determines the sum, maximum, minimum, average, or the
difference between the maximum and minimum of a specific channel for each interval
11
determined by a timer.
Timers That Are Used
The timer that is used is assigned to each channel.

Unit of Sum Computation 12

Set the sum scale when using sum computation (TLOG.SUM).
Select Off, /s, /min, or /h. For details, see page 1-49.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-47
1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Resetting the TLOG Computed Value

You can select whether to reset the TLOG computed value at each interval. The figure
below illustrates the reset operation for sum computation (TLOG.SUM).
Example: Result of the TLOG.SUM computation
Timer timeout 1 2 3
Reset Reset Reset
Reset: On

Reset: Off

When reset is On, the sum value is calculated over each interval. When set to Off, the
sum value from computation start is calculated.

P
 ower Failure Operation, Handling of Error Data, and Handling of
Overflow Data
See “Special Data Handling” in this section.

1-48 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Report Function 1
This function is used to create hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports.
• Report Data Types

Overview of Functions
You can select from four types among maximum value, minimum value, average
value, sum value, and instantaneous value. The maximum, minimum, average, and 2
sum values are calculated for each scan interval.

• Report Type
Type Description
3
Hourly report Creates report data every hour on the hour for the previous one hour.
Daily report Creates report data every day at a specified time for the previous one day.
Weekly report Creates report data every week at a specified time at a specified day of the
week for the previous one week.
Monthly report Creates report data every month at a specified time at a specified day for 4
the previous one month.

• Combinations of Reports That Can Be Created

You can select from hourly reports only, daily reports only, hourly and daily reports, 5
daily and weekly reports, and daily and monthly reports.

• Source Channels
You can select from measurement channels and computation channels. The report
6
data are not created for channels that are set to Skip or Off.
Model Number of channels
DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N, DX1004N 12
DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, DX1012N 24 7
• Unit of Sum Computation
In the sum computation, data are summed over the scan interval. However, for flow
values that have units /s, /min, /h, or /day a simple summation results in the actual 8
value not matching the computed result, because the scan interval and the unit of the
input values are different. In such cases, set the sum scale to match the unit of the
input value. In effect, the sum value with the same unit as that of the input value is
calculated. 9
3
For example, if the scan interval is 2 s, and the input value is 100 m /min, a simple
summation would add 100 every 2 s resulting in 3000 after one minute. However, if
the sum scale is set to /min, then 2 s/60 s is multiplied every scan interval before the
3
value is added giving a result that has an m /min unit. 10
The following converting equations are used to compute the sum. The unit of the scan
interval is seconds.
Off: Σ(measured data every scan interval)
/s: Σ(measured data every scan interval) × scan interval
11
/min: Σ(measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/60
/h: Σ(measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/3600
/day: Σ(measured data every scan interval) × scan interval/86400
12
• Displaying the Report Data
You can display the report data using keys.
For the operating procedure, see section 4.5.
App
• Saving the Report Data
See section 1.4, “Data Storage Function.”

• Numeric Display and Recording Index

The numeric range of the report data is from –9999999 to 99999999 excluding the
decimal point (except –3.4E+38 to 3.4E+38 for sum values).
For the data handling of special cases, see “Special Data Handling” in this section.
For details on the report file format, see appendix 3.
IM 04L41B01-01E 1-49
1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Special Data Handling

This section explains the handling of special data in TLOG computation, CLOG
computation, and reports.
• Power Failure Operation (TLOG and Reports)
If a power failure occurs when the report function is enabled or in the middle of the
TLOG computation, the report operation and TLOG computation resume when the
DX recovers from the power failure. The operation varies depending on whether the
DX recovers from the power failure before or after the time to create a report or TLOG
data.
Time of Recovery Operation
After the time to create the data The report or TLOG data is created immediately after the DX
recovers. The measured data up to the time of the power
failure is used. At the time the next report or TLOG data is
created, the data after the recovery is used.
Before the time to create the data After the DX recovers, report or TLOG data is created at the
normal time to create the data. The measured data excluding
the power failure period is used.

• Error Data Handling (TLOG, CLOG, and Reports)

If an error occurs in the channel data, the error data is discarded, and the computation
continues. If all the data are in error, an error results.
The following types of data are considered error data.
• Channels set to skip or Off.
• The measured result on a measurement channels is error (A/D converter failure,
etc.).
• The input of the measurement channel is in a burnout condition.
• The computed result on a computation channel is error.

• Handling of Overflow Data*

* Refers to over range on a measurement channel and computation overflow on a computation
channel.
For TLOG, CLOG, and Reports
When the channel data is overflow data, the DX handles the data as follows:
Computation Type Description
Average value or sum Set the handling to ERROR, SKIP, or LIMIT.
value ERROR: Considers the data to be a computation error.
SKIP: Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
LIMIT: Replaces the data with the limit value and continues the
computation.
The limit value is the span upper or lower limit or the scale
upper or lower limit of the channel.
Maximum, minimum, Set the handling to OVER or SKIP.
Maximum – minimum OVER: Computes by using the overflow data.
SKIP: Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.

For Multiplication and Relation Computation EQ and NE

Computation Type Computation Computed Result
Multiplication 0*(+Over) 0
0*(–Over) 0
(+Over)*0 0
(–Over)*0 0
.EQ. (+Over).EQ.(+Over) 1
(–Over).EQ.(–Over) 1
.NE. (+Over).NE.(+Over) 0
(–Over).NE.(–Over) 0

1-50 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.8 Computation and Report Function (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later) 1

You can create report templates and use them to automatically create custom report
files.

Overview of Functions
Use Microsoft Office Excel (hereinafter referred to as “Excel”) to create report template
files. Load a report template file that you have created into the DX internal memory. The 2
DX will automatically create report files using the report template file.
Report file based
Report template file on the template
Internal memory 3
Save Output

For the setting procedure, see section 9.5.

To create a report template, see section 9.6.
4
To load or save a report template, see section 6.10.

• Report Template
Item Description 5
Format, extension XML spreadsheet format. The file name extension is .xml (lowercase).
File name You can specify a file name.
Type You need to create different report templates for each report file type.
The different report file types are hourly, daily, weekly, monthly, hourly 6
+ daily, daily + weekly, and daily + monthly.

• Template-Based Report File

Item Description
Format, extension XML spreadsheet format. The files can be opened in Excel. The file 7
name extension is .xml (lowercase).
File name Except for the extension, the file names of these files are the same as
those of report files with .DAR extensions.
For information about file names, see section 1.4, or see section 1.2 in 8
the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual.
Type The reports of each report file type are created using the appropriate
template file.
The number of report files that can be created depends on the report
creation range settings (see section 9.5). For example, when the 9
report settings are not configured for the creation of daily reports, you
cannot use a template to create daily reports. However, regardless
of the report settings, you can output all the different types of report
computations (average, maximum value, minimum value, sum value,
and instantaneous value.) 10
• Creating Template-Based Report Files
Template-based report files are created (the creation of template-based report files will
hereinafter be referred to as “template conversion”) in the following cases. 11
Auto Save
When a report file is created (when file division occurs), template conversion is
performed, and the report file is saved to the CF card. Template conversion is also
performed when recording stops (memory stop).
12
Manual Save (Collectively storing unsaved data)
When you save a report file manually, template conversion is performed on the report
files in the internal memory that have not yet been converted. Converted files are App
saved to the external storage medium.
Collective Storing of Data through Key Operations
When you execute ALL SAVE or REPORT SAVE, template conversion is performed
on all the report files in the internal memory. Converted files are saved to the external Index
storage medium.

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-51
 1.9 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 Option)

Output Relay Operation Assignment (Release numbers 4 and later)

For this function, there are relays labeled “FAIL” and “Status” on the rear panel.
You can assign the operations explained below to these two relays. On a relay that has
been set to “Status relay,” you must also set the DX status that will be relayed.

FAIL Output
When a failure occurs in the CPU of the DX, a relay contact signal (1 signal) is output.
The relay is energized when the CPU is normal and de-energizes when a CPU failure
occurs. Therefore, relay output is carried out also when the power is turned OFF (including
a power failure). You cannot change this behavior.
Relay Operation

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
During normal operation When a failure occurs When power is turned OFF

If a failure occurs, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.

Memory Sample Relay (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)
The relay is energized at memory start and de-energized at memory stop. You cannot
change this behavior
When the multi batch function (/BT2 option) is being used, memory start is when memory
start occurs for any of the batches, and memory stop is when memory stop occurs for all
the batches.

Relay Operation

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Memory sampling stopped Memory sampling When power is turned OFF

Invalid User Relay (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)
The relay is energized when the user is invalid and de-energized when you execute the
Locked ACK command. You cannot change this behavior

Relay Operation

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Normal Invalid user When power is turned OFF

User Login Status Relay (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)
The relay is energized when a user is logged in (through key operations or through
communication commands) to the DX. You cannot change this behavior

Relay Operation

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
Not logged in Logged in When power is turned OFF

1-52 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.9 FAIL/Status Output Function (/F1 and /F2 Options)

Status Output 1
Outputs the status below with a relay contact signal (1 relay). You can select whether
each status is output to the relay. The relay is energized when the status occurs. You

Overview of Functions
cannot change this behavior.
For the setting procedure, see section 2.9. 2
Status Description Corrective Action
Status of the internal Error in the internal memory. Contact your nearest
memory or CF card YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs. 3
When the auto save function to the CF card is On.
• The free space on the CF card dropped Replace the CF card.
to 10% of the total size (only when the
media FIFO (see section 1.4) is disabled).
• Error in the CF card. • Replace the CF card with a 4
normal one.
• Format the CF card on the
DX (the data on the CF
card will be erased).
However, the status of the internal memory Insert a CF card.
5
is output when the CF card is not inserted.
• 10 MB or less of available space*
remaining in internal memory.
• The number of files in internal memory for 6
which Auto Save to the CF card has not
been completed has exceeded 390.

When the auto save function to the CF card is Off.

• 10 MB or less of available space* Save the data in the internal
7
remaining in internal memory. memory to the CF card.
• The number of files in internal memory
for which Manual Save has not been
completed has exceeded 390. 8
Measurement error Error in the A/D converter. Contact your nearest
Burnout is detected. YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs.
Replace the thermocouple
that has burned out. 9
Communication error A Modbus master or Modbus client Check the error in the Modbus
communication error occurred. master or Modbus client
screen and carry out the
corrective action.
10
A PROFIBUS-DP communication error Contact your nearest
occurred. YOKOGAWA dealer for
repairs.
Memory stop When the memory sampling is stopped. Start the data acquisition.
Alarm occurrence An alarm has occurred. Check the alarm. 11
(Release number 3 or
later)
* The internal memory’s “available space” refers to the following quantities.
• Unused regions 12
• Regions of data for which Auto Save or Manual Save (see page 1-31) has been
completed.

Relay Operation App

NO C NC NO C NC NO C NC
During normal operation When specified status occurs When power is turned OFF
Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-53
 1.10 Other Functions

Time Related Functions

• Time Correction
The DX internal clock can be changed in the following manner.
Method Description
Key operation Sets the DX internal clock to the specified time.
Event action function Synchronizes the DX internal clock to the nearest hour.
SNTP client function Sets the DX internal clock to the time retrieved from an SNTP
server.

Time Correction Operation

The time correction operation varies depending on whether the memory sampling is in
progress or not.
Status Operation
Memory sampling stopped The DX internal clock is changed immediately.
Memory sampling The DX internal clock is gradually corrected. While the time is
being gradually adjusted, the date/time in the status display section
is displayed in yellow.

Operation of Gradually Correcting the Internal Clock

If the time deviation between the time of the DX internal clock and the correct time (the
specified time) is within a specified value, the DX clock is adjusted gradually at 40 ms
for each second. Otherwise, the clock is corrected immediately. The maximum value
of time deviation (tm in the figure below) can be selected in the range of 10 s to 5 min.

Time when the remote control

Time specified using keys or signal is applied
Time on retrieved from an SNTP server Nearest (Time on the DX)
the DX hour

Time deviation Time deviation

tm tm tm tm
Range in which the time is gradually Range in which the time is gradually
adjusted adjusted
Example: When changing the time to 12 hours 55 minutes 35 seconds when the
internal clock is 12 hours 55 minutes 32 seconds
The time deviation of 3 seconds is adjusted 40 ms per second. The
internal clock will be synchronized to the specified time 75 seconds later.

• Date Format
You can select the display format of the data from “2005/09/28,” “09/28/2005,”
“28/09/2005,” and “28.09.2005.”
For the setting procedure, see section 2.4.

• Time Zone
Set the time difference between the location where the DX is used and GMT.
For the setting procedure, see section 2.2.

• DST (Daylight Saving Time)

If you are using the DX in an area with daylight saving time, enter the daylight
saving time starting and ending dates, and the DX will automatically change the time
accordingly.
For the setting procedure, see section 2.1.

1-54 IM 04L41B01-01E
 1.10 Other Functions

System Display 1
Displays the total number of inputs on the DX, the size of the internal memory, the
communication functions, the external storage drive, the options, the remote controller

Overview of Functions
ID, the operation of the devices connected to the USB ports (/USB1 option), the MAC
address, and the firmware version number. 2
For the operating procedure, see section 2.5.

Language
The displayed language can be set to English, Japanese, German, French, or, Chinese.
For the setting procedure, see section 2.6.
3

24 VDC Power Supply for Transmitter (/TPS2 or /TPS4 Option)

Provides 24-VDC power supply to up to two (/TPS2) or four (/TPS4) two-wire system
transmitters. The measured values of the transmitter correspond to a current signal of
4
4 to 20 mA on the same cable. Therefore, the signal can be connected to the DX input
terminal and displayed.
DX
Current
5
+
Transmitter power
supply output terminal – Transmitter

+ 6
Input terminal
–
Shunt resistor: 250 Ω

Easy Text Entry Option (/KB1 and /KB2 Options) 7

You can control the DX using the keys on the remote control terminal.
• Set the remote controller ID on the DX and the ID number on the remote control
terminal to the same value.
• You can set a value between 0 and 31 for the remote controller ID and ID number. 8
• By changing the ID number on the remote control terminal, you can control DXs with
different remote controller IDs from a single remote control terminal.
For the operating procedure, see section 2.10.
N
9

10
Infrared signal

output section

DISP
EN
TER/ 11
Light-receiving
section

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 1-55
1.10 Other Functions

USB Interface (/USB1 option)

You can connect keyboards, barcode readers, or USB flash memory to two USB ports,
one on the front and one on the back of the DX.
• You can operate the DX using a keyboard or barcode reader.
• You can save measured data and setup data to the USB flash memory and also load
from it.
For the operating procedure, see sections 2.11 and 2.12.

Temperature Unit
You can set the unit when measuring temperature with the thermocouple or RTD to °C or
°F.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.3.

Custom Display (Release numbers 3 and later)

You can create a custom operation screen.
See the Custom Display User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-04E.

Multi Batch Function (/BT2 option; release numbers 3 and later)

You can use this function to simultaneously record the measured data from multiple
batches.
See the Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

Advanced Security Function (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

The advanced security option strengthens measurement security with login, audit trail,
digital signature, and other functions.
See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

1-56 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 2 Common Operations

2.1 Setting the Date/Time 1

Set the date/time. If you are using the DX in a region that uses DST, specify the date/time
for switching between DST and standard time. 2
Setup Screen

Common Operations
• Date/Time
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Date/Time >
 3
Time Settings.

• DST 6
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Date/Time >
Daylight Saving Time.

Setup Items
• Time set 10
Enter the date and time, select ENT, and press DISP/ENTER.

• Daylight savings time > Use/Not

To set a daylight saving time period, select Use. 11
• Daylight savings time > Start time
Specify the date and time when daylight saving time starts.
Item Description 12
Month Specify the month.
Day order (week order) Specify the week within the month. Specify [Last] for the last week in
the month.
Day of the week Specify the day of the week. App
Hour of the day Specify the hour using a value from 0 to 23.

• Daylight savings time > End time

Specify the date and time when daylight saving time ends. The settings here are the Index
same as those for Start time.

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-1
 2.2 Setting the Time Difference from GMT
Set the time zone of the region in which the DX will be used. Make sure to set this value
if you are using the Internet network functions or the DST function.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time Settings.

Setup Items
• Time settings > Time zone(HHMM)
Set the time zone of the region in which the DX will be used in terms of the time
difference from GMT. Specify a value in the range of –1300 to 1300 (where the first
two digits denote the hour and the last two digits denote the minute). A negative value
indicates that the local time is behind the GMT.
Example: The standard time in Japan is ahead of the GMT by 9 hours. In this case,
enter “900.”

2-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.3 Setting the Time Correction Operation during 1
Memory Sampling
This function gradually corrects the time when the time is changed while Memory
Sampling is in progress. 2
For a description of the time correction operation, see section 1.10.

Common Operations
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
 3
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time Settings.

6
Setup Items
• Time settings > Time deviation limit
Current time Specified time 7

Time deviation limit
8
When the time deviation between the time on the DX and the specified time is within
±(the value specified here), the time on the DX is gradually corrected. Otherwise,
the clock is corrected immediately. Note that time is not corrected on DXs with the
Advanced security function (/AS1 option) when the specified time is over the time 9
deviation limit. (Firmware version numbers 4.11 and later)
Settings Description
10 s to 5 min The time deviation limit.
Off Disables the function that gradually corrects the time. 10
Example: If Time deviation limit is set to 10s and the time on the DX is 10 hours 21
minutes 15 seconds, the time on the DX is gradually corrected if the specified time is
between 10 hours 21 minutes 5 seconds and 10 hours 21 minutes 25 seconds.
11

Note
 n DXs with the Advanced security function (/AS1 option), you cannot change the time during
O
memory sampling if the time deviation limit is set to OFF. (Firmware version number 4.11 and
12
later)

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-3
 2.4 Setting the Date Format
Select the display format of the date.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time Settings.

Setup Items
• Time settings > Date format
Settings Display Example
Dates other than the grid time of Time at the grid position in the
the trend display trend display (example: 8 O’clock
on Nov. 30)*
Y/M/D 2005/11/30 11/30 08
M/D/Y 11/30/2005 11/30 08
D/M/Y 30/11/2005 30/11 08
D.M.Y 30.11.2005 30.11 08
* Only if the trend interval is set greater than or equal to 1 h/div. A function available on DXs
with release number 2 or later.

Applied Range
The format is applied to the date displayed on the screen. It does not change the
date format on the setup screen of the date/time, the date in the output data via
communications, the date saved along with the data, and the date used in the data file
names.

2-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.5 Viewing the DX Information 1

Show the DX information on the system information screen and the network information
screen. 2
Procedure

Common Operations
• Displaying System Information Screen
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC. 3
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the System info soft key.

The system information screen is displayed.
4
• Displaying Network Information Screen
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.
5
2. Press the Network info soft key.
The network information screen is displayed.

Explanation 6
• System Information Screen
ANALOG: Number of measurement channels
(C) denotes the clamped input
terminals (/H2 option). 7
MATH: Number of computation channels
(/M1 and /PM1 options)

MEMORY: Internal memory size

Options 8
Remote controller ID
(/KB1 and /KB2 option)
USB HID
(/USB1 option)
MAC address 9
Version: Firmware version

The following items are displayed:

• Number of measurement channels. 10
• Number of computation channels.
• Internal memory size
• Options
• Remote controller ID (/KB1 and /KB2 options) 11
• Connected USB HID devices (/USB1 option)
• MAC address
• Firmware version
12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-5
2.5 Viewing the DX Information

• Network Information Screen

There are two pages of network information. Use the left and right arrow keys to
switch the screen. The following items are displayed:
• IP address
• Subnet mask IP address
• Default gateway IP address
• MAC address
• DNS server IP address
• Host name
• Domain name
• The server function setting conditions listed below.
FTP, Web, Modbus, SNTP, and EtherNet/IP
• PROFIBUS-DP information (/CP1 option)
Node address and serial number (maintenance information)

2-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.6 Changing the Displayed Language 1

Set the displayed language.

Setup Screen 2
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic


Common Operations
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating Environment.
3

Setup Items
• Operating environment > Language 6
Set the displayed language to English, Japanese, German, French, or Chinese.

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-7
 2.7 Setting the LCD Brightness and Backlight
Saver
Change the LCD brightness. In addition, set the backlight saver function to prolong the
service life of the LCD backlight.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > LCD.

Setup Items
• LCD > Brightness
Select a value from 1 to 8 (2 by default). Larger the value, brighter the display
becomes.

• LCD > Backlight saver > Mode

Settings Description
Off Disables the backlight saver.
Dimmer Dims the display if there is no operation for a given time.
Timeoff Turns the backlight OFF if there is no operation for a given time.

• LCD > Backlight saver > Saver time

Select a value from 1 min to 1 h. If the specified time elapses without any key
operation or alarm occurrence, the LCD backlight switches to the specified mode.

• LCD > Backlight saver > Restore

Settings Description
Key The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed.
Key+Alm The backlight returns to the original brightness when a key is pressed or when an
alarm occurs.

Note
• If the backlight is dimmed or turned OFF by the backlight saver function, pressing any key
on the DX causes the backlight to return to the original brightness. In this operation, the key
does not perform its intended function.
• The degradation of the brightness and the discoloration of the screen (become yellowish)
tend to progress faster as the brightness is set higher. Extended use at an unnecessary high
setting should be avoided. It is also recommended that you use the backlight saver function.

2-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.8 Initializing Settings and Clearing the Internal 1
Memory
Initialize the settings to default values. In addition, clear the data in the internal memory.
For the default settings, see the DX1000/DX1000N Operation Guide (IM04L41B01-02E). 2
Setup Screen

Common Operations
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the File/Initialize tab > Initialize. 3
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

6

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-9
2.8 Initializing Settings and Clearing the Internal Memory

Setup Items
• Initialize
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
Settings Description
Clear 1 Clears and initializes the data in the internal memory in the manner
Clear 2 indicated on the screen.
Clear 3

Internal Memory Data That Is Initialized or Cleared

Item Description
Basic Settings
Login Info The “Authority of user” settings in basic setting mode are
initialized.
Other Settings All settings in basic setting mode other than the “Authority of
user” settings are initialized.
Settings The setting mode settings are initialized.
Measurement and Math Data Display, event, manual sampling, and report (/M1 and /PM1
options) data is cleared.
Display Data The custom display screen setup data is cleared.
Log Data All the log data is cleared.

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

Setting Description
Clear 1 Clears and initializes the data in the internal memory in the manner
Clear 2 indicated on the screen.
Clear 3
Clear 4

Internal Memory Data That Is Initialized or Cleared

See the explanation for DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option.

Procedure
1. Press the Clear 1, Clear 2, Clear 3, or Clear 4 soft key.
2. Press DISP/ENTER.
A confirmation window opens.

3. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER.

The specified operation is executed, and the DX returns to the operation mode.
If you do not want to initialize, select No and press DISP/ENTER.

2-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.9 Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact 1
(/F1 Option)
A signal is output to a dedicated relay when an error occurs in the DX CPU. In addition, a
signal is output to a different relay when the a specified status occurs. 2
For a description of the FAIL/status output function, see section 1.7.

Common Operations
Setup Screen 3
• Assigning Relay Operations
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Status relay> Relay Action.
4
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option 7

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-11
2.9 Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact (/F1 and /F2 Options)

• Status Relay Details

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Status Relay > Status Relay Details.

Setup Items
• Relay Action > Fail Relay, Status Relay (Release numbers 4 and later)
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
Setting Description
Fail Outputs a fail relay.
Status relay Outputs a status relay. Even if you set both relays to “Status relay,” you
cannot make them output different statuses.

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

Setting Description
Fail Outputs a fail relay.
Status relay Outputs a status relay. Even if you set both relays to “Status relay,” you
cannot make them output different statuses.
Mem. sample* Relay output continues from memory start until memory stop.
Invalid user Relay output continues from when a user is determined to be invalid until a
Locked ACK command is executed.
Login Relay output occurs whenever a user is logged in.
* When the multi batch function (/BT2 option) is being used, relay output starts when memory
start occurs for any of the batches, and relay output stops when memory stop occurs for all
the batches.

• Status Relay Details > Memory/Media status

On: The status of the internal memory and the CF card is relayed.

• Status Relay Details > Measurement error

On: A relay signal is output when a measurement error occurs.

• Status Relay Details > Communication error

On: A relay signal is output when a communication error occurs.

• Status Relay Details > Memory stop

On: A relay signal is output when memory sampling stops.
* When the multi batch function (/BT2 option) is being used, relay output starts when
recording stops for all the batches.

• Status Relay Details > Alarm (Release numbers 3 and later)

On: Outputs a relay signal when one or more alarms occur. Alarms whose indications
are hidden (see section 3.6 for details) do not cause relay signal output. Relay output
ceases after all alarms are released (if no other relay output conditions are met).

2-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.9 Outputting the DX Status via the Relay Contact (/F1 and /F2 Options)

Procedure 1
• FAIL Output
There are no operations that are required. A signal is output to the relay contact when
a CPU error is detected. A signal is also output to the relay contact when the DX is
2
turned OFF.

Common Operations
• Status Relay
A signal is output to the relay contact when a specified status occurs.
3

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-13
 2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control
Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)
Handling Precautions
• If the infrared signal output section of the remote control terminal or the light-receiving
section on the DX becomes dirty or receives scratches, it can hinder the transmission/
reception of the infrared signal. Clean the infrared signal output section of the remote
control terminal or the light-receiving section on the DX.
• When cleaning, wipe using a dry soft cloth. Do not use chemicals such as benzene or
thinner, since these may cause discoloring and deformation.
• Do not apply shock to the remote control terminal.
• Do not operate the remote control terminal with wet hands.
• The transmission/reception sensitivity of the infrared signal may deteriorate if used in
the following types of locations.
• Location where the receiver of the DX is exposed to direct sunlight or fluorescent
lamp.
• Near magnetic field sources such as a transceiver.
• If you carry the remote control unit in your pocket, for example, keys may be pressed
unintentionally and cause the DX to be controlled. Handle the remote control terminal
properly so that keys are not pressed inadvertently.
• When you are near the DX, press the keys on the remote control terminal only when
controlling the DX. If you are going to press the keys on the remote control terminal
but do not wish to control the DX, take measures so that the signal does not reach
the DX such as by covering the infrared signal output section of the remote control
terminal.
• The distance at which the DX can be controlled using the remote control terminal
varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the
presence or absence of external light.
• There is a possibility that DXs with the same remote controller ID be controlled
simultaneously. It is recommended that different remote controller IDs be set on each
DX.

Preparing the DX
Set the remote controller ID.
• Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating Environment.

• Operating environment > Remote Controller ID

Select the remote controller ID from 0 to 31. When not using the remote control
terminal, select Off.

• Checking the Remote Controller ID

You can check the DX remote controller ID on the system information screen.
See section 2.5.

2-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)

Preparing the Remote Control Terminal 1

• Names of Parts
Keys Battery cover

Common Operations
Infrared signal
output section 3
• Loading Batteries
1. While pressing the projection
Positive polarity
on the battery cover, open
the cover.
4
Positive polarity

2. Load the batteries.

3. Close the battery cover.
5

• Setting the ID Number

Set the ID number of the remote control terminal to match the remote controller ID of
the DX that you are to operate.
6
The ID number of the remote control terminal is not displayed anywhere. If you are
not sure which ID number the remote control terminal is set to, set the appropriate ID
number according to the following procedure. 7
1. Press ID.

2. Enter the ID number (0 to 31) by pressing the keys

from 1 (A1) to 0 (N0).
Example For ID number “16” 8
Operation: Press 1 (A1) and 6 (G6).
3. Press ID.

Note 9
• If you enter an ID number other than 0 through 31, the ID number retains the original setting.
• Pressing the ID key once causes the remote control terminal to enter the ID number setup
mode. If none of the keys on the remote control terminal is pressed for 8 s, the remote
control terminal automatically exits from the ID number setup mode. In this case, the ID
number of the remote control terminal retains the original setting.
10
• If you remove the batteries, the ID number is reset to 0. After loading the batteries, set the
appropriate ID number again.

11
• Affixing the ID Number Label
If you are using the remote control terminal with a fixed ID number (such as when
there is a one-to-one correspondence between the DX to be controlled and the remote
control terminal), you can enter the ID number on the label and affix the label on the 12
remote control terminal.
Affix the ID number label on the battery cover
of the remote control terminal.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-15
2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)

Controlling the DX
Control the DX by pointing the infrared output section of the remote control terminal to
the light-receiving section on the DX. Control the DX while checking the results on the
DX screen.

Note
• The remote control terminal cannot be used to control the Favorite key.
• When a specific key operation is possible on the DX, the corresponding key on the remote
control terminal is activated. For example, the operation for entering a character string is
activated when a window for entering a character string is displayed on the DX screen.
• You cannot control the DX using the remote control terminal, if the remote control terminal is
in the ID number setup mode.
• On models with the /M1 math option or /PM1 pulse input option, use the keys on the DX
to enter the computing equation of the computation channel. Computing elements are not
assigned to the keys on the remote control terminal.

• Correspondence with the DX Keys

Character input
keys
Up arrow key
User key
ESC key DISP/ENTER key Hold down SHIFT
Right arrow key and press F3/F7.
Left arrow key
Down arrow key
FUNC key
MENU key

Character input
keys
Soft keys

Character type switch key for character input keys (see the next page)
START key STOP key

Delete key
Deletes the character at the cursor position when inputting characters.

Space key
Enters a space at the cursor position when inputting characters.

2-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)

• Entering Strings 1
When a character input window is displayed on the DX screen, pressing the A/a/1
key switches the character type assigned to the character input keys as shown in the
following figure.
Uppercase alphabet Lowercase alphabet 2
Numbers
characters and symbols characters and symbols

Common Operations

• U
 ppercase Alphabet Characters and Symbols/Lowercase Alphabet
Characters and Symbols 3

4
Alphabet (A to Z or a to z)

Press the MARK key to cycle through the following symbols:

5
Number of times
the key is pressed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Symbol % # ° @ _ ( ) : [ ] + * /
6
• Numbers

Number (1 to 9 and 0) 7
Decimal point
However, when setting a constant to be used in the computation
on the DX with the /M1 or /PM1 option, the display switches
in the order “.”, “+”, and “E” each time the key is pressed.
The display switches in a cyclic pattern. 8
Minus sign

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-17
2.10 Controlling the DX with the Remote Control Terminal (/KB1 and /KB2 Options)

Troubleshooting
The DX does not react when you try to control it using the remote control terminal.
• Are the correct batteries loaded in the remote control terminal?
Check the voltage and polarity of the batteries.
• Are the batteries flat?
Replace the batteries with new ones.
• D
 oes the ID number of the remote control terminal match the remote controller
ID of the DX that you are trying to control?
Check the remote controller ID on the DX, and set the ID number of the remote control
terminal to the same value.
• Is the remote control terminal in ID number setup mode (condition in which the
ID key is pressed once)?
Wait 8 seconds without pressing any keys to exit from ID number setup mode.
• Is the remote control terminal too far away from the DX?
Get closer to the DX. Control from as close to the front of the DX as possible.
• Is a strong light hitting the light-receiving section of the DX?
Take measures to prevent strong light from hitting the light-receiving section of the DX.
• Is there a magnetic field source such as a transceiver nearby?
Move the magnetic field source away from the DX.
• Is the infrared output section of the remote control terminal or the light-
receiving section on the DX dirty?
Clean them.
• Is the DX in a condition that allows the relevant key operation?
Check the condition of the DX, and start from an operation that is possible.

2-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode 1
Reader (/USB1 option)
This section explains how to connect and use a USB keyboard or barcode reader.
Barcode readers can be used if the DX release number is 3 or later. 2
Connecting and Disconnecting a Keyboard or Barcode Reader

Common Operations
• Connection
1. Connect the keyboard or barcode reader to a DX USB port. 3
A display appears asking whether you have connected a keyboard or a barcode reader.

USB CF CARD

4
CF CARD

USB port

7
2. Select the type of device that you have connected, and then DISP/ENTER.
You can now use the device that you connected.
* If you change the display without selecting a device, the device type is automatically set to
keyboard.
8
* This setting is unrelated to the connection of USB flash memory.

• Removal 9
Remove the keyboard or barcode reader cable from the DX USB port.

Note
• Y ou can connect and remove keyboards and barcode readers at any time, regardless of the 10
display and whether the DX is on or off.
• You can only connect one human interface device (HID) to the DX. You cannot use a
keyboard and a barcode reader at the same time.
• Use a keyboard that matches the DX language setting. 11
• The statuses of the Caps Lock and Num Lock keys are retained even if the USB keyboard is
removed (release number 2 and later). However, if a bar code reader is connected, the key
statuses will be initialized to off.
• The device that is currently connected is indicated in the system information display (see 12
section 2.5 for details).

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-19
2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 option)

Operating from the Keyboard

Use the keyboard while watching the DX screen. An operation that can be carried out on
the DX can be carried out from the keyboard.
Example: Switch to setting mode
When the DX is in the operation mode, press Ctrl+M.
The DX switches to setting mode, and the setting menu appears.

• Mapping of the Keys on the DX to the Keys on the Keyboard

Keys on the Keyboard
Keys on the DX
104 Keyboard (US)for the PC
Enter DISP/ENTER
← Left arrow key
↑ Up arrow key
↓ Down arrow key
→ Right arrow key
Num Enter DISP/ENTER
Esc ESC
F1 to 5 Soft key 1 to soft key 5

F9 FUNC
F12 Hold down FUNC for 3 seconds
Left-Windows MENU
Right-Windows MENU
Application Favorite key
Ctrl+S START
Ctrl+P STOP
Ctrl+U USER
Ctrl+M MENU
Ctrl+F Favorite key
Tab, Shift+Tab Arrow keys*
* Press Tab to move the cursor to the next item, or Shift+Tab to move to the previous item.
However, this does not work in the following screens:
Operation screens, Menu screens for Setting mode and Basic setting mode, screens for
entering values and characters, “Menu customize” and “Save/Load” screens in Setting mode,
and “Load setting, Initialize” screen in Basic setting mode

• Entering Alphabets, Numbers, and Symbols

When alphabets, numbers, and symbols can be entered on the DX, you can enter
them from the keyboard. The operation is the same as with normal keys. However,
symbols that cannot be used on the DX are invalid.

Symbols That Can Be Entered Using the Keyboard

The symbols below can be entered. However, symbols that cannot be used on the DX
are invalid. For example, the characters *, /, :, and ? cannot be used in the data save
destination directory name.
# % (
) * + - . / : ? @ [ ] ^ _

* Press “^” on the keyboard to enter the temperature degree symbol.

2-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 option)

• Invalid Keys 1
Keys enclosed in frames are invalid.
The 104 Keyboard for a PC (US)

Common Operations

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-21
2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 option)

Barcode Reader Operations (Release number 3 or later)

When you scan communication commands with a barcode reader, the DX will respond
as follows.
• The DX will accumulate key codes until it reaches a terminator. Then it will execute
the accumulated character string. The terminator is the enter key code.
• The DX can accumulate up to 200 characters, not including the terminator. The DX
will process a character string when it reaches 200 characters in length.
• The DX can read ASCII characters (128 characters: numbers, symbols, and
uppercase and lowercase letters of the alphabet).

Note
• Barcode reader operations are treated as key operations.
• Barcode reader operations except the operation using UD command are limited by the
settings of the key lock and login functions.

• Barcode Reader Settings

Configure the barcode reader to the settings in the table below.
USB host parameter Setting
USB device type HID keyboard simulation
USB keyboard type English (U.S.) standard USB keyboard

2-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.11 Controlling the DX with a Keyboard or Barcode Reader (/USB1 option)

• How to Use 1
Follow the standard operating procedure for the barcode reader that you are using.
Operate the barcode reader while checking the status of the DX. An operation can be
carried out using the barcode reader when it can be carried out on the DX.
Commands 2
Scan the communication commands encoded in bar codes to operate the DX with

Common Operations
a barcode reader. The communication commands that you can use are listed in
the table below. For information about communication command syntax, see the
Communication Interface User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-17E.
3
Command Description
KE Performs key operations
PS Starts or stops memory sampling
EV Starts manual sampling 4
Causes triggers to occur
Takes snapshots
Saves display data
Saves event data
MS Writes messages 5
TL Starts or stops computation
Resets computation
Clears the computation data dropout display
IR
AK
Resets the relative timer
Releases alarm output (alarm ACK)
6
CV Switches the trend interval
EM Starts or stops e-mails
CU Manually recovers the Modbus master or client
BJ Writes free messages 7
BV Inserts characters
BT Sets batch names
BU Sets batch comments
CL Executes manual SNTP
LO Reads the setting mode setup data 8
LI Saves setup data
MA Resets the single match time timer
YC Clears measured and computed data and initializes setup data
EJ
YO
Changes login passwords
Loads setup files (for basic setting mode)
9
UD Switches the screen
MH Writes batch text fields (release numbers 4 and later)
BP Enters login information (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and later)
BQ Invalid user ACK operation (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and 10
later)
EC Initialization (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

Command Example
The command to write message number 8 in group 1 is: MS8,GRPUP,1. There must 11
be a terminator (an enter key code) at the end.

Note
• Y ou can read multiple commands (as many as 10) by putting sub delimiters (semicolons) 12
between them.
Example: PS0;MS8,GRPUP,1
• When you enter commands using bar codes, you can enter them separated or all at
once. You can separate commands however you want to. For example, you can separate App
the command to write message number 8 in group 1, MS8,GRPUP,1, into the following
components: MS > 8 > , > GRPUP > , > 1 > ENTER key code.
• If you use a barcode reader that automatically attaches a footer and a header to every
transmission, the result will be the same if MS is set to the header, the enter key code is set Index
to the footer, and you scan 8,GRPUP,1.
• When the DX receives an unsupported key code, it clears all of the key codes that it has
accumulated so far.

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-23
 2.12 Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)

Connecting/Removing a USB Flash Memory

• Connecting a USB Flash Memory
If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/
DX2000 Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.
1. Connect a USB flash memory to the USB port on the DX.
2. In operation mode, possible operations are shown. Select the desired operation
using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.

When set to auto save When set to manual save

Setting Description
Save Manual Saves unsaved data in the internal memory to a USB flash memory
device.
DATA SAVE MODE Switches to the DATA SAVE MODE display. For the procedure
to save the internal memory data, see section 4.8. This item only
appears when the DX is configured to display DATA SAVE MODE in
the display menu (release number 2 and later). You can change the
item that is displayed here with the menu customize function.
Load Settings Moves to the setup load display of setting mode. For the procedure
to load the setup data, see section 6.9.
Load Settings will not be displayed:
• When Media/USB loading is locked (see chapter 8 for details).
• When the DX is accessing storage media (formatting, saving, or
FTP communication).
Cancel Closes the operation selection window.

• Removing the USB Flash Memory

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Media eject soft key and then the USB soft key.
A message “Media can be removed safely.” appears.

3. Remove the USB flash memory.

Note
• One USB flash memory can be connected.
• Be sure to carry out the procedure above when removing the USB flash memory. If you
remove the USB memory without performing the above procedure, the data stored on it
could be damaged.

2-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.12 Using the USB Flash Memory (/USB1 Option)

Saving and Loading Data 1

The following data save/load and file operations can be carried out.
Save/Load setup data files (see section 6.9).
Save display data and event data files (see sections 4.8 and 6.4).
Load display data and event data files (see section 6.8).
2
List files and delete files (see section 6.7).

Common Operations
Format (see section 6.7).
3

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-25
 2.13 Setting the Decimal Point Type (Release
number 3 or later)
You can set the decimal point type for the display and files saved in text format.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating Environment.

Setup Items
• Decimal Point Types
Setting Display Example
Point 1234.56
Comma 1234,56

Explanation
• Decimal Point Types
The decimal point type setting affects the following kinds of files and displays. The
decimal point of any file or setting not listed below (the setup screen for example) is
displayed using a period.
Type Item
File output Manual sampled data file
Report file
Display Trend display
Digital display
Bar graph display
Overview display
Historical trend
Report data display
Custom display
Webpage All channel display
E-mails The instantaneous value data in alarm e-mails and
scheduled e-mails.
The report data in report e-mails

2-26 IM 04L41B01-01E
 2.14 Showing or Hiding the Menu Item for Switching 1
from Setting Mode to Basic Setting Mode
(Release number 3 or later)
Set whether or not to display a menu item in the setting mode menu for switching to
2
basic setting mode.

Common Operations
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic 3
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating Environment.

6
Setup Items
• Basic Setting Mode > Menu display
Setting Description 7
On Displays “Basic setting mode” in the setting mode menu.
Off Basic setting mode is not displayed in the setting mode menu.

8
Operations
When “Basic setting mode” appears in the setting mode menu, you can perform the
following operation:
1. Press MENU and select the Menu tab > Basic setting mode. Then press DISP/ 9
ENTER.
A confirmation window opens.

2. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER. 10

The basic setting mode menu appears.

Note
Regardless of this setting, you can switch from setting mode to basic setting mode by holding 11
down the FUNC key for 3 seconds.

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 2-27
Blank
Chapter 3 Measurement Channels and Alarms

3.1 Setting the Scan Interval and the Integration 1

Time of the A/D Converter
Select the scan interval and the integration time of the A/D converter.
For a description of the scan interval and the integration time of the A/D converter, see 2
section 1.1.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
 3
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > A/D, Memory.

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

Setup Items 6
• Scan interval > Scan mode
Normal: Measures at the normal mode scan interval.
* The scan mode is fixed at Normal when the multi batch function (/BT2 option; release 7
numbers 3 and later) is being used.
FAST: Measures at a scan interval of 25 ms (DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N, and
DX1004N) or 125 ms (DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N).
8
• Scan interval > Scan interval
The selectable settings appear.

• Scan interval > A/D integrate

When the scan mode is set to Normal, select the A/D integration time as necessary. 9
Only the selectable settings are displayed.
Settings Description
Auto The DX automatically detects the power supply frequency and sets the integration
time to 16.7 ms and 20 ms for 60 Hz and 50 Hz, respectively. Fixed to 20 ms on
10
/P1 models that use the 24 VDC power supply.
50Hz Sets the integration time to 20 ms.
60Hz Sets the integration time to 16.7 ms.
100ms Sets the integration time to 100 ms (when the scan interval is 2 s or 5 s).
11
600Hz The A/D integration time for fast sampling mode. You cannot change this value.

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-1
 3.2 Setting the Burnout Detection and the
Reference Junction Compensation of the
Thermocouple Input
Set the function that detects burnouts in the sensor for thermocouple input and 1-5V
input and the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Burnout, RJC.

Setup Items
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.

• Burnout set
Detects thermocouple and 1-5V input sensor burnouts.
Settings Description
Off Does not detect burnouts in the sensor.
Up When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to +over range. The
measured value displays “Burnout.”
For 1-5V input, the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the
measured value exceeds the scale upper limit by 10% of the scale width.
(Example: When the measured value is greater than 110 when the scale is from
0 to 100)
Down When the sensor burns out, the measured result is set to –over range. The
measured value displays “Burnout.”
For 1-5V input, the DX assumes that the sensor has burned out when the
measured value falls below the scale upper limit by 5% of the scale width.
(Example: When the measured value is less than –5 when the scale is from 0 to
100)

• RJC > Mode

Sets the reference junction compensation method of the thermocouple input. Select
Internal or External.
Settings Description
Internal Uses the reference junction compensation function of the DX.
External Uses an external reference junction compensation function. When set to
External, Volt is displayed.

• RJC > Volt

The compensation voltage to be added to the input. Set the value in the range of –
20000 µV to 20000 µV.

3-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.3 Setting the Input Range 1

Set the input range for each channel.

Setup Screen 2
• Temperature Unit
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Operating Environment. 3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

• Input Range for Each Channel

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel > 6
Range, Alarm.

9
Setup Items
• Temperature
Select the temperature unit. The setting is applied to all temperature measurement 10
channels.
Settings Description
C Use Celsius
F Use Fahrenheit 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-3
3.3 Setting the Input Range

• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.

• Range > Mode

Settings Description
Skip Not measured.
Volt, TC, RTD, DI, 1-5V Input type. Represents DC voltage, thermocouple, RTD, ON/OFF
input, and 1-5V inputs, respectively.
Delta, Scale, Sqrt Difference computation, linear scaling, and square root computation.

Set the items with check marks in the table below according to the mode value.
Mode
Setup Item
Volt TC RTD DI Delta Scale Sqrt 1-5V Skip
Type        
Range        
Span Lower        
Span Upper        
   
Scale Lower    
Scale Upper        
Unit        
Ref. CH        
Low-cut        
Low-cut value     

• Range > Type

Input type when Mode is Delta or Scale. See the description on Mode above.

• Range > Range

Input type details.
Setting Input Type Notes Setting Input Type Notes
20mV –20.000 mV to 20.000 mVDC Standard R Type R Standard
60mV –60.00 mV to 60.00 mVDC S Type S
200mV –200.00 mV to 200.00 mVDC B Type B
2V –2.000 V to 2.000 VDC K Type K
6V –6.000 V to 6.000 VDC E Type E

20V –20.000 V to 20.000 VDC J Type J
20V –50.00 V to 60.00 VDC T Type T
Pt Pt100 N Type N
JPt JPt100 W Type W
Level ON/OFF(Voltage) L Type L
Contact ON/OFF(Contact) U Type U
1-5V 0.800V to 5.200V WRe type WRe

Setting Input Type Notes Setting Input Type Notes

Kp Kp vs Au7Fe /N3 Cu1 Cu10 (GE) /N1
PLATI PLATINEL option Cu2 Cu10 (L&N) option
PR PR40-20 Cu3 Cu10 (WEED)
NiMo NiNiMo Cu4 Cu10 (BAILEY)
W/WRe W/WRe26 Cu5 Cu10: a = 0.00392 at 20°C
N2 Type N (AWG14) Cu6 Cu10: a = 0.00393 at 20°C
XK XK GOST*1 Cu25 Cu25: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
Pt50 Pt50
Ni1 Ni100 (SAMA)
Ni2 Ni100 (DIN)

Ni3 Ni120
J263 J263*B
Cu53 Cu53
Cu100 Cu100: a = 0.00425 at 0°C
Pt25 Pt25
Pt100G Pt100 GOST*1
Cu100G Cu100 GOST*1
Cu50G Cu50 GOST*1
Cu10G Cu10GOST*1
Pt46G Pt46 GOST*1
Pt200W Pt200(WEED)*2

*1 A function available on DXs with release number 3 or later.

*2 This function is available for release numbers 4 and later.

3-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.3 Setting the Input Range

• Range > Span_L, Span_U 1

Input range. The selectable range is displayed on the screen.

Note
• You cannot set the same value to Span Lower and Span Upper.
• When the Mode is 1-5V or Sqrt, Span Lower must be less than Span Upper.
2

• Range > Scale_L, Scale_U

Input range after converting the unit.
3
The selectable range is from –30000 to 30000. The decimal place is determined by
the Scale Lower setting. It can be set to the following positions: “X.XXXX,” “XX.XXX,”

Measurement Channels and Alarms

“XXX.XX,” “XXXX.X,” or “XXXXX.”

Note 4
• The DX converts the measured value to a value obtained by removing the decimal point
from the value span specified by Scale Lower and Scale Upper. For example, if the scale
setting is “–5 to 5,” the value is converted to a value within the span of “10”; if the scale
setting is “–5.0 to 5.0,” the value is converted to a value within a span of “100.” In this case, 5
the resolution of the value converted to a span of “10” is lower than the value converted to a
span of “100.” To prevent the display from becoming rough, it is recommended that the scale
be set so that this value is greater than 100.
• You cannot set the same value to Scale Lower and Scale Upper. 6
• When the Mode is 1-5V or Sqrt, Scale Lower must be less than Scale Upper.

• Range > Unit 7

Set the unit (up to 6 characters, A a # 1).

• Range > Ref. CH

The reference channel for difference computation. 8
• Range > Low-cut
Select On to use the low-cut function.
* The low-cut value for 1 to 5 V input is fixed to 0% value of the input span.
9
• Range > Value
On a square root computation channel, set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to
5.0% of the input span.
Measured value
10
Result of square root computation

Low-cut value 11
Input value

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-5
 3.4 Setting the Moving Average of the Input
Set the moving average function of the measurement channel. This function suppresses
the effects of noise.
For a description of the function, see section 1.1.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Moving average.

Setup Items
Scan Interval

Average value
Average value

Count

• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels.

• Moving average > On/Off

To use moving average, select On.

• Moving average > Count

Set the number of data points of the moving average in the range of 2 to 400.

3-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function 1

Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
2
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Alarm > Basic settings; Switch, Relay; or
Hysteresis.
• Basic settings • Switch, Relay 3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

• Hystersis
6

Setup Items
• Basic settings > Reflash 9
To set the reflash operation on the alarm output relay, select On. The reflash function
is set on the first three output relays.
Setting Description
Off Reflash is not used. 10
On Reflash is used. The relays are deactivated for approximately 500 ms.
On-1s Reflash is used. The relays are deactivated for approximately 1 s.
On-2s Reflash is used. The relays are deactivated for approximately 2 s.

• Basic settings > Rate of change 11

• Decrease
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the low limit on rate-of-change
alarm in terms of the number of sampled data points (1 to 32). The actual interval is
obtained by multiplying the value specified here by the scan interval.
12
• Increase
Set the interval for the rate-of-change calculation of the high limit on rate-of-change
alarm in the same manner as the interval for the low limit on rate-of-change alarm. App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-7
3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function

• Basic setting > Indicator

You can choose to make the alarm displays behave in the following ways. When you
use the alarm annunciator function (release number 3 or later), the setting follows the
annunciator sequence.
Settings Description
Nonhold Clears the alarm indication when the alarm condition is released (returns to
normal condition).
Hold Holds the alarm indication until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.

• Internal Switch > AND

Select the internal switches that are to operate using AND logic. Set the range
of internal switches (from the first internal switch) to take the AND logic. All
subsequent switches will be set to OR logic.

• Relay > AND

Select the relays that are to operate using AND logic. Set the range of relays (from the
first alarm relay) to take the AND logic. All subsequent relays will be set to OR logic.
Available settings are None, I01 (I01 only), I01-I02 (I01 and I02), I01-I03 (I01 to I03),
etc. Only alarm output relays that are installed are valid.

Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is fixed to OR logic.
Specifying AND produces no effect.

• Relay > Action

Select whether the alarm output relay is energized or de-energized when an alarm
occurs. The setting applies to all alarm output relays.

• Relay > Hold

You can choose to make the alarm output relays behave in the following ways. This
setting applies to all relays. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release
number 3 or later), the setting follows the annunciator sequence.
Settings Description
Nonhold Turns the output relay OFF when the alarm condition is released (returns to
normal condition).
Hold Holds the output relay at ON until an alarm acknowledge operation is performed.

Note
When reflash is turned ON, the operation of the first three output relays is set to nonhold.
Specifying Hold produces no effect.

3-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.5 Setting the Auxiliary Alarm Function

• Relay > Relay Action on Ack 1

You can select the relay output status that is enabled after the AlarmACK operation
from the following two settings. When you use the alarm annunciator function (release
number 3 or later), the setting follows the annunciator sequence.
Settings Description 2
Normal The relay is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed. If the
condition for activating the alarm output relay is met in the next scan interval, the
relay is activated.
This operation is valid only when the alarm output relay is set to Hold.
Reset The relay is deactivated when the alarm ACK operation is executed. If a new
3
condition for activating the alarm output relay is met, the relay is activated.

Measurement Channels and Alarms

An example of the relay action when alarm ACK is executed is shown below. This
example is for the case when the output relay AND item is set to None. 4
Normal
Alarm Alarm ACK
occurrence
Alarm 1 Alarm
occurrence 5
Alarm 2

Activated
Alarm output relay
Deactivated 6
Relay is activated in the next scan interval

Reset
Alarm Alarm ACK
7
occurrence
Alarm 1 Alarm
occurrence

Alarm 2 8
Activated
Alarm output relay
Deactivated

Relay is activated on the next alarm occurrence 9

• Hysteresis > Meas CH
• High/Low
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm 10
specified on measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span or scaling width
• Delta High/Low
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the difference high/low
11
limit alarm specified on measurement channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span
12
• Hysteresis > Math CH (/M1 and /PM1 options)
Sets the hysteresis width of the alarm occurrence/release of the high/low limit alarm
specified on computation channels.
Selectable range: 0.0% to 5.0% of the measurement span App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-9
 3.6 Hiding the Alarm Indication
Select whether to enable the alarm hide function.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Action.

Setup Items
• Alarm action > No logging
To enable the function that turns off the alarm indicator and logging, select On. The
Detect setup item is displayed in the alarm setting screen (see section 3.7).

This function disables the alarm indicator and the logging of alarm events to the alarm
summary. Alarms are also not displayed by the alarm annunciator (release number 3
or later).

• Settings for Each Channel and Each Alarm

See section 3.7.

3-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels 1

Set the alarms after setting the range. All alarm settings of a channel are cancelled in the
following cases. 2
• When the input type (Volt, TC, etc.) is changed.
• When the input range is changed.
• When the upper or lower limit of the span or scale is changed on channels that are set
to linear scale, square root computation, or 1-5 V (including changes in the decimal 3
point position).

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Setup Screen
• Alarms for Each Channel 4
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Range, Alarm.

7
• Alarm Delay Time
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Tag, Memory, Delay. 8

On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option

10

11

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-11
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels

• Alarm Levels and Colors (Release number 3 or later)

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Alarm level/color.

3-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels

Setup Items 1
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that
are displayed on the screen.
2
• Alarm > 1, 2, 3, and 4
For each alarm, 1 to 4, select On to enable it.

• Alarm > Type 3

Select the alarm type.

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Settings Name Description
H High limit alarm –
L Low limit alarm – 4
h Difference high limit alarm Can be specified on channels set to difference computation.
l Difference low limit alarm Can be specified on channels set to difference computation.
R High limit on rate-of-change alarm –
r Low limit on rate-of-change alarm – 5
T Delay high limit alarm –
t Delay low limit alarm –

Alarms on channels set to difference computation are inserted at the following 6

positions.
H, L, T, t R, r, h, l

Input value

-
Measured value
7
Measured value on the reference channel

• Alarm > Value

Set the alarm value for the selected alarm type. 8
When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Volt, TC, RTD, or DI
Type Value Example of a Range of Alarm Values
H, L Value in the measurable range –2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range
R, r 1 digit to the upper limit of the width 0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range 9
of the measurable range
However, less than or equal to 30000 0.1 to 1760.0°C for thermocouple type R
excluding the decimal point.
T, t Same as H and L. Same as H and L. 10
When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Delta
Type Value Example of a Range of Alarm Values
H, L Value in the measurable range –2.0000 to 2.0000 V for 2 V range 11
h, l Value in the measurable range –1760.0 to 1760.0°C for thermocouple type R
R, r 1 digit to the width of the measurable 0.0001 to 3.0000 V for 2 V range
range
However, less than or equal to 30000 0.1 to 1760.0°C for thermocouple type R
excluding the decimal point.
12
T, t Same as H and L. Same as H and L.

When the Mode of the Channel Is Set to Scale, Sqrt, or 1-5V

Type Value Example of a Range of Alarm Values
App
H, L –5% to 105% of the scale width. –5.0 to 105.0 when the scale is 0.0 to 100.0
However, within –30000 to 30000 –120.00 to 300.00 when the scale is –100.00
excluding the decimal point. to 300.00
R, r Within 1 to 30000 excluding the 0.1 to 3000.0 when the scale is 0.0 to 100.0
Index
decimal point. 0.01 to 300.00 when the scale is –100.00 to
300.00
T, t Same as H and L. Same as H and L.

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-13
3.7 Setting Alarms on Channels

• Alarm > Relay

Select whether to turn On or Off the relay output.

• Alarm > No.

Set the output relay number or internal switch number when performing relay output.

• Alarm > Detect

This item appears when the alarm hide function (see section 3.6) is turned On. Select
whether to show or hide the alarm indication when an alarm occurs. If set to Off, a
signal is output to the alarm output relay or internal switch when an alarm occurs, but
it is not indicated on the screen. The alarm is also not recorded in the alarm summary,
and alarms are not displayed by the alarm annunciator (release number 3 or later).

• Alarm delay > Time (for delay high/low limit alarms)

Set the alarm delay time using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, you can set the delay time to a value
within the range of 1 to 3600 seconds or 1 to 24 hours.

Note
• The alarm delay time takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval. For
example, if the alarm delay time is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the actual delay
time is 6 s.
• The delay alarm has the following special operations.
• If the computation is stopped in a condition in which the computed value is exceeding the
alarm setting when a delay alarm is set on a computation channel, the alarm is turned
On after the specified period (delay period) elapses.
• The alarm detection operation is reset if a power failure occurs. The operation restarts
after the power recovers.
• If the alarm setting of the delay high limit alarm is changed when an alarm is already
activated and the input is greater than or equal to the new setting, the alarm continues.
For all other cases, the alarm detection operation starts at the new setting. This is also
true for the delay lower limit alarm.

• Alarm delay > Unit (For delay high/low limit alarms)

This setting is only available on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option. Set the
unit of the alarm delay time. You can select seconds or hours.

• Alarm display > Level (Release number 3 or later)

When multiple alarms occur, the display of alarms with higher levels is given higher
priority. This setting applies to all channels.
Setting Description
1>2>3>4 The order of alarm level preference, from highest to lowest preference, is 1,
2, 3, 4.
1>4>2>3 The order of alarm level preference, from highest to lowest preference, is 1,
4, 2, 3.
1>4>3>2 The order of alarm level preference, from highest to lowest preference, is 1,
4, 3, 2.

• Alarm display > Color (Release number 3 or later)

Determines the alarm color for each alarm level. This setting applies to all channels.
Item Setting
1 Sets the alarm level 1 color to red, orange, yellow, or pink.
2 Sets the alarm level 2 color.
3 Sets the alarm level 3 color.
4 Sets the alarm level 4 color.

3-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.8 Releasing the Alarm Output (Alarm ACK 1
Operation)
This operation is valid when the DX is set as follows: 2
DX with release number 3 or later
• When Annunciator mode is set to On in the basic setting mode.
• When Annunciator mode is set to Off, the operation is the same as described for DX
3
with release number 2 below.
DX with release number 2

Measurement Channels and Alarms

• When Indicator is set to Hold in the basic setting mode.
• When Relay Hold is set to Hold and Relay action on ACK is set to Normal in the 4
basic setting mode.
• When Relay action on ACK is set to Reset in the basic setting mode.
DX before release number 2
• When Indicator is set to Hold in the basic setting mode. 5
• When Relay Hold is set to Hold in the basic setting mode.
For the procedure to set the relay action, see section 3.5.

On a DX with advanced security (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and later), you can
6
perform separate alarm ACK operations on each alarm.
For information about individual alarm ACK operations, see section 4.4.
7
Procedure
This operation is carried out after an alarm occurs.
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC. 8
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the AlarmACK soft key.

The alarm output is released.
9
Explanation
• Alarm Acknowledge (ACK) Operation
When an alarm acknowledge operation is carried out, the indications and outputs 10
(relays and switches) of all activated alarms are cleared.
In annunciator mode (release number 3 or later), the alarm indications and outputs
follow the annunciator sequence.
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-15
 3.9 Performing Calibration Correction (/CC1
Option)
The input value is corrected using segments, and the result is used as a measured value.
For a description of the function, see section 1.1.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Calibration correction.

Setup Items
Condition
Y5
X1 < X2 < X3 < X4 < X5
Y4

MES val
Calibration set points
Y3
Y2 Number of set points
Y1
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 True val

• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. You can set consecutive channels whose range is set to
the same value as the first channel.

• Number of set points

Select the number of points that make up the segments (including the start and end
points) in the range of 2 to 16.
To disable calibration correction, select Off.

• Number of set points > MES val, True val

Press the Input soft key and enter the value.
For the MES value, set a value that is greater than the previous value.
Press the Measure soft key to set the measured value at that point to MES val. If
you press the Measure soft key when setting multiple channels simultaneously, the
measured value of the first channel are set to the MES val of all channels.
Selectable Range of MES and True Values
• Channels on which linear scaling is specified
–30000 to 30000 (the decimal place is the same setting as the scale value)
• Other channels
Value in the measurable range of the selected range
Example: –2.0000 to 2.0000 for 2 V range

Note
• The calibration correction setting is set to Off if you change the Mode or Range setting.
• Calibration correction cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.

3-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option) 1

The pulses applied to the pulse input terminal are counted on a computation channel.
For a description of the function, see section 1.1. 2
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Expression, Alarm 3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

Setup Items 6
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target computation channels.

• Math 7
Select On.

• Math > Calculation expression

Enter the equation using symbols. 8
Q01 to Q08: Displays the number of pulses per second.
P01 to P08: Displays the number of pulses per scan interval.
* The numbers 01 to 08 correspond to the pulse input terminal numbers.
For the procedure to set the computation channels, see section 9.1. 9
The procedure is explained below using an example.
• Example 1: Pulse Sum Value
Display the sum value of the pulse signal applied to pulse input terminal number 6. 10
Pulse input Time
Scan interval

P6 11
Number of pulses

per scan interval

(Sum) 12
TLOG.SUM
Pulse sum value
App
Expression
Assign the computation channel and set the expression. Set the span lower/upper
limit and unit according to the application.

Channel Equation Description Index
101 TLOG.SUM(P6) Sum of the number of pulses per scan interval

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-17
3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option)

• Example 2: Number of Pulses per Minute

Count the pulse signal applied to pulse input terminal number 6 on the DX1002 (scan
interval set to 250 ms), and calculate and display the number of pulses per minute.
(Moving average over a minute)

Pulse input Time

Sampling interval
(250 ms)

101ch

Number of pulses (60x)
per second

102ch
Number of pulses
per minute

Expression
Assign the computation channel as shown below and set the expressions. Set the
span lower/upper limit and unit according to the application.
Channel Equation Description
101 Q6 Number of pulses per second
102 101*K01 Number of pulses per minute

Constant Value Description

K01 60 Coefficient for converting the number of
pulses per second to the number of
pulses per minute

Channel Rolling average Description

101 Sampling interval: 1s Moving average over a minute
Number of samples: 60

Channels
The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel
number in one scan interval.
Use a channel of a channel number larger than that of the channel counting the
number of pulses per second for the computation channel that is to calculate the
number of pulses per minute.

• Example 3: Reset When the Pulse Sum Value Exceeds a Certain Value
Reset the sum value when the pulse sum value exceeds a specified value (reset
value) and carry over the value exceeding the reset value to the sum after the reset.
Count the number of resets and calculate the total sum value up to that point.

Expression
Assign expressions to the computation channels as shown below and set the
constants.
Channel Expression Application
101 ((102+P01).GE.K01)+101 Pulse sum value reset count
102 CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(P01) Pulse sum value
103 K01*101+102 Total sum value

Symbol Description
P01 Counts the number of pulses per scan interval.
K01 Constant. The reset value. The sum value is reset when this value is exceeded.

3-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.10 Counting Pulses (/PM1 Option)

Pulse input Time

1
Scan interval

P01
Number of pulses
2
per scan interval
0 0 1 1 1 2 2
101ch

Reset count 3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

K01
reset value
(Sum)
4
102ch
Sum value
(Resets the value below the reset value)
5
Channel 101: Reset Count
Calculates the number of times the pulse sum value is reset.
The expression “((102+P01).GE.K01)” is set to 1 when “the previous pulse sum value
(102) + the current pulse count (P01)” is greater than the reset value (K01). Otherwise, 6
the expression is set to 0. The value of channel 101 is incremented when the pulse
sum value exceeds the reset value.

Channel 102: Pulse Sum Value 7

Calculates the pulse sum value.
Under normal conditions, the pulse sum value TLOG.SUM (P01) is calculated. When
the pulse sum value is greater than or equal to the reset value (K01), the pulse sum
value is set to the amount exceeding K01. 8
Channel 103: Total Sum Value
Multiplies the reset value (K01) by the reset count (101) and adds the pulse sum value
(102) to derive the total sum value. 9
Note
• The computation is performed in order from the channel with the smallest channel number
in one scan interval. If the channel number in the expression is greater than or equal to the
channel number in which the expression is assigned, the previous computed result (previous 10
value) is used for the channel in the expression.
• If the pulse input value of the scan interval is greater than the reset value, correct
computation cannot be achieved.
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-19
 3.11 Setting the Method of Detecting Over-Range
Values of Linearly Scaled Measurement
Channels
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Input, Tag.

Setup Items
• Input > Value on over-range
Settings Description
Free The value is set to –over range if the value is less than –30000 and +over range
if the value is greater than 30000 excluding the decimal point. The value is
displayed as –Over and +Over, respectively.
Over The value is set to –over range if the value is less than –5% of the scale and
+over range if the value is greater than 105%. The value is displayed as –Over
and +Over, respectively.
Example: If the scale is 0.0 to 200.0, the value is set to –over range if the value is
less than –10.0 of the scale and +over range if the value is greater than 210.0.

Note
For computations such as TLOG, CLOG, and report, the handling of the scale over-range value
can be set in advance.
See section 9.1.

3-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release 1
number 3 or later)
This section explains how to use the alarm annunciator function.
For a description of the function, see section 1.2. 2

Setup Screen
• Annunciator Mode 3
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Alarm > Action.

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

6
• Alarm Levels and Colors
See section 3.7.
7
• Display
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
Annunciator.
8

10

Setup Items
11
• Alarm action > Annunciator mode
Select On to use the annunciator function.

• Alarm action > Sequence 12

Select the annunciator sequence. For details about the annunciator sequence, see
“Explanation” in this section.
Setting Description
ISA-A-4 A no lock-in sequence. App
ISA-A A lock-in sequence.
ISA-M A double lock-in sequence.

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-21
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

• Alarm action > Time off color

The window display color when no alarms are activated. You can select white or
green.

• Levels and Colors

See section 3.7.

• Annunciator position
The position of the annunciator window. See the explanation for the next item.

• Annunciator position > On/Off

Set the annunciator position that you want to use to On.
Starting with 1, consecutively set all annunciator positions that you want to use to On.
After a position has been set to Off, all of the positions after it will also be turned off
even if they are set to On. The annunciator display changes depending on how many
annunciator windows you use. For details, see “Explanation.”

• Annunciator position > Channel, Level

You can assign alarms to annunciator windows by specifying channel numbers and
alarm levels.
You can set Level to 1, 2, 3, 4, or All. If you select All, all of the alarms in the specified
channel are assigned to the specified window.

• Annunciator position > Comment txt block No.

You can select a text string (label) to display in the annunciator window by selecting a
comment text block number.
For information about how to set comment text blocks, see section 5.18.

3-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

Procedure 1
• Opening the Display
The annunciator display appears when you turn on the power. You can switch to the
annunciator display from other displays by following the procedure below.
2
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Use the up and down arrow keys to select Annunciator, and then press DISP/
ENTER.
3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

The display appears. The example below is for when there are four annunciator windows.

Display window 6
Label

8
• Alarm ACK
Perform this operation after an alarm has occurred. This operation affects all alarms.
1. In operation mode, press FUNC.
9
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the AlarmACK soft key.

The alarm indications and outputs are cleared according to the annunciator sequence. For 10
details, see “Explanation.”

• Alarm Display Reset (When the annunciator sequence is set to ISA-M)

The alarm display reset operation will not take place unless the alarm ACK operation 11
is performed first. The alarm display reset operation affects all alarms.
1. In operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.
12
2. Press the AlarmDispRST soft key.
The alarm displays are reset. They are reset according to the annunciator sequence. For
details, see “Explanation.”
App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-23
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

Explanation
• Display Window Layouts and Labels
The annunciator display layouts and labels change as indicated in the table below.

Displayed Window Layout Labels (max number of displayable Font Size

Windows Vertical × characters)
Horizontal Lines Characters
4 2×2 5 26 6
6 3×2 5 26 6
8 4×2 4 26 6
10 5×2 3 26 6
12 6×2 3 26 6
16 8×2 2 26 6
20 5×4 3 13 6
24 8×3 2 17 6

Display Positions
Annunciator windows are assigned to positions starting with the left column.
Annunciator windows are assigned in ascending order. The example below is for an
annunciator display with eight windows.

1 5 Annunciator
position number

2 6

3 7

4 8

Labels
The number of characters that can be displayed varies depending on the number of
annunciator windows.

• Window Colors
State Color
When an alarm is released “Time off color” (green or white)
When an alarm is occurring The alarm color. If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is
displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority.
Displayed windows not in use Gray

3-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

• Annunciator Sequence 1
ISA-A-4
Sequence diagram
Process Normal
Sequence Normal 2
Display Normal
Relay output Deactivated
Alarm icon No display
To abnormal
3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Return to normal Return to normal

Process Abnormal Process Abnormal

4
Sequence Acknowledged Sequence Alarm
Display On Alarm ACK Display Flashing
Relay output Deactivated while abnormal Relay output Activated
Alarm icon On (red) Alarm icon Blinking (red) 5

Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK 6

Alarm
7

Display

8
Relay output

When multiple alarms have been assigned to a single annunciator window 9

• If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority.

When two alarms have been assigned to a single relay

When the relay is set to OR logic 10
ACK ACK
Alarm A
Occurrence
Release 11
Alarm B
Occurrence
Release 12
Relay
Activated
Deactivated
App
An alarm has occurred, and the relay has been activated.

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-25
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

When the relay is set to AND logic

ACK ACK

Alarm A
Occurrence
Release

Alarm B
Occurrence
Release

Relay
Activated
Deactivated
Alarm B has occurred, so now all alarms have occurred.
This causes the relay to be activated.

3-26 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

ISA-A 1
Sequence diagram
Process Normal
Sequence Normal
Display Normal
To abnormal
2
Relay output Deactivated
Alarm icon No display

3
Alarm ACK
Return to normal
while normal

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Process Abnormal Process Abnormal or
normal
4
Sequence Acknowledged Sequence Alarm
Display On Alarm ACK Display Flashing
Relay output Deactivated while abnormal Relay output Activated
Alarm icon On (red) Alarm icon Blinking (red) 5

Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
6
Alarm

7
Display

8
Relay output

• If an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the annunciator blinks with the color that is displayed
when no alarms are activated. 9
• If an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the alarm icon blinks green.

When multiple alarms have been assigned to a single annunciator window

• If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority. 10
When two alarms have been assigned to a single relay
When the relay is set to OR logic
ACK ACK
11
Alarm A
Occurrence
Release

Alarm B
12
Occurrence
Release

Relay App
Activated
Deactivated
Relay hold
Index
An alarm has occurred so the relay has been activated.

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-27
3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

When the relay is set to AND logic

ACK ACK

Alarm A
Occurrence
Release

Alarm B
Occurrence
Release

Relay
Activated
Deactivated
Relay hold

Alarm B has occurred, so now all alarms have occurred.

This causes the relay to be activated.

3-28 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.12 Using the Alarm Annunciator Function (Release number 3 or later)

ISA-M 1
Sequence diagram
Process Normal
Sequence Normal
Display Normal 2
Relay output Deactivated
Alarm icon No display

Alarm display reset while

normal
To abnormal 3

Measurement Channels and Alarms

Process Abnormal or Process Abnormal or

Sequence
normal
Acknowledged Sequence
normal
Alarm
4
Display On Display Flashing
Alarm ACK
Relay output Deactivated Relay output Activated
Alarm icon On (red) Alarm icon Blinking (red)
5
Sequence pattern
Alarm ACK Alarm ACK
Display reset Display Display 6
reset reset

Alarm

7
Display

8
Relay output

Alarm ACK Alarm ACK 9

Display
reset

Alarm 10

Display 11

Relay output
12
• Even if an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the annunciator continues to blink with the color
that is displayed when an alarm has occurred.
• Even if an alarm is released before the alarm display reset operation is performed, the annunciator continues to blink with
the color that is displayed when an alarm has occurred. App
• Even if an alarm is released before the alarm ACK operation is performed, the alarm icon continues to blink red.
• Even if an alarm is released before the alarm display reset operation is performed, the alarm icon stays red.

When multiple alarms have been assigned to a single annunciator window Index
• If multiple alarms are occurring, the window is displayed using the color of the alarm with the highest priority.

When two alarms have been assigned to a single relay

Same as for ISA-A.

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-29
 3.13 Managing the Input Calibration Interval (/CC1
option; release numbers 4 and later)
Manage the input calibration interval to make sure that calibration is performed regularly.
For a description of the function, see section 1.1.

Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Set Calibration.

Setup Items
• Set Calibration > Use/Not
Select whether to Use or Not use calibration management.
When you select Use, the Set Calibration tab appears in setting mode.

• Set Calibration > Notification (DayBfr)

You can specify how many days before the calibration due date you want to display
the calibration notification screen. You can set the number of days to a value between
1 and 10.

• Set Calibration > Renotification

You can specify the period at which to display the calibration notification screen. The
calibration notification screen will continue to appear until calibration is completed.
Setting Description
10min The screen will appear every 10 minutes.
30min The screen will appear every 30 minutes.
1h The screen will appear every hour.
8h The screen will appear every 8 hours.
24h The screen will appear every 24 hours.

3-30 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.13 Managing the Input Calibration Interval (/CC1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

Procedure 1
• Viewing the Calibration Notification Screen

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4
The calibration notification screen only appears over operation screens. It will continue
to appear until you perform calibration (Finish Calibration).
You can close the calibration notification screen by pressing ESC or DISP/ENTER.
Operation Example
5
When Notification is set to 1 (DayBfr) and Renotification is set to 8h

Notification screen
display start
Calibration due date 6

Notification screen Notification screen Notification screen Notification screen

appears appears appears appears
7
00:00 08:00 16:00 00:00 08:00
Renotification Renotification Renotification Renotification
Notification (DayBfr) setting
8

Note
• The calibration notification screen will close if you change screens while it is displayed. 9
• If the calibration due date passes before you complete calibration, that information will be
recorded in the login log (the operation log on DXs with the /AS1 option).

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-31
3.13 Managing the Input Calibration Interval (/CC1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

• Checking the Calibration Due Date

Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode) > Set Calibration tab.
The date on which the last
calibration was completed
Displayed according to the
date format
(see section 2.4)

Due date for next
calibration
Displayed according to the
date format (see section 2.4)

• Configuring Calibration
Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode) > Set Calibration tab > Calibration
Correction.

The setup items are the same as in section 3.9, “Performing Calibration
Correction.”
For the setting procedure, see section 3.9.

3-32 IM 04L41B01-01E
 3.13 Managing the Input Calibration Interval (/CC1 option; release numbers 4 and later)

• Finishing Calibration
Set the next calibration due date. 1
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode) > Set Calibration tab > Finish
Calibration. 2
A window for setting the calibration due date appears.

Measurement Channels and Alarms

4

5
2. Set the next calibration due date, and press DISP/ENTER.

Soft Key Description

Input
+1 Week
Enter the date directly.
Set the date by adding weeks to the current calibration due date.
6
–1 Week Set the date by subtracting weeks from the current calibration due date.
+1 Month Set the date by adding months to the current calibration due date.
–1 Month Set the date by subtracting months from the current calibration due date.
7
3. Use the arrow keys to select Execute, and press DISP/ENTER.
Calibration is complete.

Note 8
• You cannot set the calibration due date to a date before the current day.
• Whenever you complete calibration, a log is added to the login log (the operation log on DXs
with the /AS1 option).
9

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 3-33
Blank
Chapter 4 Switching Operation Screens

4.1 Operations in Operation Mode 1

Switching the Screen with the DISP/ENTER Key and Arrow Keys
Press DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to show the display selection menu and sub menu 2
to switch the display. The flow of operation is indicated below.
DISP/ENTER key and arrow keys
TREND Sec. 4.2
3
GROUP 1 GROUP n

4
DIGITAL Sec. 4.2

Switching Operation Screens

GROUP 1 GROUP n Sub menu 5
Display selection menu

About tag display

BAR Sec. 4.2
Long tags may not fit into their display areas. 6
When this is the case, they are displayed as follows:
• After the screen is displayed, the tag automatically
GROUP 1 GROUP n
scrolls through the display area once.
• Press ESC to scroll the tag through the display 7
area again.

OVERVIEW
Sec. 4.4
REPORT DATA RELAY 8
Sec. 4.5 Sec. 4.5

INFORMATION

ALARM MESSAGE MEMORY COLUMN BAR EVENT SWITCH 9

SUMMARY SUMMARY SUMMARY
Sec. 4.6 Sec. 4.7 Sec. 4.8 Sec. 4.10 Sec. 4.5

MODBUS 10
MASTER
TREND MODBUS
HISTORY CLIENT Sec. 4.5
Sec. 4.3

LOG
11
Sec. 4.9

Login log, error log, communication log,

FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log,
DHCP log, Modbus status log
operation log (/AS1 option), 12
and change settings log (/AS1 option)
Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see 5.17
CUSTOM
DISPLAY
IM04L41B01-04E App

Annunciator
Sec. 3.12
Index
Appears when the annunciator function is being used.

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-1
4.1 Operations in Operation Mode

Operations Using Other Keys

Soft keys (see below)

START STOP USER FUNC ESC MENU

Favorite key (see section 5.15)
FUNC key (see below)
USER key (see section 7.1)
START and STOP keys (see section 6.4)

Operation Using the FUNC Key

Press FUNC to display the FUNC key menu at the bottom of the screen. Press the
Next soft key to switch the menu. Press the desired soft key.

Next soft key

FUNC key menu

(Select using the soft keys)

4-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.1 Operations in Operation Mode

Menu Item Refer to 1

Alarm ACK Section 3.8
Alarm DispRST Section 3.12
Message Section 5.4
Free message Section 5.4
Media eject Sections 6.4 and 2.12 2
Snap shot Section 6.6
Manual sample Section 6.5
Trigger Section 6.4
Save display Section 6.4
Save event Section 6.4 3
Save stop Section 4.8
Math start/stop Section 9.4
Math reset Section 9.4
Math ACK Section 9.4
Edge Switch Section 7.1 4
Timer reset Section 7.1
Match T Reset Section 7.1

Switching Operation Screens

Keylock Section 8.1
Logout Section 8.3
Locked ACK IM04L41B01-05EN 5
Password change Section 8.3
Normal speed/Second speed Section 5.3
Batch Section 6.3
Text field Section 6.3
Builder IM04L41B01-04 6
Favorite regist Section 5.15
Standard display Section 5.14
System info Section 2.5
Network info Section 2.5
SNTP IM04L41B01-17E 7
E-Mail start/stop IM04L41B01-17E
E-Mail test IM04L41B01-17E
FTP test IM04L41B01-17E

8
Customizing the Menus
The display selection menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed and
the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed can be changed.
See section 5.17. 9

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-3
 4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms,
Values, or Bar Graphs
This section explains how to use the trend, digital, and bar graph displays.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Procedure
• Showing the Display
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the arrow keys to select TREND, DIGITAL, or BAR, and press DISP/
ENTER.
The selected display appears.

• Changing the Displayed Contents

1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.
Trend display sub menu

Group name: Displays the group

ALL CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of all
channels
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the
channels registered to groups
AUTO ZONE ON: Displays trend waveforms
separately by assigning each
channel in the group to separate
display areas (zones)
AUTO ZONE OFF: Does not display waveforms
in zones
SCALE ON: Displays the scale
SCALE OFF: Clears the scale
FINE GRID ON: Displays the fine grid
FINE GRID OFF: Clears the fine grid
TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into the
typical tag display space, the
alarm and measured values are
covered so that the tag can be
displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display
DIGITAL OFF: Clears the numeric display
section
DIGITAL ON: Displays the numeric display
section
MESSAGE DISP1: Displays the messages using
display method 1
MESSAGE DISP2: Displays the messages using
display method 2
TREND SPACE ON: Inserts a space at the right
edge (horizontal display) or
the top edge (vertical display)
in the waveform display area
TREND SPACE OFF: Does not insert a space
(Not displayed with the default settings.
To display, see section 5.17.)
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the
displayed groups
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups

4-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs

Digital display sub menu 1

2
Group name: Displays the group

TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into

the typical tag display space,
3
the alarm and measured values
are covered so that the tag can
be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display.
4
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the
displayed groups

Switching Operation Screens

AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups
5
Bar graph display submenu

7
Group name: Displays the group

TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into
the typical tag display space, 8
the alarm and measured values
are covered so that the tag can
be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display.
AUTO SCROLL ON: Automatically switches the
9
displayed groups
AUTO SCROLL OFF: Does not automatically switch
the displayed groups
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents. 10
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.

• S
 tarting the Waveform Display of the Trend Display/Stopping the
Waveform Updating 11
Press START to start the waveform display of the trend display. Press STOP to stop
the waveform updating.

• Writing Messages 12
See section 5.4.

• Switching the Displayed Group Using Arrow Keys

Press the right arrow key to switch the displayed group in ascending order. Press the
left arrow key to switch the displayed group in reverse.
App

• S
 witching the Trend, Digital, and Bar Graph Displays Using the Arrow
Keys
Press the down arrow key while showing the trend, digital, or bar graph display to Index
switch the display in the order trend, digital, bar graph, trend, and so on. Press the up
arrow key to switch the display in reverse order.

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-5
4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs

Explanation
• ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL on the Trend Display
On the group display, the channels that are assigned to the group are displayed. In
all channel display, the waveforms of all channels that are configured to record data
are displayed on the current group display. The waveforms of channels that are not
assigned to the group are displayed in the waveform display area, but the scales,
current value marks, and digital values of the channels are not displayed.

• SCALE ON/OFF and DIGITAL ON/OFF on the Trend Display

Select whether to show or hide the scale and numeric display sections.

• AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF

The displayed groups can be automatically switched at a specified interval by
selecting AUTO SCROLL ON. The display switches in ascending group order.
For the procedure to set the auto scroll interval of groups, see section 5.13.

• MESSAGE DISP 1 and MESSAGE DISP 2 on the Trend Display

Switches the message display method.

• AUTO ZONE (Release number 3 or later)

Displays trend waveforms separately by evenly dividing display areas (zones) among
a group’s channels.
With AUTO ZONE OFF With AUTO ZONE ON

Waveform display area is

divided evenly.

• FINE GRID (Release number 3 or later)

Display the fine grid when the normal grid is too wide for reading measured values.
The fine grid can be used in the trend and historical trend displays. The fine grid
places an additional four lines between the normal grid lines.
With FINE GRID OFF With FINE GRID ON

Fine grid

4-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs

• TAG DETAIL ON/OFF (Release number 3 or later) 1

When TAG DETAIL is set to ON and a tag does not fit into the typical tag display
space, it covers the alarm and measured values so that it can be displayed
completely. Depending on display space limitations, it may not be possible to display
the entire tag. If the tag comment and number do not fit within a display area, they can 2
be scrolled. The TAG DETAIL setting made in one display affects the settings in all of
the other displays.
The figure below shows an example for when six channels are being displayed.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed
3
If TAG DETAIL is on, the tag comment is displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON
4

Switching Operation Screens

Tag comment Tag comment 5

Tag comment
Tag comment
8

10
Tag comment

11
Tag comment

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-7
4.2 Displaying the Measured Data as Waveforms, Values, or Bar Graphs

When the Tag Number Is Displayed

When TAG DETAIL is set to off, display priority is given to the tag number. If TAG
DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON

Tag no.
Tag no.
Tag comment

Tag no. Tag no.

Tag comment Tag comment

Tag no. Tag no.

Tag comment Tag comment

In the above digital value display example, because there is enough space for the tags, the
display does not change whether TAG DETAIL is on or off.
In the above bar graph display example, because space is limited, the display does not change
whether TAG DETAIL is on or off.

• TREND SPACE ON/OFF

With TREND SPACE ON

Space

4-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical 1
Trend Display)
There are five methods to display the past measured data.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3. 2
Recall from the display selection menu (see this section).
Display from the alarm summary (see section 4.6).
Display from the message summary (see section 4.7).
Display from the memory summary (see section 4.8).
Show the measured data stored on an external storage medium (see section 6.8).
3
Procedure
• Showing the Display
Carry out the procedure below while memory sampling is in progress. 4
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.

Switching Operation Screens

2. Press the arrow keys to select TREND HISTORY, and press DISP/ENTER.
The display appears. 5
• Changing the Displayed Contents
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu. 6
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.
Historical trend display sub menu

7
Group name: Displays the group
ALL CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of all channels
GROUP CHANNEL: Displays the waveforms of the
channels registered to groups 8
AUTO ZONE ON: Displays trend waveforms separately by
assigning each channel in the group to
separate display areas (zones)
AUTO ZONE OFF: Does not display waveforms in zones
SCALE ON: Displays the scale 9
SCALE OFF: Clears the scale
FINE GRID ON: Displays the fine grid
FINE GRID OFF: Clears the fine grid
TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into the typical
tag display space, the alarm and 10
measured values are covered so that the
tag can be displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display.
MESSAGE DISP2: Displays the messages using display
method 2 11
MESSAGE DISP1: Displays the messages using display
method 1
CURSOR VALUE: With display data, shows the maximum
data value at the cursor position. With
event data, shows the data at the cursor 12
position.
DIGITAL MAX/MIN: Displays the maximum and minimum
values at the cursor position and the
maximum and minimum values within
the displayed data in the digital value App
display area
CURSOR TIME ON: Shows the time at the cursor position in
the top right of the display
CURSOR TIME OFF: Displays the date/time of the data at the
right edge of the screen Index
RELATIVE TIME: Displays the time that has elapsed since
memory start
ABSOLUTE TIME: Displays the time when data was
recorded

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-9
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

Historical trend display sub menu

Switches to the specified display

Returns to the display that was shown before the historical trend

Displays the alarm summary in the loaded data file

Displays the message summary contained in the loaded data file
Displays information about the loaded data file

Displays the trend waveform and scale markers of the selected

channel in front of all the others. (List items like “ABC-1” are
tags.)

Adjusts the display span of the selected channel.

Select OFF to return to the original span. (List items like
“ABC-1” are tags.)

Expands or reduces the time axis

4-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

Sub menu when the alarm summary is being displayed 1

2
INFORMATION: Shows information about the measured
data that is currently displayed

For an explanation of the other menu items, see section 4.6.

3

Sub menu when the message summary is being displayed
4

Switching Operation Screens

INFORMATION: Shows information about the measured
5
data that is currently displayed

For an explanation of the other menu items, see section 4.7.

6
4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.
7

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-11
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• Moving the Cursor and Scrolling the Waveform
Cursor value mark

Cursor

Moves the cursor up by 1 dot.

Hold down an arrow key to move
the cursor by 1 division at a time.
Moves the cursor down by 1 dot.
Use the left and right arrow keys on the horizontal trend display.
• Displaying the Continuing Data
Approximately one screen of data is shown on the historical trend display. The
continuing data can be shown as follows:
Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and
continue to press the arrow key to shift a half a
page and display the continuing data (release
Displayed
number 3 or later).

Move the cursor to the end of the waveform and

continue to press the arrow key to shift a half a
page and display the continuing data (release
number 3 or later).
Use the left and right arrow keys on the horizontal trend display.

• Specifying the Display Range

Specify the display range. Items inside the parentheses are for the horizontal trend
display.
* When you clear the scale (see page 4-9), the screen switching icons appear in its place.

1. Press the right (up) arrow key.

The waveform of the entire data range is displayed at the right (top) section of the screen.

Displayed highlighted.
These icons are not displayed if the scale
is displayed.
Frame indicating the display range

All data display
(all of the data in the display memory)
Loads as much of the continuous data as
the display memory can hold and shows
the data when switching to the all data
display (Release number 2 or later).

2. Press the up and down (left and right) arrow keys to set the display position
by moving the frame that indicates the display range. If you hold down one of the
arrow keys, the frame that indicates the display range will move continuously in
the direction of the arrow that you hold down.
3. Press the left (down) arrow key.
The specified range is displayed.

4-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• If the Data Does Not Fit in the All Data Display (Release Number 2 or Later) 1
Specify the range to be displayed in the all data display.
Below is the procedure to display data that is older than the data displayed currently.
Items inside the parentheses are for the horizontal trend display.
1. Press the right (up) arrow key. 2
The waveform of all the data in the display memory is displayed at the right (top) of the
screen. At the same time, the data area in the internal memory that can be loaded is
displayed. In addition, the data position of 8 MB that is displayed in the all data display is
indicated using a rectangular frame in the loadable data area.
3
All data display
(all the display data in the display memory
amounting to 8 MB)
The green arrow indicates that loadable
data exists in the arrow direction.
4
A frame indicating the 8 MB that is shown

Switching Operation Screens

in the all data display.
A frame indicating the range shown in the
screen. 5
Loadable data in the internal memory

2. Press the down (left) arrow key to move the frame indicating the display range 6
to the edge of the all data display. If you press the down (left) arrow key again,
the message “Overwrite old data?” appears.
3. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER to replace 4 MB of data in the display
memory. 7
4. Press the up/down (left/right) arrow key to move the frame indicating the
display range to specify the range you want to display.
5. Press the left (down) arrow key. 8
The specified range is displayed.

• D
 ividing the Screen into Halves and Displaying the Current Trend and
Historical Trend Simultaneously 9
This operation is possible only when the historical trend of the display data is being
displayed. Items inside the parentheses are for the horizontal trend display.
* This operation is not possible when the scale is displayed.
10
Press the left (down) arrow key.
The current trend is displayed in the top half (right half), and the historical trend is
displayed in the bottom half (left halfji) of the screen.
11

Current trend
12

Historical trend

App

To revert to the original screen, press the right (up) arrow key.

Index
• Writing Add Messages
For the operating procedure, see section 5.4.

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-13
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• D
 isplaying Measured Data from the Specified Date and Time (Release
number 3 or later)
You can search for measured data from the specified date and time and display the
results. You can search the display data or event data in the DX internal memory.
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Select DATA SEARCH using the arrow keys, and then press DISP/ENTER.
A calendar appears for the month of the data at the cursor position.

3. Use the arrow keys and the soft keys to change the date, and then press DISP/
ENTER.
If there is display data and event data at that date, a data type selection window appears.

Red square: Indicates the selected day

Use the up, down, left, and right arrow keys
to move the red square and select a day.

D: Indicates that there is display data
E: Indicates that there is event data

Changes the displayed year

Changes the displayed month

Searchable Range
You can search for data between the year 2000 and the year 2079.
Appearance of “D” and “E”
“D” appears when there is display data for the specified day and the DX is
configured to record display data (see section 6.1 for details).
“E” appears when there is event data for the specified day and the DX is
configured to record event data (see section 6.1 for details).

4-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

4. Select Display or Event, and press DISP/ENTER. 1

A search time input window appears.

5. Enter the time you want to search for, and press DISP/ENTER. 4
If there is data for the time that you specify, the data appears in the historical trend display.

Switching Operation Screens

5

Display Example
7

Display Conditions 10
• The cursor is located at the time that you specify for the search.
• All other display conditions are the same as those of the display before the search.
• If there is no data at the date and time that you specify, data from a later time in the
11
same day is displayed. If there is no such data, an error message appears.
• If the display group that was being displayed before the search does not exist in the
data that you have specified, the display group in the data with the lowest number
is displayed. 12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-15
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• You can configure the calendar so that weeks start with Sunday or Monday.
Procedure
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to
basic setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Time Settings > Calendar display
> 1st weekday.

You can set the first weekday (the day that appears on the far left side of the
calendar) to SUN (Sunday) or MON (Monday).

• Signature (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)

See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

4-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

Explanation 1
• ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL
In the group display, the waveforms of the channels that are registered to the group
are displayed. In the all channel display, the waveforms of all channels that have
been set to be recorded are displayed on the current group display. The waveforms
2
of channels that are not registered to the group are displayed, without any additional
information, in the waveform display area.
3

The waveforms of all 4

channels are displayed.

Switching Operation Screens

5

• AUTO ZONE
Displays trend waveforms separately by assigning display areas (zones) to the set 6
channels.
With AUTO ZONE OFF With AUTO ZONE ON

Waveform display area is

divided evenly. 8

9
• SCALE ON/OFF
Select whether to display the scale. The current value mark of the scale indicates the
value at the cursor position. 10
With SCALE ON With SCALE OFF

11
Time axis Screen switching icons
Scale

Cursor position mark

Time axis expansion/reduction rate
12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-17
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

● FINE GRID
With FINE GRID OFF With FINE GRID ON

Fine grid

• TAG DETAIL
When TAG DETAIL is set to ON and a tag does not fit into the typical tag display
space, it covers the alarm and measured values so that it can be displayed completely.
If the tag comment and number do not fit within a display area, they can be scrolled.
The TAG DETAIL setting made in one display affects the settings in all of the other
displays.
The figure below shows an example for when six channels are being displayed.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed
If TAG DETAIL is on, the tag comment is displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON

Tag comment Tag comment

When the Tag Number Is Displayed

When TAG DETAIL is set to off, display priority is given to the tag number. If TAG
DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON

Tag no.
Tag no.
Tag comment

4-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• MESSAGE DISP 1, MESSAGE DISP 2 1

Switch between message displays.

• CURSOR VALUE/DIGITAL MAX/MIN

Switch between numeric displays. 2
With DIGITAL MAX/MIN With CURSOR VALUE

3
The maximum and minimum measured Display data: Shows the maximum value at
values at the cursor position the cursor position
Event data: Shows the measured value at the
cursor position
The maximum and minimum waveform
values in the current display 4

Switching Operation Screens

5
• CURSOR TIME
With CURSOR TIME ON

The time at the

cursor position 7

8
• ABSOLUTE TIME/RELATIVE TIME
With ABSOLUTE TIME With RELATIVE TIME
9

The time when the data
The time that has elapsed •
10
was recorded since memory start

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-19
4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• TOP CHANNEL (Release number 3 or later)

The following example is for when the top channel is set to channel 3. The displayed
scale marker and grid are those of the channel selected as the top channel.
If you switch from the trend history display to another display, the top channel setting
is cleared. Channels other than the top channel are displayed in their assigned order
within their group. (The order set by pressing MENU and then selecting the MENU tab
> Group set, Trip line).

Channel 3

• AUTO SPAN (Release number 3 or later)

Before AUTO SPAN Using AUTO SPAN for channel ABC-1

Channel ABC-1 Channel ABC-1

• TIME AXIS > ZOOM+ and ZOOM-

The time axis can be expanded or reduced around the cursor position.
• Display data: 2 times the trend display to 1/60 minimum
• Event data: Reduction only, up to 1/60 minimum
The minimum magnification and the factor by which the display can be expanded
or reduced with one operation vary depending on the trend interval for the display
data and on the sampling interval for the event data. To expand or reduce further,
repeat the procedure.
With TIME AXIS ZOOM+ With TIME AXIS ZOOM-

4-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.3 Displaying Past Measured Data (Historical Trend Display)

• INFORMATION (Information on the Displayed Measured Data) 1

The following information is displayed.

Page switch mark

Use the left and right arrow keys to switch
the page. 2

4
Display Description
File name Data in the internal memory is displayed as “Memory.” For a file on

Switching Operation Screens

the external storage medium, the file name is displayed.
File type Display corresponds to display data, and Event corresponds to
event data.
5
Serial number The serial number of the DX that was used.
Batch number, Lot number Displayed when the file is created using the batch function.
Start time, End time The start time and end time of recording. 6
User name Name of the user who performed the operation. Displayed when the
login function or /AS1 advanced security option was used.
Comment A comment (when the batch function is in use).
Text field A text field (when the batch function is in use). 7
Signature Signature data (when the /AS1 advanced security option is in use).

Note
When measured data on the external storage medium is displayed, the serial number 8
corresponds to that of the DX that was used to save the data.

• Background Color of the Historical Trend 9

You can change the background color of the historical trend.
For the procedure to change the background color of the historical trend, see section
5.13.
10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-21
 4.4 Display the Statuses of All Channels on One
Screen (Overview Display)
This section explains how to use the overview display.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Procedure
• Showing the Display
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the arrow keys to select OVERVIEW, and press DISP/ENTER.
The display appears.

• Changing the Displayed Contents

1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.
Overview display sub menu

TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into the
typical tag display space, the
alarm and measured values are
covered so that the tag can be
displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display.
(Appears when Tag Number is set to Use. See section 5.2 for details.)
CURSOR OFF: Clears the cursor
CURSOR ON: Displays the cursor
JUMP TO ALM SUM: Switches to the alarm summary
JUMP TO TREND: Switches to the trend display of
the smallest group number that
includes the channel selected
with the cursor.
JUMP TO DIGITAL: Switches to the digital display of
the smallest group number that
includes the channel selected
with the cursor.
JUMP TO BAR: Switches to the bar graph display
of the smallest group number that
includes the channel selected
with the cursor.
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.17)

4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.

To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.

• S
 howing the Trend, Digital, Bar Graph Display Containing the Specified
Channel
1. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor, and select a channel.

Cursor (white Frame)

2. Switch to the trend, digital, or bar graph display according to the procedure
described in “Changing the Displayed Contents.”

4-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.4 Display the Statuses of All Channels on One Screen (Overview Display)

• Individual Alarm ACK Operation (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced 1
security option)
You can perform alarm ACK on individual alarms. This operation is referred to as
“individual alarm ACK.” Individual alarm ACK can be performed when the settings are
configured in the exact manner described below. 2
• Basic setting > Indicator is set to Hold.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.5.
• Relay > Relay Action on Ack is set to Reset.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.5 in the DX2000 User’s Manual.
3
• Annunciator Mode is set to Off.
For the setting procedure, see section 3.12 in the DX2000 User’s Manual.

1. Use the arrow keys to move the cursor to a channel with active alarms.
4
2. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.

Switching Operation Screens

3. Press the right arrow key to display the submenu.
4. Use the arrow keys to select an alarm, and press DISP/ENTER.
5
The alarm output is released.

Select a channel with 6

active alarms.

Select the alarm that you

want to acknowledge. 8

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-23
4.4 Display the Statuses of All Channels on One Screen (Overview Display)

• TAG DETAIL
The same as the TAG DETAIL setting in other displays.
The following example is for the DX1012 OVERVIEW display.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed (the TAG DETAIL does not appear)
Tag comments are displayed.

Tag comment

When the Tag Number Is Displayed

When TAG DETAIL is set to off, display priority is given to the tag number. If TAG
DETAIL is on, the tag number and comment are displayed as much as possible.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON

Tag no.

Tag no.
Tag comment

4-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.5 Displaying Various Information 1

This section explains how to display reports (/M1 and /PM1 options) and how to use the
status display. 2
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Procedure
• Showing the Display 3
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to select INFORMATION.
3. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu. 4
4. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.

Switching Operation Screens

To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.
Information display submenu
5

ALARM SUMMARY: Displays an alarm summary

See section 4.6. 6
MESSAGE SUMMARY: Displays a message summary
See section 4.7.
MEMORY SUMMARY: Displays a memory summary

See section 4.8. 7
MODBUS CLIENT: Displays the Modbus
client status
MODBUS MASTER: Displays the Modbus master
status
RELAY: Displays the relay status 8
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.17.)
REPORT DATA: Displays report data
COLUMN BAR: Displays report data using
stacked bar graphs 9
EVENT SWITCH: Displays the status of the
event level switches.

5. Press DISP/ENTER.
The display appears.
10
• Displaying the Report
• Switching the Displayed Report Data
The Index item on the report display shows “the number of the report data being 11
displayed/the number of report data saved in the internal memory.” The largest
report data number corresponds to the most recent report data.
Number of the report data being displayed
Number of report data saved to the internal memory
12

Start: Start date/time App

(Date/time of memory start)
Timeup: Report date/time

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-25
4.5 Displaying Various Information

Carry out the procedure below to switch the displayed report data.
Up arrow key: Report data being displayed + 1.
Down arrow key: Report data being displayed – 1.
Left arrow key: Report data being displayed + 10.
Right arrow key: Report data being displayed – 10.
Note
The display is not updated even if a new report is created while displaying the report data.
Perform either of the operations below to display the most recent report data.
• Hold down the left arrow key until the latest report data is displayed.
• Press DISP/ENTER and display the report data again from the display selection menu.

• Switching the Report Channels

Up to 12 report channels can be shown on one screen. If there are more than 12
report channels, you can switch the displayed report channels.
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select CHANGE REPORT CH.
4. Press DISP/ENTER.
The displayed report channels are switched.

• Relay Status Display

Lists the statuses of the alarm output relays and internal switches. You cannot change
the settings on this display.

Red: ON
Green: OFF

• Modbus Status Display

Lists the statuses of the Modbus client or Modbus master commands.
For the operating procedure, see the Communication Interface User’s Manual,
IM04L41B01-17E.

Communication conditions

Communication destination
DX channels
Status
Command

4-26 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.5 Displaying Various Information

• Event Level Switch Status Display (Release number 3 or later) 1

Displays the status of the event level switches. You cannot perform operations in this
display.

4
Red: On

Switching Operation Screens

Green: Off

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-27
 4.6 Using the Alarm Summary
This section explains how to use the alarm summary.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Procedure
• Changing the Displayed Contents
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.

Sort symbol Ascending sort

Descending sort
TAG DETAIL ON: When a tag does not fit into the
typical tag display space, the
alarm and measured values are
covered so that the tag can be
displayed completely.
TAG DETAIL OFF: Priority is not given to tag display.
Display name: Switches to the specified display

TO HISTORY (DISP): Switches to the display data
historical trend display
TO HISTORY (EV): Switches to the event data
historical trend display
TO OVERVIEW: Switches to the overview display
CHANGE SORT KEY: Sorts alarm information by
channel or alarm time
ASCENDING ORDER: Sorts in ascending order
DESCENDING ORDER: Sorts in descending order

4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.

To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.

• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Alarms

Scrolls the alarm information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up

Scrolls the alarm information down by half a page

Moves the cursor down

• R
 ecalling the Historical Trend Display at the Point When the Alarm
Occurred
1. Select an alarm with the cursor.
2. Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in “Changing the
Displayed Contents.”

Explanation
• CHANGE SORT KEY, ASCENDING ORDER, and DESCENDING ORDER
The alarms are sorted in ascending or descending order by the following keys. The
sort symbol is displayed next the sort item (see the figure above).
• Channel number: Sorts the alarms by channel number even if tags are being
used. Alarms in a channel are sorted by the alarm level number.
• Time of alarm occurrence/release

4-28 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.6 Using the Alarm Summary

• TAG DETAIL 1
The same as the TAG DETAIL setting in other displays.
When the Tag Number Is Not Displayed
When TAG DETAIL is on, tag comments are displayed in their entirety.
With TAG DETAIL OFF With TAG DETAIL ON 2

3
Tag comment Tag comment

Switching Operation Screens

When the Tag Number Is Displayed 5
Tag numbers and comments are displayed.

Tag comment

Tag no. 7

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-29
 4.7 Using the Message Summary
This section explains how to use the message summary.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.

Procedure
• Changing the Displayed Contents
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.

Sort symbol
Ascending sort
Descending sort

Display name: Switches to the specified display

TO HISTORY (DISP): Switches to the display data
historical trend display
TO HISTORY (EV): Switches to the event data
historical trend display
DISP GROUP OFF: Displays the second of the time
when the messages were written
DISP GROUP ON: Displays the groups to which
the messages were written
CHANGE SORT KEY: Sorts messages by message
number, time, group, or user
name
ASCENDING ORDER: Sorts in ascending order
DESCENDING ORDER: Sorts in descending order
CHANGE DISP ITEM: Switches between displaying
message times and groups
and displaying the message
user names

4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.

To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.

• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Messages

Scrolls the messages up by half a page
Moves the cursor up

Scrolls the messages down by half a page

Moves the cursor down

• R
 ecalling the Historical Trend Display at the Point When the Message
Was Written
1. Select a message with the cursor.
2. Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in “Changing the
Displayed Contents.”

4-30 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.7 Using the Message Summary

Explanation 1
• CHANGE DISP ITEM
Switches between the following two message display methods.
• Message, time, and group, or the second of the date and time when the message
2
was written
• Message, user name

• CHANGE SORT KEY, ASCENDING ORDER, and DESCENDING ORDER 3

The messages are sorted in ascending or descending order by the respective key.
The sort symbol is displayed next the sort item (see the figure above).

• DISP GROUP OFF/ON 4

You can select what is displayed on the right of the screen: the groups that the

Switching Operation Screens

messages were written to or the second of the time when the messages were written.

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-31
 4.8 Using the Memory Summary
This section explains how to use the memory summary.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Procedure
• Changing the Displayed Contents
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.

The displayed data type is

indicated with a green mark.

Display name: Switches to the specified

display
TO HISTORY: Switches to the historical
trend display

DATA SAVE MODE: Switches to data save mode

SELECT SAVE: Saves the selected file

M.SAMPLE SAVE: Saves all manually sampled data

REPORT SAVE: Saves all report data
(Not displayed with the default settings. To display, see section 5.17.)
ALL SAVE: Saves all data
CHANGE DATA KIND: Switches between display
data and event data

FILENAME DISPLAY: Displays the file name

For information about file names, see section 1.4.
TIME DISPLAY: Displays the times of the first
and last items of data in the file

4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the displayed contents.

To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.

• Moving the Cursor ( ) and Scrolling the Memory Information

Scrolls the memory information up by half a page
Moves the cursor up

Scrolls the memory information down by half a page

Moves the cursor down

• D
 isplaying the Historical Trend for the Data Specified by Memory
Summary
1. Select the data with the cursor.
2. Display the historical trend according to the procedure described in “Changing the
Displayed Contents.”

4-32 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.8 Using the Memory Summary

• Saving the Data 1

Save the data in the internal memory to the CF card or the USB flash memory (/USB1
option).
For a description of the function, see section 1.4.
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu. 2
2. Press the right arrow key to display the submenu.
3. Select DATA SAVE MODE with the up and down arrow keys.
4. Press DISP/ENTER. 3
The display switches to DATA SAVE MODE.
5. To save a specified file, select it with the cursor. This operation is not necessary in
other cases. 4

Switching Operation Screens

5

Cursor
(move with the arrow keys) 6

6. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.

7

7. Use the up and down arrow keys to select SELECT SAVE, ALL SAVE, M.
SAMPLE SAVE, or REPORT SAVE.
10
8. Press DISP/ENTER.
* If you are using a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option), the message “Which
media do you want save to?” appears. Select the destination medium using the arrow keys, 11
and press DISP/ENTER.
The measured data is saved.

Note
To abort the data saving operation in progress, carry out the procedure below. 12
Press FUNC and press the Save Stop soft key.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-33
4.8 Using the Memory Summary
Progress Display When Saving All Data of the Internal Memory (Release Number
2 or Later)
If you carry out All Save* on the memory summary screen, a pop-up window appears
showing the progress of the save operation.
* Function for saving all data in the internal memory to a CF card or USB flash memory.

Note
• The pop-up window appears only when the memory summary display is showing.
• If you press the ESC key, the pop-up window clears temporarily and reappears
approximately 10 seconds later.
• The time estimate for saving all data is indicated in the table below (when the memory is full
of data). It may take longer depending on the operating conditions of the DX.
Save Destination Time to Save All Data (Estimate)
CF Card USB Flash Memory
Standard memory (internal memory size suffix code -3) 20 minutes 40 minutes

• To abort the data saving operation in progress, carry out the procedure below.
Press FUNC and press the Save Stop soft key.

• Displaying File Information (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced

security option)
See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

Explanation
• Save directory
• The data is saved by creating a directory each time the save operation is carried
out.
Directory name: Specified string_YYMMDD_HHMMSS (where YY to SS is the date
of operation)
File list example

Save directory

• Display data or event data that is in the process of adding data cannot be saved.
• The save operation explained here merely copies the data in the internal memory.
It does not save the unsaved data in the internal memory (see section 1.4).
• Data saving is aborted when there is insufficient free space on the storage medium.
Use a storage medium with sufficient free space when saving data.

4-34 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs 1

Displays the following operation logs.

*1
Login log , error log, communication log, FTP log, Web log, e-mail log, SNTP log, DHCP 2
*2 *2
log, Modbus status log, operation log , and change settings log
*1 Only on DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
*2 Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

Procedure
3
• Displaying the Log
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the up and down arrow keys to select LOG.
4
* To show LOG on the menu, see section 5.17.

Switching Operation Screens

3. Press the right arrow key to display the sub menu.
5
4. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.
To close the menu without changing the displayed contents, press the ESC key.
Sub menu items are LOGIN, ERROR, COMMUNICATION, FTP, MAIL, WEB, SNTP,
DHCP, and MODBUS.
6
5. Press DISP/ENTER.
The display appears.

Explanation 7
• Login Log
This log is only for DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option. DXs with the /AS1
advanced security option use the operation log.
8
The log number of the last line and the
total number of logs

9

User name
10
Operation method (see the table below)
Operation (see the table below)
Date/time
11
Action Description
Login Login
Logout
NewTime
Logout
Time change while memory is stopped
12
TimeChg Time change through key operation
PowerOff Power OFF (power failure occurred)
PowerOn Power ON (recovered from a power failure)
TrevStart Start the operation of gradually adjusting the time App
TRevEnd End the operation of gradually adjusting the time
TimeDST Switch the daylight savings time
SNTPtimset Time change by SNTP
TimeDST Switch to or out of daylight saving time Index
CCSetEnd Completion of calibration correction
CCExpire Passing of the calibration due date without calibration having been completed

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-35
4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs

Factor Description
KEY Key operation
COM Operations via communication
REM Operation through the remote control function
ACT Operation through event action
SYS Operation by the system

• Error Log

Error message*
Error code*
Date/time
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”

• Communication Log

Message*
Input/output symbol (>: input, <: output)
User ID number (0: serial, 1 to 3: Ethernet)
Date/time
* See the Communication Interface User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-17E.

• FTP Log

File Name
FTP connection destination
(P: primary, S: secondary)
Error message (detail code)*
Date/time
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”

4-36 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs

• Web Log 1

Operation (see the table on the next page)

Error code* 3
Requested operation (see the table below)
Date/time
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”
4
Request Description

Switching Operation Screens

Screen Screen switch
Key Key operation
Message Message assignment/write 5
Batch Screen Multi batch function (/BT2 option) screen change

Parameter Description
TREND
DIGIT
Trend display
Digital display
6
BAR Bar graph display
HIST Historical trend display
OV Overview display
DISP DISP/ENTER key 7
UP Up arrow key
DOWN Down arrow key
LEFT Left arrow key
RIGHT Right arrow key 8
FAVOR Favorite key
Messages Character strings that have been written
Data Ref Searches for data from a specific date and time and displays the data in
the historical trend display.
9
• E-mail Log

10

Recipient (mail address, message) 11
Recipient (1: recipient 1, 2: recipient 2)
Error code*
Event (see the table below)
Date/time 12
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”
Type Description
Alarm Alarm mail
Time Scheduled mail App
Report Report timeout mail
Fail Power failure recovery mail
Full Memory full mail
Test Test mail
Error Error message mail Index
User locked Invalid user mail (only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option)

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-37
4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs

• SNTP Log

Error message (detail code)*

Error code*
Date/time
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”

• DHCP Log

Error message (detail code)*

Error code*
Date/time
* See section 10.1, “A List of Messages.”

• Modbus Status Log

Command number, command type
(R: read, W: write)
Communication status*
Communication type (C: client, M: master)
Date/time
* See the Communication Interface User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-17E.

4-38 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.9 Displaying a List of Operation Logs

• Operation Log (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option) 1

Cursor (blue arrow)

Move the cursor with the arrow keys. 2

Operation type* 3
User name
Operation*
Date and time
To switch displays, in the display 4
selection menu, select LOG >
CHANGE DISP ITEM, and press

Switching Operation Screens

Detailed display DISP/ENTER.

6
Additional information display
When you move the cursor to an item that has
additional information, the Add.info. soft key
appears at the bottom of the screen. Press the 7
soft key to display the additional information.
The additional information is displayed using
the command syntax.
See the Communication Manual, IM04L41B01-
17E.
8
Press ESC to close the additional information
display.
9
* See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.

• Change Settings Log (Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security
option) 10

11

Operation type (see the table below)
12
User name
Saved setup file name
Date and time

App
Operation type Description
K Key operations
C Communication operations

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-39
 4.10 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1
options; release number 3 or later)
This section explains how to use stacked bar graphs.

Procedure
• Changing the Displayed Contents
1. Press DISP/ENTER to show the display selection menu.
2. Press the right arrow key to display the submenu.
3. Press the up and down arrow keys to select the sub menu item.

Display name: Switches to the specified display

SINGLE GRAPH: Displays a single graph

DUAL GRAPH: Displays two graphs
SELECT GROUP: Use the arrow keys to switch
between displayed report groups.
SELECT COLUMN: Use the arrow keys to select a bar
graph.
REPORT GROUP 1 through 6*: Select the report
group that you want
to display.
* Varies according to the model. For information about
report groups, see section 9.5.

4. Press DISP/ENTER to change the display setting.

To close the menu without changing the display contents, press ESC.

• Changing Groups, Selecting Bar Graphs, and Moving the Cursor

The amount of data that the up and down arrow keys scroll through depends on the
type of report data. For example, with an “H+D” report, you can use the arrows to
scroll through the data one day at a time.

SELECT GROUP: Switches to the display for the report group with
the next smallest number
SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor to the left
Switches to the previous day, week, or month's data

SELECT GROUP: Switches to the display for the report group with
the next highest number
SELECT COLUMN: Moves the bar graph selection cursor to the right
Switches to the next day, week, or month's data

4-40 IM 04L41B01-01E
 4.10 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later)

Explanation 1
• SINGLE GRAPH/DUAL GRAPH
You can display one or two bar graphs. The sums of the first channel in a group and of
all other channels that have the same unit as it are displayed.
2
• SINGLE GRAPH

Numeric display section

3

Switching Operation Screens

Display area 1 Display area 2
5
The displayed report data varies depending on the report kind, which is set using
the report function.

Report kind Display Area 1 Display Area 2 6

Hour, H+D Sums for each hour Sums for the day
Day+Week Sums for each day Sums for the week
Day, D+M Sums for each day Sums for the month

• DUAL GRAPH 7
Shows the data from two consecutive periods at the top and bottom of the display.

Channel number or tag

Numbers are abbreviated.
8

Display area 4
Display area 3 9
Display area 2

Display area 1
10
The displayed report data varies depending on the report kind, which is set using
the report function. Display areas 1 and 2 contain the same report data listed above
for SINGLE GRAPH display. 11
Report kind Display Area 1 Display Area 2 Display Area 3 Display Area 4
Hour, H+D Sums for each Sums for the day Sums for each Sums for the day
hour hour
(The data of the day before the data
12
in display areas 1 and 2)
Day+Week Sums for each Sums for the Sums for each Sums for the
day week day week
(The data of the week before the App
data in display areas 1 and 2)
Day, D+M Sums for each Sums for the Sums for each Sums for the
day month day month
(The data of the month before the Index
data in display areas 1 and 2)

IM 04L41B01-01E 4-41
4.10 Displaying Stacked Bar Graphs (/M1 and /PM1 options; release number 3 or later)

Note
The numbers on the vertical axis of display areas 3 and 4 and the dates on the horizontal
axis are abbreviated.
Display areas 3 and 4 can only display the data from the period immediately preceding that
of display area 1 and 2.

• Selecting a Bar
When SINGLE GRAPH is selected, you can move the cursor to a bar that you want to
check, and view the sums of each channel.

The sums of each channel and the sums of

all channels of the report group at the cursor
position

Cursor

• Power Failure and Time Adjustment Indications

Indicates a power failure

A "C" appears if more than one
report has been filed for the
same time period.

• Power failure
A “P” indicates when a power failure occurred and a report was supposed to be
filed. A “P” also indicates when the DX recovered from a power failure and the next
report was filed.
• Time adjustment
When a time adjustment causes a report to be filed twice because the time was
moved back, the time adjustment is marked with a “C,” and the bar graph of the
report that was filed first is used.
If the data for a period does not exist because of a power failure or time adjustment, a
bar graph for the period will not be displayed.

4-42 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 5 Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

5.1 Setting Display Groups 1

Assign channels and set the group name for each display group. Set lines at specified
positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display. 2
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Group set, Trip
line. 3

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Setup Items 6
• Group number
Select the target group number (1 to 10).

• Group 7
• On/Off
Turn On the groups you want to use.
• Group name
Set the group name. (up to 16 characters, Aa#1 )
8
• CH set
Set up to six channels from measurement channels and computation channels
(/M1 and /PM1 options).
9
• Enter the channel number using two or three digits.
• Separate each channel with a period.
• To specify a range of consecutive channels numbers, use a hyphen.
Example: To assign channels 1 and 5 to 8, enter “001.005-008.” 10
Note
• The trend, digital, and bar graph displays are shown in the specified order.
• A channel can be assigned to multiple groups.
• The same channel cannot be assigned multiple times in a group.
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-1
5.1 Setting Display Groups

Note
The channel settings of a display group can be copied to another group on a DX with release
number 2 or later.

Procedure
1. Select the copy source channel settings.
2. Press the Copy soft key.
3. Select the copy destination channel settings.
4. Press the Paste soft key. The channel settings are copied.

• Trip line
Set lines at specified positions in the waveform display range on the Trend display.
• On/Off
Turn On the trip lines you want to display.
• Position
Set the position in the range of 0 to 100% of the display width.
• Color
The default colors are red, green, blue, and yellow. If you want to change the color,
select from the 24 available colors.
• Width
Set the line width of the trip line in dots (1 to 3).

5-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.2 Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers 1

Display the channels using tags or channel numbers. On DX release numbers 3 and
later, tags have tag numbers and tag comments. The tag number is a fixed number that 2
corresponds to the measurement source. The tag comment can be used to list details
about the channel. You can choose whether or not to use tag numbers.
Setup Screen 3
• Tag/Channel
Press MENU (switch to the setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (switch to the
basic setting mode), and select Environment > Operating Environment.
4

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6

• Tag Number Use/Not (Release number 3 or later)

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Input, Alarm.
7

• Tag 10
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Tag, Memory, Delay.

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-3
5.2 Displaying Tags or Channel Numbers

Setup Items
• Operating environment > Tag/Channel
This setting applies to all channels.
Setting Description
Tag Displays tag numbers and comments.
• If an allotted display space is not large enough to display a tag number and a tag
comment, priority is given to the tag number.
• Depending on display space limitations, it may not be possible to display the
entire tag.
• If a channel is not configured to display tag numbers or comments, the channel
number is displayed.
Channel Displays channel numbers.
* Tag numbers are available for release numbers 3 and later.

• Tag Basic settings > Tag No. Use/Not (Release number 3 or later)
To display tag numbers, select “Use.” This setting applies to all channels.

• First-CH, Last-CH
Set the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that are
displayed on the screen.

• Tag > Comment

Sets the tag comment. On a DX with a release number of 3 or later, you can enter up
to 32 characters. On a DX with a release number of 2 or earlier, you can enter up to
16 characters. The characters that can be entered are: A a # 1 .

• Tag > No. (Release number 3 or later)

This setting only appears when you have enabled the use of tag numbers.
Sets the tag number. (Up to 16 characters: A a # 1 )

• Items Displayed for Different Tag and Channel Settings

Text is displayed depending on the tag and channel settings as shown in the figure
below.
*1
Operating Tag Basic Tag Displayed Text
Environment Settings
Tag/Channel Tag No. Tag No. Tag Channel Tag Tag
Use/Not Comment Number Number Comment
Tag Use Input Input No Yes Yes
Not input No Yes No
*2
Not input Input Yes No Yes
Not input Yes No No
Not — Input No No Yes
Not input Yes No No
Channel Use — — Yes No No
Not — — Yes No No
“Yes” means that the item is
displayed
“No” means that the item is not
displayed
*1 “Input” means that characters are input.
“Not input” means that no characters are input.
“—“ means that the setting does not affect the display.
*2 Channel numbers are displayed instead of tag numbers.

5-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.3 Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the 1
Secondary Trend Interval
Set the trend interval. Switch the trend interval to the secondary trend interval while the
memory sampling is in progress. Automatically write messages when the trend interval is 2
switched.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Setup Screen 3
• S
 witching the Trend Interval and Writing Messages (When Using the
Secondary Trend Interval)
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > View, Message. 4

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6

• Trend interval [/div] and Secondary interval [/div]

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend/

7
Save interval.

10
Setup Items
• View > Trend rate switching
On: Enables the function that switches the trend interval while the memory sampling 11
is in progress. The “Second interval [/div]” item is displayed in the setting mode.
* When the trend rate switching function is On, the DX cannot be configured to record both the
display and event data (see section 6.1).
12
• Message > Change message
On: Writes the time the interval is switched and the new trend interval as a message
when the trend interval is switched.
On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, a message is written even when the App
setting mode setup items are changed during memory sampling.
Item Message
Alarm setting change AlarmSet
Alarm delay time change AlmDlaySet Index
Calibration change Calibration correction Setting

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-5
5.3 Setting the Trend Interval and Switching to the Secondary Trend Interval

• Trend interval [/div] and Second interval [/div]

Select the time corresponding to 1 division of the time axis on the trend display from
below: You cannot specify a trend interval that is faster than the scan interval.
*1 *1 *2
5s , 10s , 15s , 30s, 1min, 2min, 5min, 10min, 15min, 20min, 30min, 1h, 2h, 4h, and
10h
*1 Selectable on the DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N, and DX1004N (release number 3 or later).
*2 Selectable on the DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N when the scan interval is set
to fast sampling mode (release number 3 or later).

Note
If the trend interval is set greater than or equal to 1h/div on a DX with release number 2 or later,
the month, day, and hour at the grid position are displayed on the screen. The display format
can be changed by setting the date format.

Month, day, and hour at the grid position.

Procedure
• Switching the Trend Interval
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Normal speed soft key or Second speed soft key.
The trend interval is switched. A message is written on the trend display (when the change
message is turned ON).
Display example: 10:53 1min/div

• C
 hanging the Trend Display Time Axis While Recording (Memory
sampling) Is in Progress (Release number 3 or later)
On a DX whose release number is 3 or later, you can change the secondary trend
interval even while recording (memory sampling) is in progress. If you are using the
secondary trend interval to display waveforms and you change it, the time axis will
change immediately afterwards.

Note
Only the displayed time axis changes when you switch to the secondary trend interval. The
data sampling interval does not change.

5-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.4 Writing Messages 1

Write messages.
Setup Screen 2
• Message Write Group
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > View, Message. 3

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

• Setting the Messages
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message. 6

Setup Items 9
• Message
• Write group
This setting applies only for messages that are written using keys. 10
Settings Description
Common Write the message to all groups.
Separate Write the message to the displayed group.
11
If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 Multi
Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

12
• Power-fail message
See section 5.16.
• Change message
See section 5.3. App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-7
5.4 Writing Messages

• Message No.
Select the message number (1 to 100). Messages 1 to 10 are common with free
messages.* If a message is changed as a free message, the old message is
overwritten.
* Messages that are written by creating the message on the spot.
• Message > Characters
Set the message. (up to 32 characters, Aa#1 )

Procedure
• Writing Messages
Messages cannot be written when the memory sampling is stopped.
1. Display the group to write the message.
• If a screen unrelated to a group such as the overview is displayed, messages
are written to all groups even when Write group is set to Separate.
• Messages are written to all groups regardless of the displayed screen when
Write group is set to Common.
2. Press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

3. Press the Message soft key.

4. Press the soft key corresponding to the desired message number range (example:
[1-10]).
A list of message is displayed.

5. Press the soft key corresponding to the number of the message you want to
write.
A message mark, time, and message are shown on the trend display.

Message

5-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.4 Writing Messages

• Writing Free Messages 1

Create a message on the spot and write it.
1. Display the group to write the message.
2. Press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.
2
3. Press the Free message soft key.
4. Press a message number soft key.
The message entry window appears. 3
5. Enter the message. (up to 32 characters, Aa#1 )

6. Select ENT and press DISP/ENTER.

A message mark, time, and message are shown on the trend display. 4

• Writing Add Messages
Add messages to the past data positions. This operation can be carried out on the
past section of the data that is currently being memory sampled.
5
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the historical trend of the data that is
currently being memory sampled.

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Press DISP/ENTER and select TREND HISTORY > (group name) > DISP/ENTER

2. Press the arrow keys to move the cursor to the position you want to write the 6
message.
3. Write the message according to the procedure given in “Writing Messages” or
“Writing Free Messages.” Use the Add Message or Add Free Message soft key. 7

Cursor 8
(yellow line)

Add message
9

Explanation 10
• Display Color of Messages
The message colors on the trend display are shown below. You cannot change them.
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Color Red Green Blue Blue violet Brown Orange Yellow-green Light blue Violet Gray
11

The colors for messages 11 to 100 are repetitions of the colors above.

• Add Message 12
• The message timestamp is the time that the message is written. It is not the time
stamp of the data at the position where the message is written.
Display example on the message
summary App

Add message (displayed in blue)

• Up to 50 messages can be written.

• Messages cannot be added to data in the internal memory that has already been
Index
saved to a file or data that has been loaded from the external storage medium.

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-9
 5.5 Changing the Channel Display Colors
Change the channel display colors. The settings are applied to the trend and bar graph
displays.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Color.

Setup Items
• Group of channel
Select the target channels.

• Color
To change the color, select from the following 24 colors.
Red, green, blue, blue violet, brown, orange, yellow-green, light blue, violet, gray, lime,
cyan, dark blue, yellow, light gray, purple, black, pink, light brown, light green, dark
gray, olive, dark cyan, and spring green

5-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.6 Displaying Channels in Display Zones 1

Specify a waveform display zone for each channel so that waveforms do not overlap.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3. 2
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Zone, Scale 3

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Setup Items 6
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that
are displayed on the screen.
7
• Zone > Lower, Zone > Upper
Sets the zone in which the waveform is displayed. You can set Lower and Upper as
a position (%) when taking the maximum display width to be 100%. Set Upper greater
than Lower, and the zone width (Upper – Lower) greater than or equal to 5%. 8
Lower: 0 to 95%
Upper: 5 to 100%

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-11
 5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display
Display a scale on the trend display.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Setup Screen
• Scale Position and Number of Scale Divisions
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Zone, Scale.

• Number of Displayed Scale Digits and Current Value Indicator
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend.

• Showing the Scales

To show scales on the trend display, press DISP/ENTER (show the display selection
menu) > the right arrow key (show the sub menu), and select SCALE ON (see
section 4.2).

Setup Items
• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that
are displayed on the screen.

• Scale > Position

Select the scale display position on the trend display from 1 to 6. Select Off if you do
not wish to display the scale.

5-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display

• Scale > Division 1

Set the number of divisions to make with the main scale marks on the trend display to
a value from 4 to 12 or C10.
C10: The scale is equally divided into 10 sections by main scale marks, and scale
values are indicated at 0, 30, 50, 70, and 100% positions on the trend display. 2
The figure below is an example in which each scale is displayed with the position
shifted.
Vertical Trend Display
3

1 Number of scale divisions: 4

2 Number of scale divisions: 5 4
3 Number of scale divisions: 6
4 Number of scale divisions: 7
5 Number of scale divisions: 8
6 Number of scale divisions: 9 5

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Scale display position
6

Number of scale divisions: 10

Number of scale divisions: 11 8
Number of scale divisions: 12
Number of scale divisions: C10

Horizontal Trend Display 9

Scale display position

6 5 4 3 2 1
10

11

12

App

Number of scale divisions: 10 Number of scale divisions: 4 Index

Number of scale divisions: 11 Number of scale divisions: 5
Number of scale divisions: 12 Number of scale divisions: 6
Number of scale divisions: C10 Number of scale divisions: 7
Number of scale divisions: 8
Number of scale divisions: 9
IM 04L41B01-01E 5-13
5.7 Displaying a Scale on the Trend Display

Note
• If the scales of multiple channels are set to the same position, the scale of the channel
assigned first to the group is displayed.
Example: If the order of assignment of a group is 003.002.001, and the scale display
position of all channels is set to 1, the scale of channel 3 is displayed at display position 1.
• Even if some of the scale display positions are skipped, the scale is packed towards display
position 1.
Example: Suppose the assignment of channels to a group is 001.002.003, and the display
positions of the scales are set to 1, 3, and 6, respectively. The scales are actually displayed
at positions 1, 2, and 3, respectively.
• The scale is divided into 4 to 12 sections by the main scale marks. The section between
the main scale marks is divided into 5 or 10 subsections by medium and small scale marks.
However, small scale marks are not displayed in the following cases.
• When the resolution of the input range is smaller than the total number of small scale marks.
• When zone display is used.
• When partial expanded display is used (numbers are displayed at the ends of the scale
and at the boundary position).
• The scale values are displayed according to the following rules.
• If the number of scale divisions is 4 to 6 for the vertical trend display, values are
displayed at all main scale marks. If the number of scale divisions is greater, the values
are displayed at every other main scale marks.
• Scale upper and lower limits are displayed at the ends of the scale.
• Scale values are displayed up to 3 digits excluding the minus sign. However, if the
integer part of values at the ends of the scale is both 1 digit or the integer part is zero, 2
digits are displayed.
Example: If the scale is –0.05 to 0.50, the lower limit is “–0.0” and the upper limit is “0.5.”
• If the integer part of either end of the scale is 2 or 3 digits, the fractional part is truncated.
Example: If the scale is 0.1 to 100.0, the lower limit is “0” and the upper limit is “100.”
• If the integer part of either end of the scale is 4 or more digits, the value is displayed
2
using a 3-digit mantissa and exponent like “×10” or “×10 ”.
Example: If the scale is 10 to 2000, the lower limit is “1” and the upper limit is “200 × 10”.
• The unit is displayed near the center of the scale. If partial expanded display is used,
the display position is offset from the center. For the vertical trend display, the number of
characters that can be displayed is up to six. For the horizontal trend display, the number of
characters that can be displayed is up to three. However, if the scale digit display is set to
Fine, up to four characters are displayed.

• Trend > Scale > Digit

Fine: For example, if the scale range is “49.0 to 50.0” and you select “Normal,” the
scale values are displayed using 2 digits (“49” for example, see Note above). If you
select “Fine,” the scale values are displayed using 3 digits as shown below.

• Trend > Scale > Value indicator

The current value is displayed as a mark or a bar graph.

Bar graph

5-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.8 Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale 1
Band on the Scale
Display alarm point marks on the scale. Display the specified range with a color band.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3. 2
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Alarm mark or Color scale band. 3
• Alarm mark • Color scale band

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6
Setup Items

Alarm point mark

Color band 7

• First-CH, Last-CH 9
Select the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that
are displayed on the screen.

• Alarm mark 10
Displays marks indicating the values of the high and low limit alarms, delay high and
low limit alarms, and difference high and low limit alarms. This setting is common with
the bar graph display.
• Alarm mark > Mark kind
11
Settings Description Mark
Alarm The alarm mark is green under normal conditions. It changes to the or
specified alarm color when an alarm occurs (release number 3 or
later; see section 3.7 for details). 12
Fixed Displays a fixed color.
• Alarm mark > Indicate on Scale
To display alarm point marks, select On.
• Alarm mark color > Alarm 1, Alarm 2, Alarm 3, and Alarm 4
App
If the Mark kind is set to Fixed, specify the color of the alarm point marks.
If one of the colors under Alarm mark color is set to Auto, its corresponding point
mark will appear in the specified alarm color (release number 3 or later; see section
Index
3.7 for details).

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-15
5.8 Displaying Alarm Point Marks and Color Scale Band on the Scale

• Color scale band

Displays a specified section of the measurement range using a color band on the
scale. This setting is common with the bar graph display.
• Color scale band > Band area
Settings Description
In Displays the area inside using the color band.
Out Displays the area outside using the color band.
Off Disables the function.

• Color scale band > Color

Set the display color.
• Color scale band > Display position > Lower, Upper
Specify the display position. Set a value within the span or scale range.
Lower: Lower limit of the area.
Upper: Upper limit of the area.

5-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.9 Partially Expanding the Waveform 1

Partially expand a waveform (reduce the other sections) on the display.

We recommend that you display the scale when viewing partially expanded channels. 2
The numbers for the ends of the scale and the boundary position are displayed, and
you can identify the expanded and reduced areas easily. However, numbers are not
displayed for other scale marks.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3. 3
Setup Screen
• Turning ON/OFF the Partial Expanded Display Function
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic 4
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > View, Message.

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6

• Partially Expanded Display Method

7
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Partial.
8

10

Setup Items
• View > Partial 11
If you select On, the Partial setup item appears in the setting mode.

• First-CH, Last-CH
Select the target channels. 12
• Partial > On/Off
To enable partial expanded display, select On.

• Partial > Expand App

Set the position where the value specified by Boundary is to be displayed within the
display span in the range of 1 to 99.

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-17
5.9 Partially Expanding the Waveform

• Partial > Boundary

Set the value that is to be the boundary between the reduced section and the
expanded section in the range of “minimum span value + 1 digit to maximum span
value – 1 digit.” For channels that are set to scaling, the selectable range is “minimum
scale value + 1 digit to maximum scale value – 1 digit.”
Example: Input range: –6 V to 6V. Expand: 30. Boundary: 0
The –6 V to 0 V range is displayed in the 0% to 30% range, and the 0 V
to 6 V range is displayed in the 30% to 100% range.

5-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.10 Changing the Display Layout, Clearing of the 1
Waveform at Start, Message Display Direction,
Waveform Line Width, and Grid
Change the display layout, clearing of the waveform at start, waveform line width, and
2
grid.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Setup Screen 3
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend.

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6
Setup Items
• Trend > Direction
Set the display direction of the trends to Horizontal, Vertical, Wide, or Split. 7
• Trend > Trend clear
Settings Description
On Clears the displayed waveform when the memory sampling is started.
8
Off Does not clear the waveform when the memory sampling is started.

• Trend > Message direction

Set the display direction of messages to Horizontal or Vertical. When the trend is set 9
to Vertical, the message direction is fixed to Horizontal.

• Trend > Trend line

Set the line width of the trend in dots (1 to 3).
10
• Trend > Grid
Select the number of grids to be displayed in the waveform display area of the trend
display.
Settings Description
11
4 to 12 Displays a grid that divides the display width into 4 to 12 sections.
Auto Displays the same number of grids as the number of scale divisions of the first
assigned channel of the group.
12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-19
 5.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method
Change the bar graph display method.
For a description of the function, see section 1.3.
Setup Screen
• Display Direction
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Bar
graph.

• Base Position and the Number of Scale Divisions

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >
Bar graph.

Setup Items
• Bar graph > Direction
Set the display direction of bar graphs to Horizontal or Vertical.

• First-CH, Last-CH
Set the target channels. The target channels are common with the other items that are
displayed on the screen.

• Bar graph > Base position

Set the base position of bar graphs to Normal, Center, Lower,* or Upper.*
The setting is applied when displaying the bar graph and when displaying the current
value on the scale using the bar graph.
* You can select Lower and Upper on DXs with release number 2.

5-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method

When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Vertical 1

• Normal
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Span lower limit or span upper limit (or scale
lower limit or scale upper limit), whichever is less
Value at the top of the bar graph: Span lower limit or span upper limit (or scale lower 2
limit or scale upper limit), whichever is greater
Starting point of the bar: Bottom edge
• Center
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Normal.
3
Value at the top of the bar graph: Same as with Normal.
Starting point of the bar: Center
• Lower 4
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
Value at the top of the bar graph: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Starting point of the bar: Bottom edge
• Upper 5
Value at the bottom of the bar graph: Same as with Lower.

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Value at the top of the bar graph: Same as with Lower.
Starting point of the bar: Top edge
Normal Center Lower Upper 6
VL VL Vupper Vupper

VS VS Vlower Vlower
9
Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)
Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
VL: Vlower or Vupper, whichever is greater
VS: Vlower or Vupper, whichever is less
: Starting point of the bar 10
Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and –100.0, respectively
Normal Center Lower Upper 11
0.0 0.0 –100.0 –100.0

12

-100.0 -100.0 0.0 0.0 App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-21
5.11 Changing the Bar Graph Display Method

When the Display Direction of the Bar Graph Is Horizontal

The span lower limit (or scale lower limit) becomes the left edge of the bar graph, and the
span upper limit (or scale upper limit) becomes the right edge of the bar graph.
• Starting point of the bar
Normal: Left edge or right edge, whichever is less
Center: Center
Lower: Left edge
Upper: Right edge
Normal Lower
Vlower (Vlower < Vupper) Vupper Vlower Vupper

(Vlower > Vupper)

Center Upper
Vlower Vupper Vlower Vupper

Vupper: Span upper limit (or scale upper limit)

Vlower: Span lower limit (or scale lower limit)
: Starting point of the bar

Example: When the span lower and upper limits of the input
range are 0.0 and –100.0, respectively
0.0 –100.0
Normal

0.0 –100.0

Center

0.0 –100.0
Lower

0.0 –100.0
Upper

When Displaying the Current Value on the Scale Using the Bar Graph
Normal Center Lower Upper Vlower Vupper
(Vlower < Vupper)
Vupper

Normal (Vlower > Vupper)

Center

Lower

Vlower
Upper

• Bar graph > Division

Select the number of main scale marks from 4 to 12.

5-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.12 Changing the Background Color of the Display 1

Change the background color of the display. This setting is applied to the operation
screens. 2
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
Monitor. 3

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Setup Items 6
• Monitor > Background > Display
Set the background color of the operation screen to White (default setting) or Black.

• Monitor > Background > Historical trend 7

Select the background color of the historical trend display from the following:
Settings: White, Black (default setting), Cream, and Lightgray

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-23
 5.13 Automatically Switching Display Groups
Automatically switch the displayed group at a specified interval.
Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
Monitor.

Setup Items
• Monitor > Scroll time
Set the switching interval from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min. The
groups switch in ascending order.
Select whether to automatically switch on the display selection menu.
See section 4.2

5-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.14 Automatically Switching Back to the Default 1
Display
Show a preset display when there is no operation for a specific time.
Setup Screen 2
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
Monitor.
3

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Setup Items
• Monitor > Jump default display 6
Returns to a preset display if there is no key operation for a specific time.
Settings Description
1min to 1h Time until switching the display.
Off Disables the function.
7

Procedure
• Specifying the Display to be Shown 8
1. Show the operation display you want to designate.
2. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears. 9
3. Press the Standard display soft key.
The display is registered.

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-25
 5.15 Using the Favorite Key
Register a frequently used display to the Favorite key and enable the display to be
shown through simple operation.

START STOP USER FUNC ESC MENU

Favorite key

Setup Screen
• FAVORITE Key action (Release number 3 or later)
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display >
FAVORITE Key action.

Setup Items
• Action (Release number 3 or later)
Setting Description
History The historical trend of the currently displayed data appears when you press
the favorite key.
Favorite The displays that have been registered to the favorite key appear when you
press the favorite key.
Select Favorite when you want to register displays to the favorite key and use
it to switch between them.

If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 Multi
Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

• Group display (Release number 3 or later)

Specify this setting when Action is set to Favorite.
Setting Description
Current Of the displays that have been registered to the favorite key, those that
display groups (the trend, digital, bar graph, and historical trend displays) are
displayed using the currently displayed group.
Saved Registered displays are displayed as they were registered.

• Time axis zoom (Release number 3 or later)

Specify this setting when Action is set to Favorite.
Setting Description
Current Historical trend displays that have been registered to the favorite key are
displayed using the current time axis zoom.
Saved Historical trends are displayed using the time axis zooms that they were
registered with.

5-26 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.15 Using the Favorite Key

Procedure 1
• Registering the Display
Up to 8 displays can be registered.
1. In the operation mode, show the display you want to register. 2
2. Press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

3. Press the Favorite regist soft key. Then, press a registration number soft key.
3
4. Press the Regist soft key.
A window appears for you to enter the display name.
* To delete a registration, press the Delete soft key.

5. Enter the display name (using up to 16 characters, A a # 1 ). 4

6. Select ENT and press DISP/ENTER.
The display is registered.

5
• Switching the Display
When You Set Action to History

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

The historical trend of the currently displayed data appears when you press the
favorite key. Press the key again to return to the previous display. 6
When You Set Action to Favorite
The displays change in the order that they were registered in each time you press the
favorite key. Pressing the favorite key after the last registered display appears returns 7
the display to what it was before the favorite key was pressed.

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-27
 5.16 Writing a Message When the DX Recovers
from a Power Failure
A message is written to the trend display when the DX recovers from a power failure
while memory sampling is in progress.
Setup Screen
• Power-fail message
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > View, Message.

Setup Items
• Message > Power-fail message
Settings Description
On A message is written when the DX recovers from a power failure while memory
sampling is in progress.
Display example: 15:12 Power Off 2005/10/25 15:12:57
Off Disables the function.

If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 Multi
Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

5-28 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.17 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display 1
Selection Menu
Change the FUNC key menu that appears when the FUNC key is pressed and the
display selection menu that appears when the DISP/ENTER key is pressed. 2
If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/
DX2000 Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

Setup Screen
3
• FUNC Key Menu
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Menu customize
> Function menu. 4

Number indicating
the display order
5

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

Menu name
White: Used 6
Gray: Not used

• Display Menu
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Menu customize 7
> Display menu.

Separator 8

10
Setup Items
• Enabling/Disabling the FUNC Key Menu
Items whose menu name is white are shown. 11
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the View or Hide soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu name is displayed in gray, and does not appear in
the FUNC key menu.
12
• Changing the Display Order of the FUNC Key Menu
Menu items are displayed in order by number. In addition, menu items appear when
the corresponding function can be used. App
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame. Index
3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.
4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected number position.

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-29
5.17 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu

• Description of the FUNC Key Menus

For a description of each item, see section 4.1.

• Enabling/Disabling the Display Selection Menu and Sub Menu

Items whose menu name is white are shown.
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the View or Hide soft key.
If you press the Hide soft key, the menu name is displayed in gray, and does not appear in
the display selection menu.

• Changing the Display Selection Menu/Sub Menu Positions

1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Select soft key.
The menu item is enclosed in a red frame.

3. Press the arrow keys to select the destination.

4. Press the Transfer soft key.
The menu item moves to the selected position.

• Showing/Hiding Separators
1. Press the arrow keys to select a menu item.
2. Press the Separate soft key.
A separator (line) is displayed between the current item and the lower item.
If you select a menu item whose separator is already shown, this operation hides the
separator.
You can set up to three separators in the display selection menu and each sub menu.

5-30 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.17 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu

• Description of the Display Selection Menus and Sub Menus 1

Items with asterisk (*) are set to Hide by default.
Display Selection Menu Sub Menu Reference Section
TREND GROUP 1 to GROUP 10 Section 4.2
ALL CHANNEL/GROUP CHANNEL Section 4.2 2
SCALE ON/OFF Section 4.2
DIGITAL OFF/ON Section 4.2
MESSAGE DISP2/1 Section 4.2
* TREND SPACE ON/OFF Section 4.2 3
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF Section 4.2
FINE GRID ON/OFF Section 4.2
AUTO ZONE ON/OFF Section 4.2

TREND HISTORY
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF
GROUP 1 to GROUP 10
Section 4.2
Section 4.3
4
DIGITAL GROUP 1 to GROUP 10 Section 4.2
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF Section 4.2
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF Section 4.2
BAR GROUP 1 to GROUP 10 Section 4.2 5
AUTO SCROLL ON/OFF Section 4.2

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

TAG DETAIL ON/OFF Section 4.2
CUSTOM DISPLAY INTERNAL 1 to INTERNAL 3, IM04L41B01-04E
EXTERNAL 1 to EXTERNAL 25 6
NEW IM04L41B01-04E
OVERVIEW CURSOR OFF/ON Section 4.4
JUMP TO ALM SUM Section 4.4
JUMP TO TREND Section 4.4 7
* JUMP TO DIGITAL Section 4.4
* JUMP TO BAR Section 4.4
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF Section 4.4
*2
ACK ALARM 1
*2
Section 4.4
8
ACK ALARM 2
*2
ACK ALARM 3
*2
ACK ALARM 4

ANNUNCIATOR — Section 3.12 9

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-31
5.17 Changing the FUNC Key Menu and Display Selection Menu

Display Selection Menu Sub Menu Reference Section

INFORMATION ALARM SUMMARY Section 4.5
MESSAGE SUMMARY Section 4.5
MEMORY SUMMARY Section 4.5
TAG DETAIL ON/OFF Section 4.6
* MODBUS CLIENT Section 4.5
* MODBUS MASTER Section 4.5
* RELAY Section 4.5
EVENT SWITCH Section 4.5
REPORT DATA Section 4.5
COLUMN BAR Section 4.10
TO HISTORY Sections 4.6, 4.7, and 4.8
TO HISTORY(DISP) Sections 4.6, 4.7, and 4.8
TO HISTORY(EV) Sections 4.6, 4.7, and 4.8
TO OVERVIEW Section 4.6
DISP GROUP OFF/ON Section 4.7
CHANGE SORT KEY Sections 4.6 and 4.7
ASCENDING ORDER/ Sections 4.6 and 4.7
DESCENDING ORDER
DATA SAVE MODE Section 4.8
SELECT SAVE Section 4.8
* M.SAMPLE SAVE Section 4.8
* REPORT SAVE Section 4.8
ALL SAVE Section 4.8
CHANGE DISP ITEM Section 4.7
CHANGE DATA KIND Section 4.8
FILENAME DISPLAY/TIME DISPLAY Section 4.8
CHANGE REPORT CH Section 4.5
SINGLE GRAPH/DUAL GRAPH Section 4.10
SELECT COLUMN/SELECT GROUP Section 4.10
REPORT GROUP 1 to 6 Section 4.10
*1
*Log LOGIN Section 4.9
*2
Operation Section 4.9
ERROR Section 4.9
COMMUNICATION Section 4.9
FTP Section 4.9
MAIL Section 4.9
WEB Section 4.9
SNTP Section 4.9
DHCP Section 4.9
MODBUS Section 4.9
*2
Change settings Section 4.9
*2
CHANGE DISP ITEM Section 4.9
*1 Only on DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
*2 Only on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

5-32 IM 04L41B01-01E
 5.18 Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or 1
later)
Register text strings to comment text fields and combine comment text fields to create
comment text blocks. 2
• You can display the text from a comment text block when a certain event occurs (an
alarm for example).
• You can use comment text block text for annunciator window labels (see section 3.12
for details). 3
Setup Screen
• Entering Comments
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message, 4
Comment Text > Comment text fields.

Operations for Changing the Displayed Contents

6

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Message, 7
Comment Text > Comment txt block.

10
• Displaying Comments
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action.
See section 7.1. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 5-33
5.18 Displaying Comments (Release number 3 or later)

Setup Items
• Comment txt field no, Text info
You can register a comment to a specified comment text field (field 1 to 100).
Text info: you can enter up to 32 characters ( A a # 1 ).

• Comment txt block no, Comment txt field no

You can register a comment to a specified comment text block (block 1 to 50).
Register comments to comment text blocks by combining up to 5 comment text fields.
The text from the selected comment text fields appears on the right of the screen.

• Logic box number, Event, Action, Comment Txt Block No

Use the event action function to specify the event that will cause a comment to be
displayed. For information about how to set the event action function, see section 7.1.
Example: If even one alarm occurs, the text from comment text block 2 is displayed.
Item Setting
Event Alarm
Action CommentDisplay
Comment Txt Block No 2

A comment appears when an alarm occurs. Pressing any key makes the comment
disappear.

5-34 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 6 Saving and Loading Data

6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the 1

Measured Data
Set the method for recording the measured data.
For a description of the function, see section 1.4. 2
Setup Screen
• Data Type
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
 3
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > A/D, Memory.

• Measurement Channels 6
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Meas channel >

Saving and Loading Data

Tag, Memory, Delay.

9
• File Save Interval (Display Data)
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Display > Trend/
Save interval.
10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-1
6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data

• Recording Conditions of Event Data

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save >
Event data.

Setup Items
• Memory > Data kind
Settings Description
Display Records display data.
E+D Records display data and event data. This setting cannot be selected when
the trend interval switching function is set to On. This setting cannot be
selected when the multi batch function (/BT2 option) is being used or on
DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option.
Event Records event data.

• Memory sample > On/Off

Turn On the target channels.

• Trend/Save interval > Trend interval [/div] (when recording display data)
See the table below. You can only set trend intervals that are longer than the scan
interval you set in Basic Setting Mode.

• Trend/Save interval > Save interval (when recording display data)

Select the size of a record data file. The recorded data is divided by the file size
specified here. The available settings vary depending on the number of memory
sampling channels and the Trend interval setting.
*1 *2 *2 *3
Trend interval 5s 10 s 15 s 30 s 1 min
Sample rate 125 ms 250 ms 500 ms 1s 2s
Selectable range 10 min to 12 10 min to 1 10 min to 3 10 min to 7 10 min to 14
of auto save hours day days days days
interval
*1
Trend interval 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min
Sample rate 4s 10 s 20 s 30 s 40 s
Selectable range 10 min to 14 10 min to 31 10 min to 31 10 min to 31 1 hour to 31
of auto save days days days days days
interval
*1
Trend interval 30 min 1h 2h 4h 10 h
Sample rate 1 min 2 min 4 min 8 min 20 min
Selectable range 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31 2 hours to 31 4 hours to 31 8 hours to 31
of auto save days days days days days
interval
*1 You cannot set a trend interval that corresponds to a sampling interval that is faster than the
scan interval.
*2 Selectable on the DX1002, DX1002N, DX1004, and DX1004N (release number 3 or later).
*3 Selectable in fast sampling mode on the DX1006, DX1006N, DX1012, and DX1012N (release
number 3 or later).

• Trend/Save interval > Second interval [/div]

See section 5.3.

6-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.1 Setting the Recording Conditions of the Measured Data

• Event data (when recording event data) 1

• Sample rate
Select the data recording interval. Use the table under “Data length” for reference.
• Mode
Settings Description 2
Free Records data continuously.
Single Records data when the trigger condition is met.
Repeat Records data each time the trigger condition is met.
* This setting is fixed at “Free” when the multi batch function (/BT2 option) is being used and
3
on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option.

• Data length
Select the size of a record data file. The recorded data is divided by the file size
4
specified here. The available data lengths vary depending on the number of
memory sampling channels and the Sample rate setting.
*1 *2
Sample rate
Selectable range
25 ms
10 min to 4
125 ms
10 min to 1
250 ms
10 min to 2
500 ms
10 min to 3
1s
10 min to 7
5
of data length hours day days days days
*1
Sample rate 2s 5s 10 s 30 s 1 min
Selectable range 10 min to 14 10 min to 31 10 min to 31 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31
of data length
*1
days days days days
*3
days
*3
6
Sample rate 2 min 5 min 10 min 15 min 20 min
Selectable range 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31 1 hour to 31

Saving and Loading Data

of data length days days days days days
*1 *3
Sample rate
Selectable range
30 min
1 hour to 31
7
of data length days
*1 You cannot choose an interval that is faster than the scan interval.
*2 Selectable on the DX1002, DX1002N, DX1004, and DX1004N.
*3 Release number 3 or later. 8

• Pre-trigger
Specify the range when recording data before the trigger condition is met. Select
the range as a percentage of the data length from 0, 5, 25, 50, 75, 95, and 100%.
9
If you do not want to record the data existing before the trigger condition is met,
select 0%.
• Trigger signal > Key 10
Select On if you want to activate the trigger using key operation.

Note
• Triggers can be applied using event action (see section 7.1).
• If the trigger condition is already met when you press START, recording starts.
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-3
 6.2 Setting the Method for Saving the Data
Set the method for recording the measured data to the storage medium.
For a description of the function, see section 1.4.
Setup Screen
• Auto save
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Security, Media save.

• File header, Data file name

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save > File
header, File name.

• Save directory
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save >

Save directory.

6-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.2 Setting the Method for Saving the Data

Setup Items 1
• Save > Auto save
Settings Description
On Automatically saves the measured data to the CF card. Specify On to
enable the media FIFO function. 2
Off Does not automatically save the data. Save the measured data manually to
the CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

• Save > Media FIFO (Release Number 2 or Later) 3

This item appears if Auto save is set to On.
Settings Description
On Enable media FIFO. Constantly retains the most recent data files in the CF
card. 4
Off Disable media FIFO. Replace the CF card if the free space on the CF card
drops low.

• File header > Characters 5

Set the header comment to be written to the data file. (Up to 50 characters, Aa#1 )

• Data file name > Structure

Sets the structure of the file name when saving data.
6
Settings Description

Saving and Loading Data

Date Serial number + user-assigned character string + date
Serial Serial number + user-assigned character string 7
Batch Serial number + batch name (when using the batch function)

• Data file name > Identified strings

Set the user-assigned section of the file name. (Up to 16 characters, Aa#1 ) 8
Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, -, ., @, °, and _.
For details on the data file name, see section 1.4.

• Save directory > Directory name 9

Set the name of the directory on the storage medium for saving the data on the
external storage medium. (Up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, -, ., @, °, and _.
Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and 10
LPT1 to LPT9.

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-5
 6.3 Using the Batch Function
Set the batch function.
For a description of the function, see section 1.5.
Setup Screen
• Batch Function
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Batch.

• Data file name

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save > File
header, File name.

• Text Field
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Data save >
Batch text.

6-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.3 Using the Batch Function

Setup Items 1
• Batch > On/Off
Select On to use the batch function.
For details on MultiBatch, see IM04L41B01-03E.
2
• Batch > Lot-No. digit
Select the number of digits of the lot number from 4, 6, or 8. Select Off to disable the
lot number.
3
• Batch > Auto increment
Settings Description
On Automatically sets the lot number of the next measurement to “the lot number of
the current measurement + 1.” 4
Off Disables the operation described above.

• Data file name > Structure

Batch: Sets the name of the display data files or event data files to “batch name.” 5
For details on the data file name, see section 1.4.

• Text field number

Select a number from 1 to 24 on a DX whose release number is 3 or later. Select a 6
number from 1 to 8 on a DX whose release number is 2 or earlier.

Saving and Loading Data

• Text field > Title of field or Characters
Set the string. 7
Title of field: (Up to 20 characters, A a # 1 ), Characters: (Up to 30 characters, Aa#1 )

Procedure
• Setting the Batch Name (Batch number + lot number) and Comment 8
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Batch soft key. 9

A window appears for you to enter the batch name and comment.

3. Set the batch number. (Up to 32 characters, Aa#1 )

Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, -, ., @, °, and _.

If you are using the lot number, set the lot number.
10
4. Set batch comments 1, 2, and 3. (Up to 50 characters each, Aa#1 )

5. Press DISP/ENTER.
11
Note
• Batch numbers and lot numbers cannot be changed after memory start.
• You can change the comment as many times as you wish before executing memory start.
After memory start, only the comments that are not specified can be entered. You can
12
change the comment as many times as you wish while the window for setting the comment
is displayed. The last specified comment is valid.
• The comment is cleared when memory stop is executed.
• The text fields set upon memory start (see “Starting Recording (Memory Start)” on the next
App
page) are cleared upon memory stop.
• The batch number, lot number, and comments are saved to the display data file or event
data file. They are not saved to the setup file.

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-7
6.3 Using the Batch Function

• Displaying the Text Field Settings

If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/
DX2000 Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.

The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Text field soft key.

The text field settings are displayed.

Page switch mark

(release number 3 and later)
Eight text fields are displayed
on a single page.
Use the left and right arrow
keys to switch the page.

The text field contents are displayed on page 3. Use the left and right arrow keys to
switch pages (release number 3 or later).

• Starting Recording (Memory start)

1. Press START to open the start recording screen (release number 3 or later).
* On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, recording will not start, even if you press
START in setting mode.

2. Enter the batch number, lot number, and comments.

To edit the contents of a text field, proceed to step 3.

6-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.3 Using the Batch Function

3. Select Input, and press DISP/ENTER. The text field screen appears (release 1
numbers 4 and later).

The settings that you made in setting

mode appear here. 3

Select a text field number, and enter text. However, you cannot specify the Tilte of
4
field. (Firmware version numbers 4.11 and later)
Press DISP/ENTER.
The start recording screen will appear. 5
If you press the +1 and –1 soft keys to increase and decrease the text field
number, any text field numbers whose Title of field have not been set will be
skipped. If you press the Input soft key to enter text field numbers directly, any 6
text field numbers whose Title of field have not been set are also displayed.

Saving and Loading Data

The text fields that you specify here will only be saved to the measured data file
whose recording you are starting. The text fields that you set in setting mode (see 7
page 6-6) will not change.

4. Move the cursor (blue) to START, and then press DISP/ENTER.

The internal memory icon in the status display section changes from the icon that indicates
8
that memory sampling is stopped to the icon that indicates that memory sampling has
started.
• If you are recording display or event data in Free mode, recording will start.
• If you are recording event data in a trigger mode (Single or Repeat), the DX will enter a
9
trigger-wait state.

• Stopping Recording (Memory stop)

1. Press STOP. A confirmation window opens. 10

11

12

2. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER. App

If the DX is equipped with computation functions (/M1 and /PM1 options), select Mem+Math
or Memory and press DISP/ENTER.
On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, if there are alarms upon which the alarm
ACK operation has not been performed, a confirmation message will appear. Perform the
Index
alarm ACK operation as necessary.
The internal memory icon in the status display section changes to the icon that indicates
that memory sampling is stopped.

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-9
 6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving
the Measured Data, Saving the Measured Data
through Key Operation
Start the recording and save the measured data to the external storage medium.
For a description of the function, see section 1.4.
Procedure
• Starting the Recording (Memory Start)
Press START. The internal memory icon in the status display section changes from
the stop icon to memory sampling icon.
• When recording display data or event data in free mode, recording starts.
• When recording event data in trigger mode, the DX enters the trigger-wait
condition.
* On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, recording will not start, even if you press
START in setting mode.
* For the procedures when using the batch function, see section 6.3. If you are using the multi
batch function (/BT2 option), see the DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000 Multi Batch (/BT2) User’s
Manual, IM04L41B01-03E.
• Applying a Trigger to Start the Recording
Carry out the procedure below when the DX is waiting for a trigger.
Trigger through Key Operation
The procedure below can be carried out when recording event data in trigger mode
and the DX is configured so that the start trigger is applied through key operation.
1. Press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Trigger soft key.

The recording starts.
T
 rigger by an Event (Event action function must be configured. See
section 7.1.)
Recording starts when an event occurs.
• Automatically Saving Measured Data
Automatic saving takes place when Auto save is set to On (see section 6.2 for details).
The save destination is the CF card.
Have the CF card inserted in the slot at all times. While the memory sampling is in
progress, the measured data recorded in the internal memory is automatically saved
to the CF card.
Action when Media FIFO is not enabled: If data storage to the storage medium is not
complete such as due to insufficient free space, the unsaved data is saved the next
time the data is automatically saved.
• S
 aving the Display Data or Event Data during Memory Sampling through
Key Operation
The save destination is the CF card.
This operation can be carried out when recording display data or when recording
event data in Free mode. Unsaved measured data is saved to the CF card.
* If this operation is carried out when auto save is Off, the data in the internal memory is
divided, and a file is created.

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.

The FUNC key menu appears.

6-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured Data, Saving the Measured Data through Key
Operation

2. Press the Save display or Save event soft key. 1

The display data or event data is saved to the CF card.
Save operation

Time
2
File File File
Saved the previous time Saved this time

3
• Saving Measured Data Manually (Collectively Storing Unsaved Data)
Automatic saving takes place when Auto save is set to Off (see section 6.2 for details).
You can save to a CF card or to USB flash memory (/USB1 option). The procedure for
saving unsaved data to a CF card is described below. 4
For the procedure to save data to the USB flash memory, see section 2.12.
1. Insert the CF card.
A confirmation window containing the message “There is data which is not saved to media.
Do you want to store to media?” appears.
5
2. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER.
The unsaved data in internal memory will be saved to the CF card.

3. Follow these steps to remove the CF card. 6

Press FUNC (to display the FUNC key menu) > Media eject soft key > CF soft key.

Saving and Loading Data

When the message “Media can be removed safely” appears, remove the CF card.

Note 7
• If there is not enough free space on the storage medium, the message “Not enough free
space on media” appears, and the data is not saved. If this message appears, replace the
storage medium. Then, carry out the procedure again.
• You cannot abort the data save operation while it is in progress.
8
• Stopping the Recording (Memory Stop)
* For the procedures when using the batch function, see section 6.3.

1. Press STOP. A confirmation window is displayed.

9

10

11

2. Select Yes using the arrow keys and press DISP/ENTER.

On models with the computation function (/M1 or /PM1 option), select Mem+Math or 12
Memory, and press DISP/ENTER.
On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option, if there are alarms upon which the alarm
ACK operation has not been performed, a confirmation message will appear. Perform the
alarm ACK operation as necessary.
App
The internal memory icon in the status display section changes to the stop icon.
• S
 aving the Data in the Internal Memory Collectively or Selectively
through Key Operation
See section 4.8. Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-11
6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured Data, Saving the Measured Data through Key
Operation

Explanation
• Operations That Start Simultaneously with Memory Start
• Waveform display updating on the trend display.
• Report (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• The computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options) can be configured to start
simultaneously with memory start.
See section 9.4.

• Operations That Stop Simultaneously with Memory Stop

• Waveform display updating on the trend display.
• Report (/M1 and /PM1 options)
• Computation function (/M1 and /PM1 options): When selected in the procedure
described above.

• Performance While Data Is Being Saved

If the internal memory or external storage medium is continuously accessed, the
following phenomena may occur. When such phenomena occur, the storage medium
access indicator frequently illuminates.
• Files being saved to the external storage medium drop out.
• Accessing the DX through communications takes a long time
In such case, take the following measures.
• If you are creating data files at short intervals consecutively using the event action
function, increase the data file save interval.
• If you are creating numerous files in a single directory on the external storage
medium, change the destination directory name at approximately every 1000 files.

6-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.4 Starting/Stopping the Recording and Saving the Measured Data, Saving the Measured Data through Key
Operation

• Changing Settings and Performing File Operations during Recording 1

(Memory sampling)
If you are using the multi batch function (/BT2 option), if even one batch group is being
recorded, the DX is recording (memory sampling).
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option 2
You can change all settings except for the ones listed below.
• Basic settings
• Input range
• Memory sampling on/off
3
• Computation channel calculation expressions and constants
• TLOG
• Trend interval 4
• File save interval
• Timer and match time timer

On DXs With the /AS1 Advanced Security Option 5

You can change the following settings and perform the following file operations. The
administrator can perform all operations. Users can only perform operations that have
been permitted. The setting menu that appears varies depending on the operations
that can be performed.
6
Setting Changes

Saving and Loading Data

• Date and time settings
• Alarm settings 7
• Alarm delay time settings
• Calibration settings
• Destination directory settings
• Administrator settings* 8
• User settings*
* See the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-05EN.
File Operations
• Loading display data files 9
• Loading event data files
• Listing the files on the external storage medium

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-13
 6.5 Manually Saving the Measured Data (Manual
Sample)
Save the instantaneous values of all channels (excluding those set to Skip or Off)
through key operation.
For a description of the function, see section 1.4.
Procedure
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Manual sample soft key.

Manual sampling is executed.

Explanation
• Number of Manual Sampled Data Set in the Internal Memory
The number of manual sampled data set in the internal memory is displayed on the
memory summary display (see section 1.9)

• Saving Manual Sampled Data

• If auto save is On, the manual sampled data is saved to the CF card when you
carry out manual sampling.
• If auto save is Off, save the manual sampled data to the CF card according to the
procedure for manually saving the data (see section 6.4).
• The manual sampled data can be saved manually to a CF card or USB flash
memory (/USB1 option) regardless of whether the auto save function is set to On/
Off. For the manual save operation, see section 4.8.

6-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.6 Saving the Screen Image Data (Snapshot) 1

Save the current screen image data to the CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
This operation is called snapshot, and the screen image data file is called snapshot data 2
file.
For a description of the function, see section 1.4.
Procedure 3
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Snap shot soft key.

The snapshot data file is saved to the CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1 option). See
4
“Save Destination“ in “Explanation.”
Image of the soft keys and the message window are not saved.

5
Note
If you assign the snapshot function to the USER key, you can carry out snapshots in all modes
(operation mode, setting mode, and basic setting mode). However, error messages are not
saved.
6

Saving and Loading Data

Explanation
• File Format 7
The snapshot data file is in PNG format.

• File Name
See section 1.4. 8

• Save Destination
Snapshoto data is saved to the CF card and USB flash memory when both are in use.
9
Note
The save destination of the snapshot data is a CF card only on the recorder with a version 4.15
or earlier.
10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-15
 6.7 Managing the Files on the Storage Medium
This section explains how to display a list of files on the storage medium, check the free
space, delete files and directories, and format the storage medium.
Procedure
• D
 isplaying a List of Files on the Storage Medium, Deleting Files, and
Checking the Free Space
Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > File list, delete >
*
press the CF or USB soft key > and press DISP/ENTER.
* When a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option) are being used.

Displaying a List of Files in a Directory and Checking the Free Space

Press the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER. The files in the
directory are displayed. The root directory is denoted by [/].

Sorting Files and Directories (Release Number 2 or Later)

The files and directories can be sorted by the update date/time.
Each time you press the Sort soft key, the files and directories are sorted in order from
the oldest or the latest update date/time. A mark indicating the sort order is displayed
by Date/Time.

If the File Name Does Not Fit in the Display Space (Release Number 2 or Later)
Press the soft key once to shift the file name to the left by a character.
Press the soft key once to shift the file name to the right by a character.

6-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.7 Managing the Files on the Storage Medium

Deleting a File 1
Press the arrow keys to select the file to be deleted, and press the Delete soft key. A
confirmation window appears. Select Yes, and press DISP/ENTER.
The file is deleted.
This operation cannot be performed on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security 2
option.

Deleting a Directory
First, delete all the files in the directory. 3
Select the directory you want to delete. The rest of the procedure is the same as
deleting a file.
This operation cannot be performed on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security
option. 4

Checking the Free Space

The free space on the storage medium is shown at the lower right of the screen.
5
• Formatting the Storage Medium
Formatting will remove the contents of the storage media.
This operation cannot be performed on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security 6
option.

Saving and Loading Data

1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Format. Press
7
*
the CF or USB soft key , and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option) are being used.

10
2. Enter the volume name and press DISP/ENTER. (Up to 11 characters, A 1)
A confirmation window opens.

3. Select Yes and press DISP/ENTER. 11

The storage media is formatted.

Explanation
• Format Type
12
Size Type
Storage medium smaller than or equal to 512 MB FAT16
Storage medium greater than 512 MB FAT32 App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-17
 6.8 Loading and Displaying the Measured Data in
the Storage Medium
Load the display or event data file saved on the external storage medium and display the
waveform. The loaded data is shown on the historical trend display.
For the operations on the historical trend display, see section 4.3.
Procedure
• Loading a File
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Load display
*
data or Load event data. Press the CF or USB soft key , and then press DISP/
ENTER.
* When a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option) are being used.

2. Press the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER. The files in
the directory are displayed. The root directory is denoted by [/].
3. Press the arrow keys to select a file, and press DISP/ENTER.
The file is loaded, and the waveform is displayed in the historical trend.

Note
• As shown in the table below, the display data and event data file name extensions change
depending on whether or not the /AS1 advanced security option is installed.
Advanced Security Display Data Files Event Data Files
Not installed .DAD .DAE
Installed .DSD .DSE
• For details on how to use the Sort, , and soft keys, see section 6.7.

6-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.9 Saving/Loading the Setup Data 1

Save the setup data to the external storage medium or load the setup data from the
external storage medium. 2
Procedure
• Saving the Setup Data
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display. 3
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Save settings.
*
Press the CF or USB soft key , and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When a CF card and a USB flash memory (/USB1 option) are being used.
4

Saving and Loading Data

2. Set the file name. (Up to 32 characters, Aa#1 )
Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, -, ., @, °, and _. 7
Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and LPT1 to
LPT9.
To cancel the operation, press ESC.

3. Press DISP/ENTER. 8
The setup data is saved.

• Loading the Setup Data for the Setting Mode

1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display. 9
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Load settings.
*
Press the CF or USB soft key , and then press DISP/ENTER.

10

11

12
2. Use DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to select the setup file to be loaded.
* Setup data files are stored in the root directory [/].
To cancel the operation, press ESC. App
3. Press DISP/ENTER.
The setup data is loaded.

Note Index
For details on how to use the Sort, , and keys, see section 6.7.

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-19
6.9 Saving/Loading the Setup Data

• Loading the Setup Data for the Setting Mode and Basic Setting Mode
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to
basic setting mode), and select the File/Initialize tab > Load settings. Press the
*
CF or USB soft key , and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When you are using a CF card and USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch
to basic setting mode), and select the File/Initialize tab > Load settings > All
settings, Login info only, or Other settings. Press the CF or USB soft key*,
and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When you are using a CF card and USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

2. Use DISP/ENTER and arrow keys to select the setup file to be loaded.
* Setup data files are stored in the root directory [/].
To cancel the operation, press ESC.

3. Press DISP/ENTER.
The setup data is loaded.

Note
For details on how to use the Sort, , and keys, see section 6.7.

6-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.9 Saving/Loading the Setup Data

Explanation 1
• Setup Data File
On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
• The setup data file extension is .PDL.
2
• The maximum setup data file size is approximately 250 KB.
• The following settings are also saved.
• Current monitor display conditions
• Default display registration data 3
• Favorite key registration data

On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option

• The setup data file extension is .PEL. 4
• The maximum setup data file size is approximately 250 KB.
• The following settings are also saved.
• Current monitor display conditions
5
• Default display registration data
• Favorite key registration data

• Loading Setup Data

On DXs without the /AS1 advanced security option
6
• Only the setup data of the setting mode is loaded in the setting mode. However,

Saving and Loading Data

settings that contradict the setup data of the basic setting mode are not loaded.
• The monitor display conditions, default display, and favorite keys are also loaded. 7
• If the contents of the loaded setup data is invalid, check the error log (see section
4.9).
• Operations through keys, communications, and remote control input are not
executed while the setup data is being loaded. 8
On DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option
• If the setup data is changed by loading new setup data, the original setup file
is automatically saved to CF card. If no CF card is inserted, an error message 9
appears and the operation cannot be completed.
• All settings, Login info only, and Other settings
The “Load settings” Description
option 10
All settings The DX loads all setting mode and basic setting mode settings.
However, the login password is not loaded. The password is set
to the default password.
Login info only The DX only loads the login settings. However, the login
password is not loaded. The password is set to the default 11
password.
Other settings The DX loads all setting except for the login settings.
• In setting mode, only the setting mode settings are loaded. However, settings that
contradict the basic setting mode settings are not loaded. 12
• In any case, the option to “Load settings” also loads monitor display conditions, the
default display, and favorite keys.
• If the loaded setup data is not applied, check the error log (see section 4.9).
App
Note
• While loading the setup data, key operations, operations via communications, and
operations via remote input are not available.
• While loading the setup data, actions of the Event Action function are disabled. Events Index
occurring while loading the setup data are ignored.

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-21
 6.10 Loading and Saving Report Templates (/M1 and
/PM1 options; release numbers 4 and later)

This section explains the procedures for loading a report template (.xml extension) from
an external storage medium and for saving a report template from the internal memory to
an external storage medium.
Procedure
• Loading a Template File
1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Load template.
Press the CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When you are using a CF card and USB flash memory (/USB1 option).

Under Template File Status, the check boxes of the template files that are stored in the
internal memory are selected.

2. Press a soft key to select a report type, and press DISP/ENTER.

The directories on the external storage medium appear. “/” is the root directory.

3. Use the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER.

The files in the directory will appear in a list.

4. Use the arrow keys to select the file that you want to load, and press DISP/
ENTER.
The report template file is loaded, and the screen from step 1 appears. The check boxes
that are selected under Template File Status will match the file type that you loaded.
If the DX fails to load the file, it will display an error message.

6-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 6.10 Loading and Saving Report Templates (/M1 and /PM1 options; release numbers 4 and later)

• Saving a Template File 1

1. Carry out the procedure below to show the display.
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the File tab > Save template.
Press the CF or USB soft key*, and then press DISP/ENTER.
* When you are using a CF card and USB flash memory (/USB1 option).
2

Under Template File Status, the check boxes of the template files that are stored in the 5
internal memory are selected.

2. Press a soft key to select a report type, and press DISP/ENTER.

The directories on the external storage medium appear. “/” is the root directory.
6
3. Use the arrow keys to select a directory, and press DISP/ENTER.

Saving and Loading Data

7

9
4. Enter the file name (up to 32 characters, A a # 1 ).
Symbols that can be used: #, %, (, ), +, –, ., @, °, and _.
Strings that cannot be used: AUX, CON, PRN, NUL, CLOCK, COM1 to COM9, and LPT1 to
10
LPT9.
To cancel the operation, press ESC.

5. Press DISP/ENTER.
The report template file is saved. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 6-23
6.10 Loading and Saving Report Templates (/M1 and /PM1 options; release numbers 4 and later)

Explanation
• Report Template Files
• The report template file name extension is .xml.
• The DX can only handle template files that are 400 KB or smaller.

• Report Types and Templates Used

Report Settings Template Type
Report kind File type
Hour Combine/Separate The hourly report template
Daily Combine/Separate The daily report template
Hour+Day Separate The hourly report and daily report templates
Combine The hourly + daily report template
Day+Week Separate The daily report and weekly report templates
Combine The daily + weekly report template
Day+Month Separate The daily report and monthly report templates
Combine The daily + monthly report template

6-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 7 Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1
Options)

7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including 1

the remote control function of the /R1 and /
PM1 options and the USER key)
A specified action is carried out when an event occurs. This function is called event
2
action. The remote control function (/R1 option) and the USER key are set by the event
action.
For a description of the function, see section 1.6. 3
Setup Screen
• Event and Action
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action.
4

• Timer 7
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Timer.

Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
• When set to relaive time • When set to absolute time
8

10
• Match Time
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Match time timer. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 7-1
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and
the USER key)

Setup Items
• Logic box number
You can set up to 40.

• Event action > Event

The condition to execute the action.
Settings Description
None Not use.
Remote Select the remote control input terminal number.
Relay Select the alarm output relay number.During Edge operation, a change from
deactivated to activated is an event.
*2
Relay-Off Select the alarm output relay number. During Edge operation, a change
from activated to deactivated is an event. During Level operation, the action
states that correspond to “activated” and “deactivated” are the opposite of
when you select “Relay.”
Switch Select the internal switch number.During Edge operation, a change from off
to on is an event.
*2
Switch-Off Select the internal switch number. During Edge operation, a change from on
to off is an event. During Level operation, the action states that correspond
to “on” and “off” are the opposite of when you select “Switch.”
Timer Select the timer number.
Matchtime Select the match timer number.
Alarm During Edge operation, a change from “no alarms are active” to “at least
one alarm is active” is an event
*2
.Alarm-Off During Edge operation, a change from “at least one alarm is active” to “no
alarms are active” is an event. During Level operation, the action states that
correspond to “at least one alarm is active” and “no alarms are active” are
the opposite of when you select “Alarm.”
UserKey -
*1
Edge Select the event switch number (1 to 30). This function is available for
release numbers 3 and later
*1
Level Select the event switch number (1 to 30). During Edge operation, a change
from off to on is an event.
*2
LevelOff Select the event switch number (1 to 30). During Edge operation, a change
from on to off is an event. During Level operation, the action states that
correspond to “on” and “off” are the opposite of when you set the event to
“Level.”
*1 Available for release numbers 3 and later.
*2 Available for release numbers 4 and later.

7-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and
the USER key)

• Event action > Action 1

The action to be executed when an event occurs.
Settings Description
Memory -
Start - 2
Stop -
Trigger* Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data.
AlarmACK Cannot be specified when the event is set to Relay, Switch, or Alarm.
Math Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
3
MathStrt Start computation. Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
MathStop Stop computation. Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
Math rst Reset computation. Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
4
SaveDisp Can be specified when the DX is configured to record display data.
SaveEvt Can be specified when the DX is configured to record event data.
Message Set the message number to write the message and the destination. Set the
message destination to all groups (All) or a group number.
5
Snap Snapshot
Rate1/2 Can be specified when the function for switching between the trend interval and
the secondary trend interval is enabled.
M.sample
TimerRst
Manual sampling
Cannot be specified when the event is set to Timer.
6
Group Specify the number of the group to be displayed.
Flag Can be specified on /M1 and /PM1 options.
Time adj Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote. 7
PnlLoad* Can be specified only when the event is set to Remote.
Comment Specify the comment text block number to display. This function is available for

Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
release numbers 3 and later.
Favorite Choose which registered display to switch to. This function is available for release
numbers 3 and later.
8
Setting Description
Key Performs the same operation as

Select>Favorite Screen No
pressing the favorite key.
Displays the specified favorite screen.
9
* If you configure the settings so that the Favorite action and the Group action
occur at the same time, only the action whose event action number is largest will
be executed.
AlarmRst This action can only be specified when using the double lock-in sequence of the 10
alarm annunciator function (see section 3.12), and the event is Remote, UserKey,
or Edge. This function is available for release numbers 3 and later.
* This action is not available on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security option.
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 7-3
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and
the USER key)

• Timer
Timer used by event action. Used also in the TLOG computation of the computation
function.
* The timer cannot be changed while memory sampling or computation is in progress.
• Timer No.
Up to four timers (1 to 4) can be set.
When Using an Absolute Timer
• Mode
Select Absolute.
• Interval
Select the interval from the available settings between 1min to 24h.
• Ref.time
Set the time in the range of hour 0 to hour 23.

When Using a Relative Timer

• Mode
Select Relative.
• Interval
Set the interval in the range of 00:01 (1 min) to 24:00 (24 hours).
• Reset at Math Start
On: Resets the timer when computation is started. The resetting of the timer is not
considered to be a timeout. Even if the timer is used as an event, the action is not
executed.

• Match Time Timer

Set the time match condition used in event action.
* The condition cannot be changed while memory sampling or computation is in progress.
• Timer number
You can set up to four match time conditions (1 to 4).

7-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and
the USER key)

• Kind 1
Setting Description
Day The condition is matched once a day.
Week The condition is matched once a week.
Month
Year
The condition is matched once a month.
The condition is matched once a year. This function is available for release
2
numbers 3 and later.

Set the items with check marks in the following table depending on the Kind setting.

Setting
Type 3
Day Week Month Year
Month 

Day  
Day of week 
Hour:Minute     4
• Month
Specify the month.
• Day 5
Set the day.
• Day of the week
Set the day of the week.
• Hour:Minute 6
Set the time in the range of 00:00 to 23:59.
• Timer action
Settings Description
7
Single Executes the action once when the condition is met.
Repeat Executes the action at every specified time.

Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
Procedure 8
• Resetting the Relative Timer
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.
9
2. Press the Timer reset soft key.
3. Press the soft key corresponding to timer you want to reset. Select All to reset all
timers.
The relative timer is reset. 10
• Operating Event Switches (Release number 3 or later)
Operating Event Level Switches
You can operate an event level switch using:
• A custom display switch.
11
• A communication command.
Operating Event Edge Switches
You can operate an event edge switch using: 12
• The FUNC key (the procedure for operating the switch with the FUNC key is
described below).
• A custom display push button.
• A communication command. App
Operating the Event Edge Switch Using the FUNC Key
1. In operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.
Index
2. Press the Edge Switch soft key.
3. Press the switch number soft key.
The switch will turn on briefly and then turn off again.

IM 04L41B01-01E 7-5
7.1 Setting the Event Action Function (Including the remote control function of the /R1 and /PM1 options and
the USER key)

• Displaying an Event Level Switch Status List (Release number 3 or later)

Display the status of the event level switch. For the operating procedure, see section
4.5.

• Resetting the Match Time Timer (Release number 3 or later)

Operation ends when a match time timer whose timer action is set to single expires.
To use such a match time timer again, you must reset it.
1. In operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Match T Reset soft key.

* This soft key appears when a match timer whose timer action is set to single has expired.

3. Press the soft key with the match time timer number of the timer that you want to
reset.
The match time timer that you specify is reset.

Explanation
• Resetting the Relative Timer
Restarts the timer.
• The resetting of the timer is considered to be a timeout. (If the timer is used as an
event, the action is executed.)
• If the timer is used in TLOG computation on the /M1 or /PM1 math option and
TLOG computed value reset at each interval is specified, the computed result is
reset.

• Resetting the Match Time Timer (Release number 3 or later)

This operation resets an expired match time timer so that it can operate again.
• The resetting of a match time timer does not count as a timer expiration (and it will
not count as an event action event).
• This operation can be used with match time timers whose timer action is set to
single.
• If the timer is used in TLOG computation on the /M1 or /PM1 math option and
TLOG computed value reset at each interval is specified, the computed result is
reset.

7-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action 1

Example 1: Starting/Stopping the Memory Sampling through Remote Control

(/R1 Option) 2
Starts/Stops the memory sampling when a signal is applied to remote control input
terminal 2. Use logic box number 1.

• Setup Screen and Setup Items 3

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action.

6
<Operation>
If the input to the remote control input terminal 2 is turned ON when memory sampling
is stopped, memory sampling starts. If the remote control input is turned OFF when
memory sampling is in progress, memory sampling stops.
7

Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
Example 2: Writing a Message When an Alarm Occurs
Write the message “Channel 1 Alarm” to group 1 when an alarm occurs on channel 1. 8
Use logic box number 2.

• Setup Screen and Setup Items

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
9
action > Event action.

10

11

<Other Settings> 12
• Set an alarm to channel 1 and output to internal switch 3.
• Register “Channel 1 alarm” in message number 4.
For the procedure to set the alarm, see section 3.7.
For the procedure to set the message, see section 5.4. App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 7-7
7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action

Example 3: Saving the Data Every Day at Hour 17

Save the recorded data to the CF card every day at hour 17. Use logic box number 3.
Use match time condition 1.

• Setup Screen and Setup Items

Logic box number 3
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action.

Match Time Condition

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Match time timer.

<Other Settings>
Set the display data to be saved automatically. Set the file save interval to 1day or
longer. If a file save interval shorter than 1day is specified, the data is also saved at the
file save interval.
For the procedure to set the recording conditions of the display data, see section 6.1.

7-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 7.2 Setup Examples of Event Action

Example 4: Releasing the Alarm Output Using the USER Key (Alarm 1
Acknowledge Operation)
Release the activated alarm output by pressing the USER key. Use logic box number 4.

• Setup Screen and Setup Items 2

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Timer, Event
action > Event action.

5
<Operation>
Press the USER key to release the activated alarm indication and relay output.

<Related Settings> 6
Set the alarm indication and alarm output relay operation to Hold.
For the procedure to set the alarm indication operation and alarm output relay operation,
see section 3.5.
7

Remote Control Functions (/R1 and /PM1 Options)

Customizing Actions Using the Event Action and
8

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 7-9
 7.3 Changing the Response to Remote Contact
Input Opening and Closing (/R1 and /PM1
options; release number 3 or later)
Set the remote contact input operation.

Setup Screen
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Remote.

Setup Items
• Remote Input > 1 to 8
Specify an operation for each remote control terminal. Five remote control terminals
can be used for pulse input (/PM1 option).
Setting Description
N.O The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from open to
closed, and it falls when the contact input switches from closed to open.
N.C The remote signal rises when the contact input switches from closed to
open, and it falls when the contact input switches from open to closed.

Type Operation
Remote N.O Closed
contact
input Open Open

N.C Closed Closed

Open
Control operation ON

OFF

Note
On models with the pulse input option (/PM1), the remote control input terminals can be
used for pulse input. When pulses are counted, the number of rising pulse edges is counted,
regardless of the Remote Input setting.

7-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 8 Using the Security Function

8.1 Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock 1

Function)
Disable the key operation.
For a description of the function, see section 1.7. 2
This operation cannot be performed on DXs with the /AS1 advanced security
option.

3
Setup Screen
• Selecting the Key Lock Function
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Security, Media save. 4

• Key Operation to Be Disabled

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
7
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Keylock > Key Action, Media or Action of
Function.
• Key action, Media • Action of Function 8

Using the Security Function

9

10

Setup Items 11
• Security > Key
Select Keylock.
Settings Description
Keylock Enables the key lock function. The Keylock item is displayed in the basic setting 12
mode menu.
Login Enables the login function. See section 8.2.

• Keylock > Password App

The password used to release the key lock. (Up to 8 characters, A a # 1 )
The password is displayed as “********” (release number 3 or later).

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 8-1
8.1 Disabling the Key Operation (Key Lock Function)

• Key action, Media/USB or Action of Function

Select whether to lock each item.
Settings Description
Free Key lock not applied.
Lock Disables the operation.

Procedure
• Locking the Keys
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Keylock soft key.

The key lock is activated. The key lock icon appears in the status display section.

• Releasing the Key Lock

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Keylock soft key.

A window appears for you to enter the password.

3. Enter the password and press DISP/ENTER.

The key lock is released. The key lock icon in the status display section disappears.
* The password that you entered is displayed as “********.”

8-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the 1
DX (Login Function)
Only registered users can operate the DX.
For a description of the function, see section 1.7. 2
For information about using this function on a DX with the /AS1 advanced
security option, see the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual,
IM04L41B01-05EN.
3
Setup Screen
• Login Function
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic 4
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Security, Media save.

• Logout Method
7
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Basic settings.
8

Using the Security Function

9

10
• Registering Administrators
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Admin settings. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 8-3
8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function)

• Registering Users
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > User settings.

• User Privileges
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Login > Authority of user >Key Action,
Media or Action of Function.

Setup Items
The login function can be set separately for login through keys and login through
communications.
• Security > Key
Select Login.
Settings Description
Login Enables only registered users to operate the DX using keys. The Login item is
displayed in the basic setting mode menu.
Keylock Enables the key lock function. See section 8.1.
Off Disables the security functions.

• Security > Communication

Settings Description
Login Enables only registered users to operate the DX via communications. The
Login item is displayed in the basic setting mode menu.
Off Disables the security functions.

• User basic settings > Auto logout

Settings Description
Off Does not log out until the logout operation is executed.
1min to 10min Automatically logs out when there is no key operation for a specified time.

8-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 8.2 Enabling Only Registered Users to Operate the DX (Login Function)

• User basic settings > Operation without login 1

Sets the operation that the user can carry out when logged out.
Settings Description
Off Only login operation is available.
Display Allows the user to switch the operation screen in addition to the login operation. 2

• Admin number
Up to five administrators can be registered. Be sure to register at least one
administrator. At least one administrator must be registered to use the login function.
3
• Admin settings > Mode
The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.
Settings Description 4
Off Not register.
Key Log into the DX using keys.
Comm Log into the DX via communications.
Web Log into the operator page and monitor page of the DX using a Web browser.
5
Key+Comm Log into the DX using keys and via communications.

• Admin settings > User name 6

Set the user name. (Up to 20 characters, A a # 1 )
• You cannot register user names that are already registered.
• You cannot register “quit” or a user name containing all spaces.
• Admin settings > Password 7
Set the password. (Release numbers 3 and later: up to 8 characters. Release
numbers 4 and later: up to 20 characters. A a # 1 )
Unregistered password is displayed as “????????.” An entered password is displayed
as “********.” 8
• You cannot register “quit” or a password containing all spaces.

Using the Security Function

• User number
Up to 30 users can be registered. 9
• User settings > Mode
The available settings vary depending on the Security setting.
Settings Description 10
Off Not register.
Key Log into the DX using keys.
Comm Log into the DX via communications.
Web Log into the monitor page of the DX using a Web browser. 11
Key+Comm Log into the DX using keys and via communications.

• User settings > User name, Password

See the explanation for the administrator user name and password. 12
• Authority of user
Settings Description
Off No limitations on the operation. App
1 to 10 Registration number of the operation limitation.

• Authority of user > Key action, Media/USB, Action of Function

Select the “authority of user” preset number from 1 to 10. Index
See section 8.1.

IM 04L41B01-01E 8-5
 8.3 Logging in and Logging Out
This section explains the procedure to log into the DX using keys. For the procedure to
log into the DX via communications, see the Communication Interface User’s Manual,
IM04L41B01-17E.
For information about using this function on a DX with the /AS1 advanced security
option, see the Advanced Security Function (/AS1) User’s Manual, IM04L41B01-
05EN.

Procedure
• Logging In
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
A list of registered user names appears.

2. Press the arrow keys to select a user name, and press DISP/ENTER.
A window appears for you to enter the password.

3. Enter the password* and press DISP/ENTER.

The DX is ready to be operated using keys. The name of the user that is logged in is
displayed in the status display section.
* The password that you enter is displayed as “********.”

• Logging Out
Using Keys
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Logout soft key.

You are logged out from the DX. The user name in the status indication section disappears.

Auto Logout
If auto logout is enabled, you are automatically logged out if there is no key operation
for a specified time.

8-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 8.3 Logging in and Logging Out

• Changing the Password 1

Using Keys
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Password change soft key.

2
A window appears for you to enter the current password.

3. Enter the current password, select ENT, and press DISP/ENTER.

A window appears for you to enter the new password. 3
4. Enter the new password, select ENT, and press DISP/ENTER.
A window appears for you to enter the new password again.

5. Enter the new password, select ENT, and press DISP/ENTER.

The window closes, and the new password is activated.
4

Using the Security Function

9

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 8-7
Blank
Chapter 9 Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, 1

Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation
Channels
This section explains how to set a computation channel’s expression, measurement
2
range, tag, alarm, and recording On/Off. You cannot set expressions or constants while
memory sampling or computation is in progress.
For a description of the function, see section 1.8. 3
Setup Screen
• Expression and Alarm
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Expression, Alarm.
4

• Constants Used in Expressions 7

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Constant.

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

10
• Tag, Memory Sampling On/Off, and Alarm Delay Time of Computation
Channels
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Tag, Memory, Delay. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-1
9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation Channels
• Conditions of TLOG Computation and Rolling Average
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
TLOG, Rolling average.

• D
 isplay for Computation Errors and Handling of Overflow Data in
Statistical Computation
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Math.

Setup Items
• First-CH/Last-CH
Set the target channels.

• Expression/Span
• Math On/Off
Select On for channels to be used.
• Calculation expression
Enter the expression using up to 120 characters.
Pressing the Input soft key displays a window used to enter the expression.
Press the M1/M2 soft key to switch between a screen used to enter values
and characters and a screen used to enter operators and functions. Use
soft keys, arrow keys, and DISP/ENTER to enter an expression.

For details on how to write expressions, see section 9.2.

Note
You cannot use both the USB keyboard (/USB1 option) and the DX keys to enter the equation.
If you press a DX soft key, for example, while you are entering an equation from the USB
keyboard, the entered equation is cleared.

9-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation Channels

• Span_L, Span_U 1
Set the measurement range.
Selectable range of values: –9999999 to 99999999
Selectable decimal places: X.XXXX, XX.XXX, XXX.XX, XXXX.X
• Unit 2
Set the unit of the computed value (Up to 6 characters, Aa#1 ).

• Alarm
The available alarm types are high limit alarm, low limit alarm, delay high limit alarm, 3
and delay low limit alarm.
The range of alarm values is as follows:
Type Value
H, L, T, t Within –9999999 to 99999999 excluding the decimal point 4

For details on setting alarms, see section 3.7.
* If the Math On/Off or calculation expression is changed, the alarms for that channel are turned
Off. 5
• Alarm delay > Time
Set the alarm delay time using an integer in the range of 1 to 3600 s.
6
• Tag > Comment
Sets the tag comment. On a DX with a release number of 3 or later, you can enter up
to 32 characters. On a DX with a release number of 2 or earlier, you can enter up to
16 characters. The characters that can be entered are: A a # 1 . 7
• Tag > No. (Release number 3 or later)
This setting only appears when you have enabled the use of tag numbers.
Sets the tag number. (Up to 16 characters: Aa#1 )
8
• Constant
• Number of constant
Select the constant (K01 to K60) to set.
• Value
9
The selectable range is as follows:

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

–9.9999E+29 to –1.0000E–30, 0, 1.0000E–30 to 9.9999E+29
The number of significant digits of a constant is five. When specifying the constant 10
using exponential notation, set the mantissa less than or equal to 5 digits and the
exponent less than or equal to 2 digits.

• TLOG 11
• Timer type
You can set the timer type to Timer or Match T (match time timer).
• Timer No.
Select the timer number to use. 12
For details on setting the timer, see section 7.1.
For match time timer setting instructions, see section 7.1.
• Sum scale
Set the sum scale to /s to /h to match the unit of the measured value. App
3
Example: If the unit of the measured value is “m /min,” select /min.
Off: Sums as-is the measured data per scan interval.
• Reset Index
To reset the TLOG computed value at each interval, select On.

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-3
9.1 Setting the Expression, Measurement Range, Alarm, Tag, and Data Storage on Computation Channels

• Rolling average
• On/Off
To take the rolling average of the measured results, select On.
• Interval
Select the sampling interval when taking the rolling average from the following: The
sampling interval takes on a value that is an integer multiple of the scan interval.
For example, if the sampling interval is set to 5 s when the scan interval is 2 s, the
actual sampling interval is 6 s.
• Number of samples
Set the number of samples for the rolling average using an integer between 1 and
1500.
The rolling average time is equal to the sampling interval × the number of samples.

Note
• If the number of data points to be averaged has not reached the specified number of
samples immediately after computation is started, the average of the available data is
calculated.
• Computation error data is excluded from the rolling average computation.
• If the computed data exceeds the upper or lower limit, the data is clipped at the upper or
lower limit, and the rolling average is computed. The upper and lower limit is “±100000000”
excluding the decimal point. The decimal place is the same as that of the span lower limit.

• Memory sample > On/Off

Select On to record the computed data of the target channels.

• Math
• Value on Error
Specify whether to set the display for a computation error to +Over or –Over.
• Value on Overflow > SUM, AVE
Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the SUM or AVE
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Settings Description
Error Sets the computed result to computation error.
Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.
Limit Uses a limit value in place of the overflow data and continues the computation.

• Value on Overflow > MAX, MIN, P-P

Specify how to handle overflow data when it is detected in the MAX, MIN, or P-P
computation of TLOG or CLOG. This setting is also applied to report generation.
Settings Description
Over Uses the overflow data as-is.
Skip Discards the overflow data and continues the computation.

9-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.2 Writing Expressions 1

This section explains the meaning and how to write expressions.

2
Common Items
Follow the rules below when writing expressions.
• Use up to 120 characters to write expressions.
• The precedence of computing terms can be specified using parentheses. 3
• Specify the channels in the expression using channel numbers.
Example: 1, 12, and 101
• The one-digit number of constants (K), communication input data (C), remote input
terminal status (D), pulse input (P, Q), internal switch (S), alarm output relay status 4
(I), flag (F), and recording (memory sampling) status (M) in the expression can be
denoted as in “01” and “1.”
Example: K01, K1, C01, C1, D01, D1, P01, P1, Q01, Q1, S01, S1, I01, I1, F01, and F1.
• The data of the previous scan is used in the computation for its own channel number 5
and channel numbers greater than its own channel number in the expression.
• Special computation (HOLD, RESET, and CARRY) and conditional expressions are
written at the beginning of the expression.
6
Order of Precedence in Computations
The order of precedence of computation in expressions is as follows:
Type Computing Element
(high order of precedence) 7
Function ABS(), SQR(), LOG(), LN(), EXP(),
TLOG.MAX(), TLOG.MIN(), TLOG.AVE(),
TLOG.SUM(), TLOG.P-P(), CLOG.MAX(),
CLOG.MIN(), CLOG.AVE(), CLOG.SUM(),

Special computation and conditional expression

CLOG.P-P()
PRE, HOLD, RESET, CARRY, [a?b:c]
8
Power **
Logical negation NOT
Multiplication and division *, /
Addition and subtraction +, – 9
Greater than and less than .GT., .LT., GE., LE.
Equal and not equal .EQ., .NE.

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Logical product AND
Logical sum and exclusive logical sum OR, XOR
(low order of precedence) 10

Limitations
The following limitations exists in writing expressions.
Type Limitations
11
TLOG computation A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses.
Only one TLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
CLOG computation Number of channels that can be written in the parentheses is 30 channels or less.
A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses. 12
Only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single expression.
PRE A computing element cannot be written inside the parentheses.
HOLD(a):b Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one HOLD computation can be specified in a single expression. App
RESET(a):b Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one RESET computation can be specified in a single expression.
CARRY(a):b Can only be written at the beginning of an expression.
Only one CARRY computation can be specified in a single expression.
Only TLOG.SUM can be written in “b.”
Index
Conditional equation RESET, CARRY, or HOLD cannot be written to “a,” “b,” or “c.” Other computing
[a?b:c] elements cannot be combined (example: [a?b:c]+001). However, coditional
equations can be specified for a, b, and c.

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-5
9.2 Writing Expressions

Four Arithmetic Operation

Expression Example
• Addition 001+002
(Determines the sum of the measured values of channel 1 and channel 2.)
• Subtraction 001–002
(Determines the difference of the measured values of channel 1 and
channel 2.)
• Multiplication 001*K03
(Multiplies constant K03 to the measured value of channel 1.)
• Division 001/K02
(Divides the measured value of channel 1 by constant K02.)

Power and Other Computations

Expression Example
• Power 001**002
(Determines the measured value of channel 1 to the power of
the measured value of channel 2.)
• Square root SQR(002)
(Determines the square root of the measured value of channel 2.)
• Absolute value ABS(002)
(Determines the absolute value of the measured value of
channel 2.)
• Common logarithm LOG(001)
(Determines the common logarithm (log10) of the measured
value of channel 1.)
• Natural logarithm LN(001)
(Determines the natural logarithm of the measured value of
channel 1.)
• Exponent EXP(001)
(Determines e to the power of the measured value of channel 1.)

Relational Computation
Expression Example
002.LT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

002.GT.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

002.EQ.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

002.NE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is not equal to the measured value of channel 3, the
computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

002.GE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is greater than or equal to the measured value of
channel 3, the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

002.LE.003
If the measured value of channel 2 is less than or equal to the measured value of channel 3,
the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, the result is “0.”

9-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.2 Writing Expressions

Logical Computation 1
Checks whether the two data values, e1 and e2 (e1 only for NOT), are zeroes or non-
zeroes, and computes according to the conditions.
AND
Logical product 2
(Syntax) e1ANDe2
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are both non-zeroes, the computed
result is “1.” Otherwise, it is “0.”
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 → e1ANDe2 = 0
3
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0 → e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1ANDe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1ANDe2 = 1 4
OR
Logical sum
(Syntax) e1ORe2 5
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are both zeroes, the computed result is
“0.” Otherwise, it is “1.”
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 → e1ORe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0 → e1ORe2 = 1
6
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1ORe2 = 1
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1ORe2 = 1

7
XOR
Exclusive OR
(Syntax) e1XORe2
(Condition) If the two data values e1 and e2 are zero and non-zero or non-zero and 8
zero, the computed result is “1.” Otherwise, it is “0.”
(Explanation) e1 = 0, e2 = 0 → e1XORe2 = 0
e1 ≠ 0, e2 = 0 → e1XORe2 = 1
e1 = 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1XORe2 = 1 9
e1 ≠ 0, e2 ≠ 0 → e1XORe2 = 0

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

NOT 10
Logical negation
(Syntax) NOTe1
(Condition) The result is the inverse of the status of data e1 (zero or non-zero).
(Explanation) e1 = 0 → NOTe1 = 1 11
e1 ≠ 0 → NOTe1 = 0

Expression Example
01-02OR03.GT.04 12
Determines the OR of the computed results of “01-02” and “03.GT.04”.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-7
9.2 Writing Expressions

TLOG Computation
In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element in e1, an
internal switch (S), a relay (I), or flag (F) cannot be written. In addition, only one TLOG
computation can be specified in a single computing equation.
TLOG.MAX( )
Maximum value
(Syntax) TLOG.MAX(e1)
(Condition) Determines the maximum value of channel e1.

TLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax) TLOG.MIN(e1)
(Condition) Determines the minimum value of channel e1.

TLOG.AVE( )
Average value
(Syntax) TLOG.AVE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the average value of channel e1.

TLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax) TLOG.SUM(e1)
(Condition) Determines the sum of channel e1.

TLOG.P-P( )
Maximum - minimum value
(Syntax) TLOG.P-P(e1)
(Condition) Determines the maximum - minimum value of channel e1.

Expression Example
TLOG.MAX(01)+K01*SQR(02)

Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed

TLOG.AVE(01)+TLOG.AVE(02)
Reason: TLOG appears twice in one equation.

TLOG.AVE(ABS(01))
Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.

9-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.2 Writing Expressions

CLOG Computation 1
Only data of measurement channels and computation channels can be used in the
CLOG computation. Up to 30 channels can be written in the parentheses.
In the explanation below, an expression containing a computing element cannot be
written to e1, etc. In addition, only one CLOG computation can be specified in a single 2
computing equation.
CLOG.SUM( )
Sum value
(Syntax) CLOG.SUM(e1.e2.e4-e6)
3
(Condition) Determines the sum of the data of channels e1, e2, e4, e5, and e6 that
are measured at the same time.

CLOG.MAX( ) 4
Maximum value
(Syntax) CLOG.MAX(e1.e2.e4-e6)
(Condition) Determines the maximum value among the data of channels e1, e2, e4,
e5, and e6 that are measured at the same time.
5
CLOG.MIN( )
Minimum value
(Syntax) CLOG.MIN(e1.e2.e5.e7) 6
(Condition) Determines the minimum value among the data of channels e1, e2, e5,
and e7 that are measured at the same time.

CLOG.AVE( ) 7
Average value
(Syntax) CLOG.AVE(e1-e6)
(Condition) Determines the average value among the data of channels e1 to e6 that
are measured at the same time.
8
CLOG.P-P( )
Maximum - minimum value
(Syntax) CLOG.P-P(e1.e2.e5.e7) 9
(Condition) Determines the difference between the maximum and minimum values

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

among the data of channels e1, e2, e5, and e7 that are measured at the
same time.
10
Expression Example
CLOG.MAX(001.002.104-106)+K01*SQR(002)

Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed

11
CLOG.AVE(001.003.005)+CLOG.AVE(002.004.006)
Reason: CLOG appears twice in one equation.

CLOG.AVE(001.ABS(001)) 12
Reason: A computing element is used inside the parentheses.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-9
9.2 Writing Expressions

Special Computation
PRE( )
(Syntax) PRE(e1)
(Condition) Determines the previous value of e1.

HOLD(a):b
(Syntax) HOLD(a):b
(Condition) When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value is held.

RESET(a):b
(Syntax) RESET(a):b
(Condition) When a is zero, b is carried out to derive the computed value.
Otherwise, the previous computed value of b is reset, and b is carried
out to derive the computed value.

CARRY(a):b
(Syntax) CARRY(a):b
(Condition) Only TLOG.SUM can be specified for b. If the computed value X of b is
less than a, the computed result is X. If X is greater than or equal to a,
the computed result is the excess (X – a).
(Description) When a value such as the flow rate is summed and the threshold value
is reached or exceeded, the sum value is reset while carrying over the
amount that exceeded the threshold value.

Expression Example
Expression that sums the values of channel 1 and resets the value when it reaches or
exceeds 10000
K01 = 10000
CARRY(K01):TLOG.SUM(001)

Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed

002+HOLD(K01):TLOS.SUM(001)
Reason: HOLD is not at the beginning of the expression.

RESET(101.GT.K01):TLOG.SUM(001)+RESET(101.GT.K01):002
Reason: RESET appears twice in one equation.

Conditional Expression
[a?b:c]
(Syntax) [001.GT.K01?002:003]
(Condition) If the measured value of channel 1 is greater than constant K01, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 2. Otherwise, the
computed result is the measured value of channel 3.

Examples of Equations That Are Not Allowed

[001.GT.K01?002:003]*K02
Reason: Used in combination with another computing element.

Nested Conditional Expressions

A conditional expression can be written to Expression1, Expression2, and Expression3
in the equation [Expression1?Expression2:Expression3]. For example, the following
expression is allowed: [Equation1?[Equation2-1?Equation2-2:Equation2-3]:[Equation3-
1?Equation3-2:Equation3-3]]

Expressions can be nested as long as the number of characters of the expression does
not exceed 120 characters.

9-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.3 Displaying the Computation Channels 1

Computation channels can be assigned to groups and displayed in a similar manner to

measurement channels. 2
For a description of the function, see section 1.8.
Setup Screen
• Color
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
3
Color.

6
• Zone Display and Scale Display
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Zone, Scale.
7

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

• Bar Graph Display
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Bar. 10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-11
9.3 Displaying the Computation Channels

• Partial Expanded Display

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Partial.
* The Partial command appears in the menu if you set Partial to On in Basic Setting Mode.

• Alarm Marks
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Alarm mark.

• Color Scale Band

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Color scale band.

9-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.3 Displaying the Computation Channels

Setup Items 1
• Group of channel, First-CH, and Last-CH
Select the target channel range.

• Color 2
See section 5.5.

• Zone
See section 5.6. 3
• Partial
See section 5.9.

• Bar graph 4
See section 5.11.

• Scale
See section 5.7. 5
• Alarm mark color and Color scale band
See section 5.8.
6

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-13
 9.4 Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting
Computation, and Releasing Computation Data
Dropout Display
Setup Screen
• Action Taken When the START Key Is Pressed
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Math channel >
Math start action.

Setup Items
• Math start action > Math start
Settings Description
Off Does not start the computation even when the START key is pressed.
Start Starts the computation when the START key is pressed.
Rst+St Resets the computed result up to then and starts the computation when the
START key is pressed.

Procedure
• Starting the Computation
• Starting the Computation Simultaneously with the Memory Sampling
Press START. Computation starts simultaneously with the start of the memory
sampling. The computation icon appears in the status display section.
* Math start must be set to Start or Rst+St.

• Starting Only the Computation

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Math start soft key.

Computation starts, and the computation icon is displayed in the status display section.

9-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.4 Starting/Stopping Computation, Resetting Computation, and Releasing Computation Data Dropout
Display

• Stopping the Computation 1

• Stopping the Computation Simultaneously with the Memory Sampling
1. Press STOP.
A confirmation dialog box appears.
2

2. Select Mem+Math and press DISP/ENTER.

The memory sampling and computation stop, and the computation icon in the status display
5
section disappears.

• Stopping Only the Computation

1. In the operation mode, press FUNC. 6
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Math stop soft key.

The computation stops, and the computation icon in the status display section disappears.
7
Note
When the computation is stopped, the computed data of the computation channel is held at the
value that existed immediately before the computation is stopped. When memory sampling is in
progress, the held value is recorded. 8
• Resetting the Computed Results on All Computation Channels
This operation can be carried out when the computation is stopped. You can carry out this
operation even while the computation is in progress on DXs with release number 2 or later. 9
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Math reset soft key. 10

The computed results of all computation channels are reset.

• Releasing the Computation Data Dropout Display

This operation can be carried out when a computation data dropout occurs. When a
computation data dropout occurs, the computation icon turns yellow.
11
1. In the operation mode, press FUNC.
The FUNC key menu appears.

2. Press the Math ACK soft key. 12

The computation icon returns to white.
* Math ACK is displayed in the FUNC key menu only when a computation data dropout
occurs.
App
Note
A computation data dropout occurs when the computation process cannot be completed within
the scan interval. If computation data dropout occurs frequently, lessen the load on the CPU by
reducing the number of computation channels or setting a longer scan interval. If a computation Index
data dropout occurs during memory sampling, the data immediately before the dropout is
recorded as the computed data of the scan interval in which the dropout occurred.

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-15
 9.5 Creating Reports
Set how the reports are created.
For a description of the function, see section 1.8.
Setup Screen
• Report Computation Type
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Environment tab > Report.

• Report Type and Time of Creation

Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Report > Basic settings.

• Source Channels
Press MENU (to switch to setting mode), hold down FUNC for 3 s (to switch to basic
setting mode), and select the Menu tab > Report > Report settings.

9-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.5 Creating Reports

Setup Items 1
• Report > Report select > 1, 2, 3, and 4
Select the type of data to output as reports. The only data type that can be set more
than once is Off. You cannot set 1 to Off.
2
Settings Description
Off Does not output reports.
Ave Outputs the average value.
Max Outputs the maximum value. 3
Min Outputs the minimum value.
Sum Outputs the sum value.
Inst Outputs the instantaneous value.
4
• Report > File type
Set this item when creating two types of reports such as daily report and monthly
report.
Settings Description
5
Separate Saves each type of report to a separate file.For information about how files are
divided, see section 1.4.
Combine Saves the report data of two types in a single file.
Seprt2 Saves each type of report to a separate file. For information about how files are
6
divided, see section 1.4, or see section 1.2 in the Advanced Security Function
(/AS1) User’s Manual. You cannot select Use Template when Seprt2 is selected.
When you change the setting from Combine or Separate to Seprt2, or vice versa, the report data
in the internal memory is cleared. 7
• Report > Use Template
When you want to use a report template to create reports, select Use. You cannot use
this function when Report > File type is set to Seprt2. The setting is fixed at Not. 8
• Report set > Report kind
Select the type of report to be created.
Settings Description 9
Hour Creates hourly reports.

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

Day Creates daily reports.
H+D Creates hourly and daily reports.
Day+Week Creates daily and weekly reports. 10
D+M Creates daily and monthly reports.

• Report set > Date/Day of the week, Time (hour)

Set the date or day of the week and the time when the report is to be created. The 11
specified date/time is when the report file is divided. Set the values in the range
indicated below. Items with a dash are invalid.
Report Type Date Day of Week Time
12
Hour - - 0 to 23
Day 1 to 28* - 0 to 23
H+D - - 0 to 23
Day+Week - SUN to SAT 0 to 23 App
D+M 1 to 28* - 0 to 23
* You cannot specify 29, 30, or 31.

Report Time and Date/Time When the Report File Is Divided

Index
Example: When the Date of a daily report is set to 1 and the Time (hour) is set to
18:00
A daily report is created every day at hour 18.
The file storing the report is divided at 18:00 on day 1 of each month.
IM 04L41B01-01E 9-17
9.5 Creating Reports

• Report channel number

The report is output in order by this number.

• Report channel number > On/Off

Select On for the report channels to be used.

• Report channel number > Channel

Set the channel to assign to the report channel. All channels can be assigned, but
reports are not created for channels set to Skip or Off even if they are assigned.
In the stacked bar graph display (see section 4.10 for details), report data is displayed
in the following groups. However, only channels that have the same unit as the first
channel in the group are displayed.

Report Group DX1002, DX1004, DX1006, DX1012,

DX1002N, DX1004N DX1006N, DX1012N
1 R01 to R06 R01 to R06
2 R07 to R12 R07 to R12
3 - R13 to R18
4 - R19 to R24

• Report channel number > Sum scale

Set the sum scale to /s to /day to match the unit of the measured value.
3
Example: If the unit of the measured value is “m /min,” select /min.
Off: Sums as-is the measured data per scan interval.

• Handling of Overflow Data

Overflow data is handled in the same way as it is in statistical computations (TLOG
and CLOG).
See section 9.1.

Procedure
• Starting/Stopping the Report Function
Starting the memory sampling starts the report function. Likewise, stopping the
memory sampling stops the report function.

• Displaying the Reports

See section 4.5.

• Saving the Reports

See section 1.4.

9-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 1
4 and later)
This section explains how to make a report template. 2
To create a report template, you put keywords and text into cells in Excel.
Keywords specify the data that will be entered into a cell. Other text is included in the
report as it is written. Save the report templates that you create in XML spreadsheet
format. The report template file name extension is .xml. 3
For a description of the function, see section 1.8.
For the setting procedure, see section 9.5.
To load or save a report template, see section 6.10.
4
Template Example
Channel Number $Ch(R01)$ $Ch(R02)$
Name Tank 1 temperature Tank 1 pressure
Unit $Unit(R01)$ $Unit(R02)$ 5
$ReportDataTime(Hour)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$
$Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$
$Repeat$ $Repeat$ $Repeat$

Report Example 6
Channel Number TIC-001 PIC-002
Name Tank 1 temperature Tank 1 pressure
Unit
2010/04/01 00:00:00
°C
76.5
kPa
45.6
7
2010/04/01 01:00:00 78.9 56.7
2010/04/01 02:00:00 77.7 50.8
8

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

10

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-19
9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)

Keyword Format
Keywords are written by themselves or with parameters.
$ Keyword(parameter)$ Example: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,00,23)$

• Basic Rules
• The dollar sign on the left indicates the start of a keyword, and the dollar sign on
the right indicates the end of a keyword.
• You can only write keywords using letters of the alphabet, dollar signs, parentheses,
commas, and spaces. You can put a space after an opening parenthesis, before
and after a comma, and before a closing parenthesis. There is no distinction
between uppercase and lowercase letters. You cannot use a dollar sign inside of a
keyword.
• The maximum length of a keyword, including spaces, is 100 characters.

• Parameter Rules
• Parameters are enclosed in parentheses.
• Multiple parameters (up to 4) are separated by commas.
• Examples of how parameters can be omitted are shown below.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R01, ,23)$ The third parameter is omitted.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R01, 01, )$ or The fourth parameter is omitted.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R01, 01)$

• Rules That Relate to Excel

• Set the data format by setting the cell format.
• Set the proper format for each keyword’s cell in the cell’s Number properties.
• The keyword in a cell is only valid when the keyword name and parameters are
all in the same format. When a keyword’s font size or some other property is not
consistent, it is invalid.
$ReportDataSum(Hour, R01, 00, 23)$ The font size of “Hour” is different, so the
keyword is invalid.
• When a single cell contains text and a keyword, only the format of the keyword has
to be consistent. The format of the text can be different.
Date and time: $DateTime$ The format of the keyword is consistent,
so it is valid.

9-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)

Keyword Definitions 1
For examples of how to use the keywords, see “Report Template Examples.”

• System Keywords
One keyword produces one item of data.
Keyword Description Format
2
Time Current time on the DX Time
Date Current date on the DX Date
DateTime Current date and time on the DX
DateTimeString Current date and time on the DX Character string 3
Serial DX serial number
FileHeader DX file header
*1
Ch Channel number
4
*1
Tag Tag comments
*1
ChId (ChId) Tag number
*1
Unit Unit
*1 The parameter is the report channel number (it cannot be omitted).

5
• Report Data Keywords
One keyword produces multiple items of data.
Keyword Description Format
ReportDataDate Report creation date*1 Date 6
ReportDataTime Report creation time*1 Time
ReportDataDateTime Report creation date and time*1 Date
ReportDataDateTimeString Report creation date and time*1 Character string
ReportDataStatus Report data status*2 Character string
ReportDataSum Report data sum*2 Number or character string*3 7
ReportDataInst Instantaneous report data value*2
ReportDataAve Average report data value*2
ReportDataMax Maximum report data value*2
ReportDataMin Minimum report data value*2 8
*1 List the parameters in this order: report type (cannot be omitted), report start date and time
(can be omitted), report end date and time (can be omitted).
*2 List the parameters in this order: report type (cannot be omitted), report channel number
(cannot be omitted), report start date and time (can be omitted), report end date and time (can 9
be omitted).

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

*3 The decimal point type (dot or comma) depends on whether the converted data is a value or
character string.
Whether the converted data is a value or character string depends on the format of the cell 10
that the keyword is written in. When the cell format is numerical, the decimal point type is
determined by the cell format. When the cell format is text, the decimal point type matches
the format of the report data.
11
• Special Keywords
Keyword Description Format
Repeat Specifies the output location of the data that The same as the corresponding
corresponds to a report data keyword. keyword. 12
Comment Adds comments to the template. Nothing is –
displayed after template conversion.

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-21
9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)

• Parameters
Parameter Format Range Description
Report kind Hour Hourly report
Day Daily report
Week Weekly report
Month Monthly report
Report channel number Rxx R01 to R60 DX report channel
(xx are numerals) (varies by model)
Start date or time xx 00 to 23 Specifies the start time
(xx are numerals) 01 to 31 Specifies the start date
End date or time xx 00 to 23 Specifies the end time
(xx are numerals) 01 to 31 Specifies the end date

Starting and Ending Dates and Times

Use the start date and time and end date and time to specify the parts of the report
file’s report data that you will output to the file that you create with the template. You can
specify the starting and ending dates (for daily reports) or times (for hourly reports).
Example when the report type is hourly and the report was created at 18:00.

$ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,20,22)$ $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,16,19)$

Report
18:00 19:00 20:00 21:00 22:00 16:00 17:00 18:00 19:00
creation time

Report file 1 Report file 2

Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,20,22)$
From the hourly data from 19:00:01 to 22:00:00, the report data (sums) of report
channel R01 for 20:00, 21:00, and 22:00 is output.

Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,16,19)$
From the hourly data from 15:00:01 to 19:00:00, the report data (sums) of report
channel R01 for 16:00, 17:00, and 18:00 is output. Because the report data for
19:00 is in another report file, it is not output.

Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01)$
One file’s worth (18:00:01 to 18:00:00) of data from report channel R01 is output,
starting from 19:00.
When you omit the start and end times for an hourly report, the data for the hour
after the report creation time until the 24th hour is output. For daily reports, the data
for the day after the report creation time until the end of the month is output.

Keyword: $ReportDataSum(Hour,R01,08)$
From the hourly data from 07:00:01 to 18:00:00, the report data (sums) of report
channel R01 for 08:00 to 18:00 is output.

9-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)

Report Template Examples 1

• System Keyword Examples
Mixing a keyword and text
File header: $FileHeader$
2
Date and time: $DateTime$
↓
File header: DX2000
3
Date and time: 2010/01/01 12:00:000

Mixing multiple keywords and text

Device number: $Serial$ File Header: $FileHeader$
4
↓
Device number: ABCDEFG File Header: DX2000
5

• Report Data Keyword Examples

The following examples are for when the hourly report data for report channel R01 is
101, 102, 103, 104, and 105 and the hourly report data for report channel R02 is 201,
6
202, 203, 204, 205, and 206.

The $Repeat$ command applies to the closest keyword above the command in the
same column. 7
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$ 101
$Repeat$ 102
$Repeat$ 103
$Repeat$ → 104
8
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$ 201
$Repeat$ 202
$Repeat$ 203
$Repeat$ 204 9
$Repeat$ 205

Computation and Report Functions (/M1 and /PM1 Options)

The $Repeat$ command applies to the keyword above it in the same column, even
when that keyword is not directly above the command. 10
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$ 101
$Unit(R01)$ °C
$Repeat$ 102
$Unit(R01)$ → °C 11
$Repeat$ $Unit(R01)$ 103 °C

You can mix system keywords, report data keywords, and text. If the data specified by
a keyword does not exist, nothing is output. 12
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$($Unit(R01)$) 101(°C)
$Repeat$ 102
$Repeat$ 103
$Repeat$($Unit(R01)$) → 104(°C)
App
$Repeat$(°C) 105(°C)
$Repeat$

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 9-23
9.6 Creating a Report Template (Release numbers 4 and later)

Keywords in merged cells are affected by the leftmost cells above them.

$ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$
$Repeat$ $Repeat$
$Repeat$ $Repeat$
$Repeat$ $Repeat$
↓
101 201
102 202
203
103 204

When a keyword is written incorrectly or its formatting is wrong, the keyword will be
output to the file as it is written.

$ReportDataInst(Hour,R)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R)$
→
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$ 201
$Repeat$ $Repeat$
$Repeat$ 202
$Repeat$ 203
$Repeat$ 204

*1
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R01)$ 101
$ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$ $ReportDataInst(Hour,R02)$

*1 When there are multiple system keywords in the same cell, only the first keyword is valid.

9-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 10 Troubleshooting

10.1 A List of Messages 1

There are cases in which error codes and messages are displayed on the screen during
operation. A list of the possible error codes and messages are given in the table below. 2
Communication error codes and messages are also listed.
Error responses to communication commands are output in English.

3
Errors Related to Parameter Settings
• Setting Errors
Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
1 System error. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer. 4
2 Incorrect date or time setting. Enter a correct value.
3 A disabled channel is selected. Specify a channel that is not set to Skip or Off.
Specify a channel that is installed.
4 Incorrect function parameter. See chapter 3 the communication manual. 5
5 The input numerical value exceeds the set range. Enter a proper value.
6 Incorrect input character string. Enter a proper character string.
7 Too many characters. Enter the correct number of characters.
8 Incorrect input mode. Specify a correct mode.
See section 3.3. 6
9 Incorrect input range code. Specify a correct range code.
See section 3.3.
11 Range settings are not same within the selected channels. Specify channels with the same range setting.
See section 3.9. 7
12 A disabled batch group is selected. Set the last batch group greater than the first batch
group.
See section 2.2 in IM04L41B01-03E.
13 Cannot set a trip line for a display group that is OFF. Check the display group settings.
See section 5.1 and section 2.2 in IM04L41B01-03E.
8
21 Cannot set an alarm for a skipped channel. Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See section 3.7.
22 The upper and lower span limits are equal. Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3. 9
23 The upper and lower scale limits are equal. Cannot be set to the same value.
See section 3.3.
24 The lower limit of the span band is greater than the upper limit. Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3. 10
25 The lower limit of the scale band is greater than the upper limit. Set the lower limit less than the upper limit.
See section 3.3.

Troubleshooting
30 The partial boundary value exceeds the range of the span. Set the boundary value in the range of “the minimum
span value + 1 digit” to “the maximum span value – 1
digit.” 11
See section 5.9.
31 Partial-expansion display is set ON for a SKIPPED channel. Cannot be specified on channels set to Skip.
See sections 3.3 and 5.9
35 The upper and lower limits of the display band are equal. Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5. 12
See section 5.6.
36 The lower limit of the display band is greater than the upper Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
limit. See section 5.6.
37 The display band is narrower than 4% of the entire display. Set the upper limit greater than the lower limit + 5.
App
See section 5.6.
40 Incorrect group set character string. Check the syntax.
See section 5.1.
41 There is no specified input channel. Specify a channel that is installed.
Operation Guide and section 5.1. Index
42 Exceeded the number of channels which can be set. Up to 6 channels per group.
See section 5.1.

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-1
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section

43 A channel number cannot repeat in a group. Check that a channel is not registered twice.
See section 5.1.
45 There is no character string saved in the clipboard. Copy a character string to the clipboard.
46 The character string saved in the clipboard is too long. Paste a character string with the specified number of
characters.
47 Start and end time cannot match. Check the starting and ending times.
See section 2.1.
48 Invalid or missing DST time settings. Check the starting and ending times.
See section 2.1.
61 There is no channel specified by the MATH expression. Check the channel number specified by the expression.
See sections 1.8 and 9.1.
62 MATH expression grammar is incorrect. Check that the expression grammar is correct.
See section 9.2.
63 MATH expression sequence is incorrect. Check that the operator used in the expression in
relation to the applicable operands meets the grammar
requirements.
See section 9.2.
64 MATH upper and lower span values are equal. Set the upper limit not equal to the lower limit.
See section 9.1.
65 Too many operators for MATH expression. The maximum number of operators in an expression
has been exceeded. Reduce the number of operators,
such as by splitting up the expression into multiple
computation channels.See section 9.2.
70 Nonexistent constant specified in MATH expression. Check the constant number specified by the expression.
See section 9.1.
71 Set range of the MATH constant is exceeded. Check the selectable range.
See section 9.1.
80 This username is already registered. Register another user name.
See section 8.2.
81 All space or ‘quit’ string cannot be specified. Change the character string.
See section 8.2.
83 This user ID and password combination is already in use. Change the user ID or the password.
See section 2.1 in the advanced security manual.
84 The login password has not been set up. Set a password.
See section 8.2.
85 The login password is incorrect. Check the password. If you lost the password, ask your
administrator to reset it.
See sections 8.2 and 8.3.
86 The key-lock release password is incorrect. Check the password. If you lost the password, it must
be reset.
See section 8.1.
87 This key is locked. Release the key lock.
See section 8.1.
88 This function is locked. Release the key lock.
See section 8.1.
89 Press [FUNC] key to login. Log in.
See section 8.3.
90 No permission to enter to the SETUP mode. Check the keylock or login settings.
See sections 8.2 and 8.3.
91 Password is incorrect. Enter the correct password. If you lost the password, it
must be reset.
See sections 8.2 and 8.3.
92 Press [ESC] key to change to the operation mode. Press the ESC key.
93 String including space or all space cannot be specified. Spaces are not allowed in the Web browser user name
and password.
See section 1.5 in the communication manual.
94 More than one address cannot be specified. Only a single sender is allowed.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
95 Number entered exceeds channel number range. Check the syntax of the Modbus command.
Use another command. See sections 1.10 and 2.6 in the communication
manual.

10-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section 1

96 This menu is locked. Check the key lock setting. Release the key lock.
See section 8.1.
97 This function is locked. To use the function, login as a user who has permission
to use it.
See section 8.2 in the advanced security manual.
2
100 IP address doesn’t belong to class A, B, or C. Check the IP address.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
101 The result of the masked IP address is all 0s or 1s. Check the subnet mask.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual. 3
102 SUBNET mask is incorrect. Check the subnet mask.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
103 The net part of default gateway is not equal to that of IP Check the IP address.
address. See section 1.3 in the communication manual. 4
105 This port number is already in use. Please enter a different Enter a different port number for each function.
number. See section 6.1 in the communication manual.
110 This user name is not registered. Log in as a registered user.
See section 8.2 and section 2.1 in the advanced
security manual.
5
111 The login user ID is incorrect. Enter the correct user ID.
See the advanced security manual.
112 Password must use more than 6 alphanumeric characters. The password must be between 6 and 20 characters in
length. 6
See section 2.1 in the advanced security manual.
113 Password entered is incorrect. Enter the correct password.
See section 8.3 and section 2.2 in the advanced

114 This user name is invalid.

security manual.
Have a system administrator clear the “invalid user”
7
status.
See the advanced security manual.
116 This user name cannot be specified. The user name is reserved.
See section 8.2 and the advanced security manual. 8
117 This password is not effective. Because the wrong password has been entered
consecutively for more than the permissible number of
times, this user is invalid. Have an administrator clear
the “invalid user” status.
See section 2.2 in the advanced security manual.
9
119 This user name is unable to use this mode. A user-level user cannot enter the Basic Setting mode
See section 8.2.
120 Measured value is incorrect. (in ascending order) Set the calibration correction value to a value greater
than the previous value. 10
See section 3.9.
121 A user is already logged in. Another user has logged in with the same name or is

Troubleshooting
logging in.
See section 1.3 in the advanced security manual. 11
122 Measured value exceeds the range setting. Check the channel input or the channel range setting.
See sections 3.3 and 3.9.
124 Password entry cannot be performed. You cannot use bar codes to enter a password.
See section 2.9 in the advanced security manual.
125 Character entry cannot be performed. The DX is not showing a display used to enter character 12
strings.
See section 2.11.
126 You cannot use the same password. Specify a different password.
See section 8.3. App
127 Report kind overlaps and cannot be set up. Change the overlapped report data type.
See section 9.5.
128 “Logout” cannot be set to “Hide”. See sections 5.17 and 8.3.
129 IP address is not set. Set the IP address of the DX.
Index
See section 1.3 in the communication manual
131 You have exceeded the available channel capacity. You cannot connect more than 240 channels.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-3
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section

132 You have exceeded the available number of commands. The maximum number of commands that can be sent is
16. The modules that can be set with a single command
are consecutive modules that can be automatically set.
Change the MW100 module configuration so that there
are no empty slots.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
133 External I/O auto setting information is not available. Below are the possible causes. Check them.
• The MW100 is in calibration mode. Change to the
setting mode or measurement mode.
• The measurement module may not have been
detected. Perform system reconfiguration.
• There are no modules that can be automatically set.
Check the modules.
• An IP address has not been assigned to the MW100.
Set the IP address.
• The Modbus server of the MW100 is turned OFF. Turn
ON the server.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
134 Auto setting has already been executed. You cannot set an MW100 that has been automatically
set.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
135 External I/O cannot be found. Check the Ethernet connection.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
136 External I/O start cannot be executed. The current MW100 settings do not allow the
measurement to be started. Check the settings.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
137 DNS for this device is not set. Set the DNS of the DX.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
138 Cannot create object. The maximum allowed number was This occurs when the custom display is generated.
exceeded. See section 2.2 in IM04L41B01-04E.
139 This dependency is not possible. This occurs when the custom display is generated.
See section 1.10 in IM04L41B01-04E.
140 You cannot set this while you are logged in. You cannot change the registered settings of a user that
is logged in.
See the advanced security manual.
141 You cannot set multiple channels. During memory sampling, you cannot configure settings
for multiple consecutive channels at the same time.
See section 1.5 in the advanced security manual.
142 Another user is configuring settings. You can perform operations after the user who is in
setting mode or basic setting mode logs out or returns
to operation mode.
See the section 1.3 in advanced security manual.

10-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

• Execution Errors 1
Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
150 This action is not possible because sampling is in progress. Stop the memory sampling and then execute.
See section 6.4.
151 This action is not possible during sampling or calculating. Stop the memory sampling and then execute. 2
See sections 6.4 and 9.4.
152 This action is not possible because saving is in progress. Wait until the saving is complete.
153 This action is not possible because formatting is in progress. Wait until the formatting is complete.
154 Message not accepte because message limit was reached. The limit is 50 messages.
See section 5.4.
3
155 The message is not written while sampling is stopped. Start the memory sampling and then execute.
See section 6.4.
156 There are no channels to be saved to the memory. Set the channels to be saved.
See sections 6.1 and 9.1. 4
157 This function is not possible at this time. Check the DX status.
158 Exceeds time deviation setting. When synchronizing the clock through remote control.
When you specified time that exceeds the time deviation
limit on DXs with Advanced security function (/AS1
option). (Firmware version number 4.11 and later)
5
See section 2.3.
159 It is outside the postscript message write-in range. Add message can be written to the past section of the
data being memory sampled.
See section 5.4. 6
162 Data storage is already started. Memory sampling is in progress on the batch group.
See section 3.2 in IM04L41B01-03E.
163 Data storage is already stopped. Memory sampling on the batch group has already been
stopped.
See IM04L41B01-03E.
7
164 This action is not possible because there is a bar code data Check the text that the barcode reader scanned.
error. See section 2.11.
170 End process can’t proceed, because setting file is not saved to When you switch from setting mode to operation mode
Media. or basic setting mode, the DX automatically saves the 8
changed settings to the CF card. This message appears
when the DX cannot save the changed settings. Check
the CF card.

173 Data save is not possible because of insufficient media

See section 1.5 in the advanced security manual.
Change the external storage medium.
9
capacity.
174 Cannot execute because of failure to save unsaved setting file. The DX cannot save an unsaved setting file to the CF
card. Check the CF card.
See the advanced security manual. 10
175 The calibration due date has not been set properly. Check the year, month, and day of the calibration due
date.

Troubleshooting
See section 3.13
700 The specified command does not exist. The command specified from the custom display is not
registered. Register commands whose command type
11
is “E-M,” and specify the numbers of those commands
in the custom display.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
See section 2.32 in IM04L41B01-04E. 12
701 Saving data. The previous transmission is not finished.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
702 Failed to save data. Check for communication errors or Modbus server
errors.
See section 1.10 in the communication manual.
App
760 Cannot find KDC server. The KDC server cannot be found in the same domain.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
761 KDC server connection error. An error occurred while the DX was connecting to the
KDC server. Index
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
764 Not supported by this machine. Not supported by the DX.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-5
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section

765 Preauthentication failed. Preauthentication failed. Check the information that you
entered.
766 The encryption type is not supported by this machine. Use the same encryption method on the DX and the
server.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
767 Failed to receive authentication from KDC server. Check the DX and server settings.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
768 Change the password. The password has expired.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
769 The time difference with the KDC server exceeds the limit. There is a time difference of 5 minutes or more between
the DX and the server. Eliminate this time difference.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
771 The host principal is not registered. The DX account is not registered on the server.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
772 The host principal is invalid. Check the DX account that is registered on the server.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
773 The host password is incorrect. Make sure that the password set on the DX matches
the server password.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.
774 Preauthentication failed. An internal error occurred during preauthentication.
Disable the server's preauthentication function.
775 The realm is incorrect. Set the correct realm name on the DX.
See section 1.14 in the communication manual.

10-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Operation Errors 1
Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section
200 Operation aborted because an error was found in media. Use another storage medium or format it.
See section 6.7.
201 Not enough free space on media. There is not enough free space on media or the number 2
of directories exceeded the limit. Use another storage
medium.
See section 1.4.
202 Media is read-only. Make it writable.
210 Media has not been inserted. Insert a storage medium into the drive. 3
211 Media is damaged or not formatted. Remove the medium and set it again. If an error still
occurs, replace or format the medium.
See section 6.7.
212 Format error. Try formatting again. 4
See section 6.7.
213 The file is read-only. Access another file or make the file writable.
214 There is no file or directory. Specified a file in which data is being added. Tried to
save a file which does not exists in the internal memory.
215 Exceeded the allowable number of directories or files. Replace a storage medium. Delete unneeded files and 5
directories.
See section 6.7.
216 The file or directory name is incorrect. Use alphanumeric characters and symbols.
See section 6.2. 6
217 Unknown file type. Check the extension.
See section Appendix 2.
218 This directory or file now exists. Delete it or change the name. See section 6.2.
219 Invalid file or directory operation. Tried to delete multiple directory levels. Or, tried to
delete a directory containing files.
7
Delete the files and directories in the directory first
before executing the operation.
See section 6.7.
220 The file is already in use. Try again later. Wait until the file is accessible. 8
221 This action is not possible because FTP transmission is in Execute after FTP data transfer is complete.
progress.
222 Media is not recognized. Remove and reset the storage medium.
231
232
Abnormal setting exists in file.
There is no available data.
Specify another file.
Appears when displaying historical trends. Specify
9
another file.
233 The specified historical data do not exist. Appears when switching to historical trend from
information display.
See section 4.5. 10
234 The specified channel is not assigned to the display group. Appears when switching to trend, digital, or bar graph
from overview.

Troubleshooting
See sections 4.4 and 7.6.
235 There is no data for the chosen date. Select a day of the month that has “E” or “D” displayed.
See section 4.3. 11
236 There is no data after the selected time for this day. Select an earlier time.
Section 4.3.
237 The specified screen cannot be displayed The DX display mode and the Web display mode are
different, or a display group that does not exist has been 12
specified from the Web. See IM04L41B01-03E.
240 You cannot sign this record because a signature is already You cannot overwrite a signature.
present. See section 1.6 in the advanced security manual.
245 This function cannot be used in the historical trend display. Close the historical trend display.
246 This function cannot be used due to no data file saved in Insert a storage medium. Make sure that the storage
App
media. medium is formatted.
247 This function cannot be used in setting mode. Exit setting mode.
249 You cannot sign, because some batch data is missing. When the process type is batch, you cannot use the DX
to sign the measured data unless everything from the Index
start to the stop of measurement is contained in a single
file.
Use DAQSTANDARD to sign the data.
See the advanced security manual.

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-7
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message Explanation/Countermeasures/Ref. section

250 Failed to load template file. The template file that you attempted to load is 400 KB
or larger. Load a template file that is smaller than 400
KB.
251 There is no template file. There is no template file in the internal memory. Load a
template file.
252 The template file is incorrect. Check the template file format.

10-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Communication Application Errors 1

• Errors Related to E-mail and Web Server
260 IP address is not set or ethernet function is not available. The IP address is not specified.
Check the IP address.
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
2
261 SMTP server is not found. Occurs when the SMTP server is specified by name.
• Check the DNS setting.
• Check the SMTP server name.
See sections 1.3 and 1.4 in the communication manual. 3
262 Cannot initiate E-mail transmission. • The host name of the DX is not correct. Check the host
name.
• The port number of the SMTP server is not correct.
Check the port number.
See sections 1.3 and 1.4 in the communication manual.
4
263 Sender’s address rejected by the server. Check the sender’s address.
Section 1.4 in the communication manual
264 Some recipients’ addresses are invalid. Check the recipients’ addresses.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual. 5
265 SMTP protocol error. May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
266 Ethernet cable is not connected. Check the cable connection.
6
See section 1.3 in the communication manual.
267 Could not connect to SMTP server. • Check to see that the SMTP server is connected to the
network.
• If the SMTP server name is specified using an IP
address, check to see that the IP address is correct. 7
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
268 E-mail transmission request failed. Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.
269 E-mail transfer error. May occur if a network failure (cable problems, duplicate
addresses, network device failure, and so on) occurs in
the middle of the e-mail transmission.
8
270 Could not connect to POP3 server Check the connection settings.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
271 Not able to login to the POP3 server. Check the login name and the password.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual. 9
272 SMTP authentication failed. Make sure that the user name and password that you are
using for authentication are recognized by the server.
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
273 The server requested an unsupported authentication
method.
Change the server configuration. 10
See section 1.4 in the communication manual.
275 The current image cannot be output to the Web. The setup display cannot be output to the Web browser.

Troubleshooting
This message is displayed on the Web browser.
276 Image data currently being created. Unable to perform key Try again a little later.This message is displayed on the
operation. Web browser. 11
277 Could not output screen to Web. Failed to create the image.This message is displayed on
the Web browser.
278 Web control denied because a user has control. You cannot control the DX from a browser when:
• There is a user who is logging in or who has logged into
the DX through key operations.
12
• There is a user who has logged into the DX through
communication commands.
See section 1.5 in the communication manual.
App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-9
10.1 A List of Messages

• Errors Related to FTP Client

For a description of the FTP client function of the DX, see the Communication Interface
User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-17E. The detail code does not appear in the error message
on the screen. You can view the code on the FTP log display of the DX or using the FTP
log output via communications.

Code Message
280 IP address is not set or FTP function is not available.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 280.
Character String and Details
HOSTADDR
An IP address has not been assigned to the DX.
Check the IP address.
DORMANT
Internal processing error.*1
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
Check the cable connection.
281 FTP mail box operation error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 281.
Character String and Details
MAIL
Internal processing error.*1
STATUS
Internal processing error.*1
TIMEOUT
Internal processing error.*1
PRIORITY
Internal processing error.*1
NVRAM
Internal processing error.*1
282 FTP control connection error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 282.
Character String and Details
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the destination host name.
TCPIP
Internal processing error.*1
UNREACH
Failed to connect to a control connection server.
Check the address setting and that the server is running.
OOBINLINE
Internal processing error.*1
NAME
Internal processing error.*1
CTRL
The control connection does not exist.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time
period.
IAC
Failed to respond in the TELNET sequence.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time
period.
ECHO
Failed to transmit data on the control connection.
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time
period.
Character String and Details
REPLY
Failed to receive data on the control connection.

10-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message 1
Check that the server does not drop the connection and that it responds within the proper time
period.
SERVER
The server is not in a condition to provide the service.
Check that the server is in a condition in which service can be provided. 2
283 FTP command was not accepted.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 283.
Character String and Details
USER 3
Failed to verify the user name.
Check the user name setting.
PASS
Failed to verify the password.
Check the password setting.
4
ACCT
Failed to verify the account.
Check the account setting.
TYPE 5
Failed to change the transfer type.
Check that the server supports the binary transfer mode.
CWD
Failed to change the directory.
Check the initial path setting.
6
PORT
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the security function is disabled.
PASV 7
Failed to set the transfer connection.
Check that the server supports PASV commands.
SCAN
Failed to read the transfer connection settings. 8
Check that proper response to the PASV command is received from the server.
284 FTP transfer setting error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 284.
Character String and Details
MODE 9
Internal processing error.*1
LOCAL
Internal processing error.*1
REMOTE 10
The destination file name is not correct.
Check that you have the authority to create or overwrite files.

Troubleshooting
ABORT
File transfer abort was requested by the server.
Check the server for the reason for the abort request. 11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-11
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message
285 FTP data connection error.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 285.
Character String and Details
SOCKET
Failed to create a socket for the transfer connection.*2
BIND
Failed the transfer connection command.*2
CONNECT
Failed the transfer connection.*2
LISTEN
Failed the transfer connection reception.*2
ACCEPT
Failed to accept the transfer connection.*2
SOCKNAME
Internal processing error.*1
RECV
Failed to receive data over the transfer connection.*2
SEND
Failed to send data over the transfer connection.*2
286 FTP file transfer error.
287 FTP is failed because of file acquirement from external media.
290 SNTP access failure.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 290.
Character String and Details
DORMANT
Internal processing error.*1
LINK
Data link is disconnected.
Check the cable connection.
291 SNTP server does not respond.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 291.
Character String and Details
TIMEOUT
Check that the server is running.*2
292 Incorrect SNTP server setting.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 292.
Character String and Details
HOSTNAME
Failed the DNS lookup (search the IP address corresponding to the host name).
Check the DNS setting and the SNTP server name.
TCPIP
Internal processing error.*1
293 Invalid SNTP server reply.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 293.
Character String and Details
SEND
A correct IP address has not been assigned to the DX.
Check the IP address.
BROKEN
There is a problem with the SNTP server.
If this error occurs even after executing SNTP manually several times, check the SNTP server.

10-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message 1
294 No time correction because excess time deviation with SNTP server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 294.
Character String and Details
OVER
This error occurs when periodic SNTP is executed by the auto setting of the clock and the
2
clock is not adjusted because the time difference between the DX and the SNTP server is
greater than or equal to 10 minutes.
Check the time on the DX and the SNTP server.
295 IP address was released because DHCP setting is invalid. 3
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 295.
Character String and Details
REJECT

296 DHCP access failure.

Address obtained by DHCP is inappropriate.
4
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 296.
Character String and Details
ESEND
Failed to transmit to the DHCP. 5
ESERVER
DHCP server not found.
ESERVFAIL
No response from the DHCP server. 6
ERENEWED
Address renewal rejected.
EEXTENDED
Address lease extension rejected.
EEXPIRED 7
Address lease period expired.
297 Registration of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 297.
Character String and Details 8
INTERNAL
Failed to register the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to register the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL 9
Failed to register the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP 10
Failed to register the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED

Troubleshooting
Failed to register the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to register the host name (name exists).
11
YXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to register the host name (RR set does not exist). 12
NOTAUTH
Failed to register the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to register the host name (different from zone section).
App
NONAME
Host name not entered on the DX.

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-13
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message
298 Deletion of the hostname to the DNS server failed.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 298.
Character String and Details
INTERNAL
Failed to delete the host name (transmission error, reception timeout, etc.).
FORMERR
Failed to delete the host name (format error: DNS message syntax error).
SERVFAIL
Failed to delete the host name (server failure: DNS server processing error).
NXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (non existent domain).
NOTIMP
Failed to delete the host name (not implemented).
REFUSED
Failed to delete the host name (operation refused).
YXDOMAIN
Failed to delete the host name (name exists).
YXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set exists).
NXRRSET
Failed to delete the host name (RR set does not exist).
NOTAUTH
Failed to delete the host name (not authoritative for zone).
NOTZONE
Failed to delete the host name (different from zone section).
NOTLINKED
4 Physical layer was disconnected when removing the host name.
700 The specified command does not exist.
701 Saving data.
702 Failed to save data.

*1 Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

*2 These errors may occur if the network experiences trouble during the data transmission
(bad cable connection, duplicate addresses, network equipment failure).

Note
• The FTP client function on the DX has a timer function that drops the connection if there is
no data transfer for two minutes. If the server does not respond within this time period, the
transfer fails.
• The FTP client function on the DX overwrites files without a warning if files with the same
name exist at the transfer destination unless the server returns a negative response.

10-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Communication Errors 1
For information regarding the communication function of the DX, see the Communication
Interface User’s Manual, IM 04L41B01-17E.

2
•  rrors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes, Output Communication
E
Command Execution, and Setup Data Loading
Code Message
300 Command is too long. 3
301 Too many number of commands delimited with ‘;’.
302 This command has not been defined.
303 Data request command can not be enumerated with sub-delimiter.
350 Command is not permitted to the current user level. 4
351 This command cannot be specified in the current mode.
352 The option is not installed.
353 This command cannot be specified in the current setting.
354 This command is not available during sampling or calculating.
5
•  emory Access Errors during Setting and Basic Setting Modes and Output
M
Communication Command Execution 6
An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code Message
362 There are no data to send ‘NEXT’ or ‘RESEND’. 7
363 All data have already been transferred.

• Maintenance and Test Communication Command Errors

An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
8
on the screen.
Code Message
390 Command error.
391 Delimiter error. 9
392 Parameter error.
393 No permission.
394 No such connection.
395 Use ‘quit’ to close this connection. 10
396 Failed to disconnect.
397 No TCP control block.

Troubleshooting
398 Format error.

11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-15
10.1 A List of Messages

• Other Communication Errors

An English error message is returned via the communication interface. It is not displayed
on the screen.
Code Message
400 Input username.
Enter the name of a user that is registered on the DX and that is allowed to log in to the DX through communication.
401 Input password.
Enter the password.
402 Select username from ‘admin’ or ‘user’.
Select “admin” or “user” to specify the user level to connect to.
403 Login incorrect, try again!
The login failed. Enter the information again, starting with the user name.
404 No more login at the specified level is acceptable.
Connecting would cause the maximum number of simultaneous connections (administrator: 1, normal user: 2 or
setting: 1, monitoring: 2) to be exceeded. Connect to a different level, or exit by entering “quit.”
405 Input user ID.
Enter a user ID.
406 Select function from ‘setting’ or ‘monitor’.
Select “setting” (to connect to the setting function) or “monitor” (to connect to the monitoring function).
407 Password has expired. Please enter a new password.
The password has expired. Enter a new password.
408 Enter password again for confirmation.
Enter the password again for confirmation.
409 This password is not correct or was already used.
The password is incorrect or has already been used.
410 Login successful. (The special user level)
You have logged in to the administrator level.
411 Login successful. (The general user level)
You have logged in to the user level.
420 Connection has been lost.
The connection has been lost.
421 The number of simultaneous connection has been exceeded.
The maximum number of simultaneous connections has been reached, so no further connections can be made.
422 Communication has timed-out.
Communication timed out so the connection was closed.
450 This entry is incorrect.
You cannot currently log in. This may happen for one of the following reasons:
• The user name is not registered.
• The user name is invalid.
• The user ID is wrong.
451 Login prohibited because another user is logged in.
Another user is already logged in. This may happen for one of the following reasons:
• Someone has already logged in with the same user name.
• When the multi-login function is not enabled and someone has logged in through key operations.
452 This command must be used with LL command.
Use the LL command.

10-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

1
Status Messages
Code Message
500 Execution is complete.
501 Please wait a moment... 2
503 Data are being saved to media...
504 File is being loaded from media...
505 Formatting...
506 Memory save to media was interrupted.
508 There is no file or directory. 3
509 Press [DISP/ENTER] key to display file name.
510 Range cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
511 MATH expression cannot be changed during sampling or calculating.
513 Post process in progress. 4
514 Now loading historical data.
515 Data save is completed.
516 Files are now being sorted.
520 Connecting to the line...
521 The data file is being transferred. 5
530 Media can be removed safely.
531 Media was removed compulsorily.
532 USB device has been connected.
533 USB device cannot be recognized. 6
534 There was no data which is not saved to media.
535 Media was recognized.
542 Media read error.
543 Flash write error.
550 The A/D calibration is being executed...
7
551 FTP test is being executed...
552 E-mail test is being executed...
553 Review and sign functions cannot be used when the file is divided.
554 Signature functions are being executed. 8
555 Login prohibited because software login is active.
556 Press [FUNC] key to login.
557 This user is not allowed to change a setting.
558
559
Setting changes are aborted while data is saved.
This command must be used with LL command.
9
560 Now connecting to SNTP server...
561 Now adjusting the time.

10

Troubleshooting
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-17
10.1 A List of Messages

Code Message
562 Ethernet cable is disconnected.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 562.
Character String and Details
ON
Detected that an Ethernet cable was connected.
OFF
Detected that an Ethernet cable was disconnected.
563 The command is sent to DHCP.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 563.
Character String and Details
RENEW
Requesting address renewal to the DHCP server.
564 The response was received from DHCP.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 564.
Character String and Details
RENEWED
Address renewal complete.
EXTENDED
Address release extension request complete.
RELEASED
Address release complete.
565 IP address was set.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 565.
Character String and Details
IPCONFIG
Assigned the IP address.
566 It is a setting that doesn’t register hostname to the DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 566.
Character String and Details
NOREQUEST
Configured not to register the host name.
567 The hostname was registered to DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 567.
Character String and Details
UPDATE
Registered the host name to the DNS server.
568 The hostname was deleted from DNS server.
Further details are provided by the character string that appears after error code 568.
Character String and Details
REMOVE
Assigned the IP address.
OFF
Removed the host name from the DNS server.
571 Querying KDC server.
572 Saving template file.
573 Loading template file.

10-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.1 A List of Messages

Warning Messages 1
Code Message Ref. Section
600 Measured data and Settings have been initialized. –
601 Measured data have been initialized. –
610 This usernema is already registered. See section 8.2. 2
611 There is no user who can enter to the SETUP mode. –
612 Please acknowledge all active alarms before stopping this record. This message appears if you try to stop
recording when there is an alarm that the alarm
ACK operation has not been performed on. You
can either stop recording or perform the alarm 3
ACK operation and then stop recording. See
the See sections 6.3 and 6.4 in the advanced
security manual.
614 Calibration settings are reset because of range setting change. See section 3.9.
615 Noise may influence measurement in test mode. See section 3.1. 4

For information about messages whose codes are in the 700s, see page 11-5.
5
System Errors
Servicing is required when a system error occurs. If this happens, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer for repairs.
Code Message 6
901 ROM failure.
902 RAM failure.
910 A/D memory failure for all input channels.
921 Channel 1 A/D calibration value error. 7
925 A/D calibration error.
930 Memory acquisition failure.
940 The Ethernet module is down.
950 Incorrect number for the A/D calibration.
951 Failed to write A/D calibration value.
8

10

Troubleshooting
11

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-19
 10.2 Troubleshooting
Does not function (nothing is displayed).

Is the power switch

turned ON? Does the
NO
Turn ON the power properly. O.G.
switch work properly?

YES

Is the power supply NO

Connect properly. O.G.
connected properly?

YES

Is the power NO Supply the power at the specified O.G.

supplied properly? voltage and frequency.

YES

Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA

dealer.
O.G.: Operation Guide

10-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 10.2 Troubleshooting

• Large measurement errors 1

• Trend or digital wave value fluctuation
• Trend going off the scale beyond either 0% or 100%

2
Does the input meet NO Change the input wiring to meet Section 12.1
the specifications? the specifications.
3
YES

• Adjust the span and range

Are the range/span NO settings (section 3.3).
• If you use input calibration
4
settings appropriate?
(/CC1 option), check the set values
for correction points (section 3.9).
YES
• Separate the input wiring from the 5
noise source.
• Ground the recorder.
Are you taking NO • Ground the measured object.
measures against noise? • Insulate the TC from the measured
object.
• Use shielded cables for input. 6
• Change the integration time
YES of the input A/D converter
(section 3.1).
• Use the moving average of the
input (section 3.4).
7
Are • Attach the input terminal cover
you keeping correctly.
the environmental temperature NO
• Protect the input terminal from fans
constant (TC and other sources of wind.
input)? • Keep the temperature fluctuation 8
near the input terminal to a
YES
minimum.

• Wire correctly (O.G.)

Is the input wiring correct?
NO • Install the terminal block correctly. 9
• Fasten the terminal screws
correctly.
• Insulate the RTD from the ground.
YES • If burnt, replace the TC.
10
• Stop the TC burnout upscale/

Troubleshooting
Is the input wiring parallel NO downscale function of other
with other equipment? equipment.
• Ground the DX and other
equipment at one point.
11
YES • Disconnect parallel wiring
(for example, use a
double-element TC)
12
Is the RJC setting NO
correct (TC input)? Configure correctly. Section 3.2

YES App

Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA

dealer to have your DX serviced.
Index
O.G.: Operation guide

IM 04L41B01-01E 10-21
10.2 Troubleshooting

Display and other functions do not work properly.

• Move the input and communication wires

Taking measures NO
away from the noise source.
against noise?
• Ground the recorder.
• Use shielded cables for input and
YES
communication wires.
• Insert an isolation transformer into the

power line.
• Insert a power line filter into the power line.
• If an inductive load is used in the alarm
output line, insert a serge suppressor in
the line.

Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA

dealer.

Items on the display selection menu or

FUNC key menu are not displayed.

Are all of • Make sure that the menu item is set

the typical conditions for NO to be displayed using the menu
displaying the item
customize function.
satisfied?
If the item is not set to be displayed,
YES then set it to be displayed
(see section 5.17).
• Confirm that the DX is equipped
with the options required for that
menu item.
Contact your nearest YOKOGAWA
dealer to have your DX serviced.

10-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 11 Calibration

11.1 Periodic Inspection 1

Check the operation periodically to keep the DX in good working order.

Perform the following checks and replace worn parts as needed. 2
• Is the display and storage functioning properly?
If not, see chapter 11, “Troubleshooting” in the DX1000/DX1000N User’s Manual.
• Has the brightness of the LCD backlight deteriorated?
If replacement is necessary, see “Recommended Replacement Periods for Worn 3
Parts” in the DX1000/DX1000N Operation Guide, IM 04L41B01-02E.

10

11
Calibration

12

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 11-1
 11.2 Calibrating the DX
It is recommended that the DX be calibrated once a year to assure its measurement
accuracy.
Calibration service is also provided by YOKOGAWA dealers.
For details, contact your nearest YOKOGAWA dealer.

Required Instruments
Calibration instruments with the following resolution are required for calibrating the DX.
Recommended Instruments
• DC voltage standard: Fluke 9100 or equivalent
Main specifications
Output accuracy: ±(0.005% + 1 µV)
• Decade resistance box: Yokogawa Meters & Instruments Model 2793-01
or equivalent
Main specifications
Accuracy of output range 0.1 to 500 Ω: ±(0.01%
+2 mΩ)
Resolution: 0.001 Ω
• 0°C standard temperature device: ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics or equivalent
Main specifications
Standard temperature stability accuracy: ±0.05°C
For information on purchasing the calibration instruments, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.

Calibration Procedure
1. Wire the DX and the calibration instrument as shown in the following figure, and
adequately warm up the instruments (the warm-up time of the DX is at least 30
minutes).
2. Check that the operating environment such as ambient temperature and humidity
is within the standard operating conditions (see section 13.6).
3. Apply appropriate input signals corresponding to 0, 50, and 100% of the input
range and calculate the errors from the readings.
If the error does not fall within the accuracy range of the specifications, contact your nearest
YOKOGAWA dealer.

Note
For thermocouple inputs, you must measure the temperature of the input terminal and apply a
voltage taking into account the reference junction temperature.

DC Voltage Measurement (Example for the DX1012)

+
Input terminal -
+

- DC voltage standard

11-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 11.2 Calibrating the DX

Temperature Measurement When Using an RTD (Example for the DX1012) 1

The resistance of three lead

wires must be equal.
2
Input terminal
b
A

B
3
Decade resistance box
(Model 2793-01 from Yokogawa
Meters & Instruments Corporation)
4
Temperature Measurement When Using a Thermocouple (Example for the
DX1012)
Thermocouple wires or TC
Copper wires extension wires 5

+
- Input terminal
Copper Thermocouple + 8
DC voltage standard wires wires
-

(0 °C standard temperature device ZC-114/ZA-10 by Coper Electronics) 9

RJC of TC Input
As the measurement terminal of the DX is generally at room temperature, the actual
output of the thermocouple is different from the values given on the thermoelectromotive
10
force table based on 0°C. The DX performs compensation by measuring the temperature
at the input terminal and adding the corresponding thermoelectromotive force to the
actual output of the thermocouple. Therefore, when the measurement terminal is shorted 11
(equivalent to the case when the detector tip is 0°C), the measured value indicates the
temperature of the input terminal.
Calibration

When calibrating the DX, this compensation voltage (thermoelectromotive force of 0°C
reference corresponding to the input terminal temperature) must be subtracted from the 12
output of the standard generator before application. As shown in the figure, by using the
0°C standard temperature device to compensate the reference junction at 0°C, you can
input the thermoelectromotive force of 0°C reference from the DC voltage standard and
perform the calibration. App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 11-3
 11.3 Pulling Out the Inner Instrument (DX1000N)
The inner instrument of the DX1000N can be pulled out.
Because some areas inside the DX have high voltages, be sure to pull out the inner
instrument correctly. For the procedure, see the Daqstation DX1000/DX1000N/DX2000
Service Manual, SM 04L41B01-01E.

11-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
Chapter 12 Specifications

12.1 Signal Input and Alarm 1

Measurement Input
Item Specifications
2
Number of inputs, scan interval, and A/D integration time
Number Scan Interval
Model of

DX1002, DX1002N
Inputs
2
Normal Mode Fast Sampling Mode*
3
125 ms, 250 ms 25 ms
DX1004, DX1004N 4
DX1006, DX1006N 6
1 s, 2 s, 5 s 2 s, 5 s 125 ms
DX1012, DX1012N 12
A/D converter integration time 60 Hz/50 Hz 60 Hz/50 Hz/100 ms 600 Hz (fixed) 4
* When using the multi batch function (/BT2) the DX do not have a fast sampling mode.
Input Type DC voltage, 1-5V, thermocouple (TC), resistance temperature detector (RTD), ON/OFF input (DI),
and DC current (by adding an external shut resistor)
Measurement range and measurable range 5
Input Type Range Measurable Range
DC voltage 20 mV
–20.000 to 20.000 mV
60 mV
–60.00 to 60.00 mV
200 mV
–200.00 to 200.00 mV
2V
–2.0000 to 2.0000 V 6
6V
–6.000 to 6.000 V
20 V
–20.000 to 20.000 V
50 V
–50.00 to 50.00 V
1-5V 1 to 5 V*6
0.800 to 5.200 V
Thermocouple R*1
0.0 to 1760.0°C 32 to 3200°F
7
S*1
0.0 to 1760.0°C 32 to 3200°F
B*1
0.0 to 1820.0°C 32 to 3308°F
K*1
–200.0 to 1370.0°C –328 to 2498°F
E*1
–200.0 to 800.0°C
J*1
–200.0 to 1100.0°C
–328.0 to 1472.0°F
–328.0 to 2012.0°F
8
T*1
–200.0 to 400.0°C –328.0 to 752.0°F
N*1
–270.0 to 1300.0°C, on models –454 to 2372°F, on models with
with release numbers 3 and later. release numbers 3 and later.
0.0 to 1300.0°C, on models with 32 to 2372°F, on models with 9
release numbers 2 and earlier. release numbers 2 and earlier.
W*2 0.0 to 2315.0°C 32 to 4199°F
L*3 –200.0 to 900.0°C –328.0 to 1652.0°F
U*3 –200.0 to 400.0°C –328.0 to 752.0°F
WRe*4 0.0 to 2400.0°C 32 to 4352°F 10
RTD Pt (Pt100)*5 –200.0 to 600.0°C –328.0 to 1112.0°F
JPt (JPt100)*5 –200.0 to 550.0°C –328.0 to 1022.0°F
DI Level 0: Less than 2.4 V. 1: 2.4 V or higher (judged at the 6 V range)
Contact*7 0: Open. 1: Closed (parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less)
*1: R, S, B, K, E, J, T, N: IEC 60584-1, DIN EN 60584-1, JIS C1602 11
*2: W: W-5%Re/W-26%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.), ASTM E988
*3: L: Fe-CuNi, DIN 43710, U: Cu-CuNi, DIN 43710
*4: WRe: W-3%Re/W-25%Re (Hoskins Mfg. Co.)
*5: Pt100: JIS C1604, IEC 60751, DIN EN 60751
JPt100: JIS C1604, JIS C1606 12
Measuring current: i = 1mA (Pt100, JPt100)
*6: The range for linear scaling of 1-5V inputs. Burnout detection and low-cut
Specifications

functions are available.

*7: The detected current value is approx. 10 μA.
App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-1
12.1 Signal Input and Alarm

Item Specifications
Thermocouple burnout* Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel).
Normal: 2 kΩ or less., Burnout: 100 kΩ or more (parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less)
Detection current: Approx. 10 µA
1-5 range burnout* Burnout upscale/downscale selectable (for each channel).
Burnout detection: Greater than “scale upper limit + 10% of scale width“ (upscale) ,or “
scale lower limit – less than 5% of scale width“ (downscale)
TC reference junction compensation
Internal reference junction compensation or external reference junction compensation
Filter function Takes the moving average of the input values (for each channel). Moving average data points: 2 to
400
Computation
Difference computation Computable range: DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Linear scaling Computable range: DC voltage, TC, RTD, and DI
Scalable range: –30000 to 30000. The decimal place is within 4 digits to the right
of the decimal point.
Unit: 6 digits or less
Over value detection: The value can be set to over value when ±5% of the scale range
is exceeded.
Square root computation Takes the square root of the input and apply linear scaling
Computable type: DC voltage
Scalable range and unit: Same as linear scaling
Low-cut: Set the low-cut value in the range of 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
Over value detection: Same as linear scaling
1-5V Computable range: 1-5
Scalable range and unit: Same as linear scaling
Low-cut: The low-cut point is fixed to the span lower limit.
Over value detection: Same as linear scaling
* In fast sampling mode, burnouts on all measurement channels cannot be detected within a scan interval. Burnout may not be
detected until the number of measurements indicated below is carried out if measurement is started in a burnout condition or
after a burnout occurs.
DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N and DX1004N: Up to 4 measurements. DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N and DX1012N: Up to 2
measurements.

Alarms
Item Specifications
Number of alarms Up to four alarms (level) for each measurement channels
Levels and colors  ou can change the alarm colors and display order by setting priorities and colors for each alarm
Y
(release number 3 or later).
The alarm level and color settings are shared by all channels.
Alarm type High limit, low limit, difference high limit, difference low limit, high limit on rate-of-change alarm, low
limit on rate-of-change alarm, delay high limit, and delay low limit
Alarm delay time 1 to 3600 s (for each channel)
Rate-of-change calculation interval of rate-of-change alarms
1 to 32 times the scan interval (common to all channels)
Alarm output Output to the internal switch
Number of internal switches: 30
Internal switch operation: AND/OR operation selectable
Hysteresis High and low limit alarm: 0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Difference high and low limit alarms: 0.0 to 5.0% of the span (common to all channels)
Display  isplays the status on the respective operation screen and an alarm icon on the status display
D
section when an alarm occurs.
Display operation: Hold or not hold the display until the alarm acknowledge operation.
Alarm hide function (alarm no logging function)
Not display alarms nor record to the alarm summary (for each channel)
Alarm information Displays a log of alarm occurrences on the alarm summary.
Alarm Annunciator function (release number 3 or later)
Alarm displays and relay output operations can be made to follow an alarm sequence.
There are three supported alarm sequences: ISA-A-4, ISA-A, and ISA-M.
First-out display function: none

12-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.2 Display Function 1

Display
2
Item Specifications
Display* TFT color LCD, 240 × 320 dots, 5.7-inch (DX1000), 5.5-inch (DX1000N)
Brightness 8 levels
Backlight saver function Dim or turn off the LCD backlight if there is no key operation for a specified time. 3
* A section of the LCD monitor may contain pixels that are always on or off. The brightness of the LCD may also not be uniform
due to the characteristics of the LCD. This is not a malfunction.

Displayed Information
4
Item Specifications
Display groups Assign channels to groups on the trend display, digital display, and bar graph display and display.
Number of groups 10
Number of channels that can be assigned to each group
Up to six 5
Display color Channel: Select from 24 colors
Background: Select white or black (excludes the Overview, Alarm annunciator, and Custom
displays. See the item on the Historical trend display for information on that display.)
Trend display 6
Waveform line width
Select from 1, 2, and 3 dots
Display method
Orthogonal axis display with time axis (T) and measured value axis (Y)
Layout: Vertical, horizontal, wide, or split
* *
Trend intervals:5 s , 10 s , 15 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h,
and 10 h/div for the DX1002, DX1002N, DX1004, and DX1004N.
7
*
15 s (only in fast sampling mode ), 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20
min, 30 min, 1 h, 2 h, 4 h, and 10 h/div for the DX1006, DX1006N, DX1012, and
DX1012N.
* release number 3 or later 8
Switchable to the secondary trend interval.
Scale Display a scale for each channel.
Current value bar graph, color scale band, and alarm point marks can be displayed on the scale.
Others Grid (divisions: 4 to 12), trip line (line width: 1, 2, or 3 dots), message, zone display, partial expanded
display, auto zone display (release number 3 or later), fine grid (release number 3 or later), and tag
9
detail display (release number 3 or later)
Digital Display Displays measured values numerically
Update rate 1 s (scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Bar graph display Displays the measured value on a bar graph 10
Direction Vertical or horizontal
Base position End or center
Update rate 1 s (scan interval if the scan interval is greater than 1 s)
Scale Display a scale for each channel 11
Color scale band, and alarm point marks can be displayed on the scale.
Historical trend display
Redisplays the display data or event data in the internal memory or external storage medium.
Display formats

All screen or half screen (only when the display data is being redisplayed)
Top channel (release number 3 or later): Displays the specified channel in front of all the
12
others.
Specifications

Auto span display (release number 3 or later): Automatically adjusts the display span of the
specified channel.
Auto zone display (release number 3 or later): Displays channels in different zones. App
Time axis operation The time axis can be reduced or expanded, and data can be displayed continuously. The time
display can be switched from absolute to relative time (release number 3 or later).
Add message Messages can be added.
Background color Select from white, cream, black, or light gray.
Index
Data search Waveforms from the internal memory can be displayed through the specification of a date and time
(release number 3 or later).
Overview Display Displays the measured values of all channels and the alarm statuses.

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-3
12.2 Display Function

Information display
Alarm summary display Displays a log of up to 1000 alarms.
Specify an alarm with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend
display.
Message summary display
Time and content of up to 450 messages (including 50 add messages)
Specify a message with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend
display.
Memory summary display Displays the information of the data in the memory.
Specify a file with the cursor and jump to the corresponding section on the historical trend display.
Save the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium using keys.
Report (/M1 and /PM1) Displays report data from the internal memory
Stacked bar graph (/M1 and /PM1; Release number 3 or later)
Displays the report data of each report group in a stacked bar graph.
Display formats: H+D (hourly data is used for the display), Day+Week (daily data is used for the
display), D+M (daily data is used for the display)
Report groups: Report channels are arranged in groups of sixes starting with the first channel
(R001). The group arrangements are fixed.
Scale/grid: Fixed at four divisions
Update interval: 1 s
The report data of the channels in the specified group is displayed in a stacked bar graph.
However, only channels that have the same unit of measurement as the first channel in the group
are displayed.
Status Display Relay status display: Displays the ON/OFF status of the alarm output relay and internal switch.
Modbus client status: Displays the communication status on the Modbus client
Modbus master condition: Displays the communication status on the Modbus master
Event switch display (release number 3 or later): Displays the status of the event level switches.
Log display Displays the login log (only for the DX without /AS1), error log, communication log, FTP log, Web
log, e-mail log, SNTP log, DHCP log, Modbus log, operation log (/AS1 option; release numbers 4
and later), and change settings log (/AS1 option; release numbers 4 and later)..
Alarm annunciator display (release number 3 or later)
Display windows: 24 max.
Display window label characters: 32 characters × 5 lines max. Comment text blocks are used.
Custom display Through operations such as size adjustments and attribute configurations, display components
(such as the trend, digital, and bar graph displays) can be arranged to create a custom display. The
display data that is created can be saved to internal memory or to an external medium (CF). The
saved data can be loaded and displayed.
Number of displays: 28 (3 in the internal memory and 25 in a CF card)
System information display  isplays the number of measurement and computation channels, options, remote controller ID,
D
MAC address, firmware version, and internal memory capacity.
Network information display Displays the DX network setup information.

12-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.2 Display Function

Other Displayed Information 1

Item Specifications
Tag display Tag numbers and comments can be displayed.
Tag numbers (release number 3 or later)
Up to 16 characters 2
Displayable characters: Alphanumeric characters
Tag numbers can be enabled or disabled.
Tag comments
32 characters on a DX with a release number of 3 or later. 16 characters on a DX with a release 3
number of 2 or earlier.
Displayable characters: Alphanumeric characters
Message Write messages to the trend display.
Number of messages 100 4
Maximum number of saved messages
400
Character Up to 32 alphanumeric characters
Write method
Write destination
Write a preset message or write an arbitrary message on the spot.
Select only the displayed group or all groups.
5
Auto message Write a message when the DX recovers from a power failure while memory sampling is in progress.
Write a message when the trend interval is switched during memory sampling.
Add message Write messages to the past data positions.
Message The same as the “Message” item above
6
Maximum number of saved messages
50
Status display section Displays the DX status at the upper section of the display.
Displayed contents Year, month, day, time, displayed group name/display name, user name (when using the login 7
function), batch name (when using the batch function), internal memory status, external storage
medium status, alarm status, and function usage status (key lock , computation function, and e-mail)
Auto switching of displayed groups
Switches the display group at a given interval. 8
Interval: Select from the available settings between 5 s and 1 min.
Default display Specify the display to be shown automatically when keys are not operated.
Time until the display switches: Select from the available settings between 1 min and 1 h.
Favorite display Register frequently used displays to the Favorite key and show them through simple operation. 9
Up 8 displays can be registered.
Language Select English, Japanese, German, French, or, Chinese.
Display selection menu customization
Show/hide and change the positions of each item in the display menus and sub menus 10
Insert/delete separators.
FUNC key menu customization
Show/hide and change the display positions of each item.
Comments display (release number 3 or later) 11
Displays comments (from a comment text block) when events occur.
Comment text blocks 50
Comment text block contents

Comment text fields
Comment text blocks consist of 5 comment text fields.
100
12
Characters: up to 32 characters
Specifications

Displayable characters: Alphanumeric characters

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-5
 12.3 Data Saving Function

Configuration
Item Specifications
Internal memory Temporarily saves various types of data.
Medium Flash memory
External storage medium
Medium CF card
Format FAT32 or FAT16

Data Type
Item Specifications
DX data types and file extensions
Data Type Extension Notes
Display data .DAD
.DSD /AS1, release numbers 4 and later
Event data .DAE
.DSE /AS1, release numbers 4 and later
Manual sampled data .DAM
Screen image data .PNG
Setup data .PDL
.PEL /AS1, release numbers 4 and later
Report data .DAR /M1 and /PM1
.xml /M1 and /PM1, release numbers 4 and later
Custom display setup data .CDC Release numbers 3 and later
Change settings log data .TXT /AS1, release numbers 4 and later

Display Data and Event Data

Item Specifications
Internal memory
File storage capacity 400 MB (standard memory; release numbers 4 and later)
Number of files Up to 400
Operation FIFO (First In First Out)
Display data
Target Measurement/computation input channel
Sampling intervals Determined by the sample rate.
25 ms, 125 ms, 250 ms, 500 ms, 1 s, 2 s, 5 s, 10 s, 30 s, 1 min, 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20
min and 30 min (15 min, 20min, and 30min are only available on releases 3 and later)
An interval that is shorter than the scan interval cannot be set.
Description Maximum or minimum value per sampling interval
Data size Measurement input channel data: 4 bytes/data value. Computation channel data: 8 bytes/
data value.
File size Up to 8 MB
Data format Binary
Recording Records data at all times.
Event data
Target Measurement/computation input channel.
Sampling interval Select from the available settings between 25 ms to 600 s.
Description Data per sampling interval
Data size Measurement input channel data: 2 bytes/data value. Computation channel data: 4 bytes/
data value.
File size Up to 8 MB
Data format Binary
Mode Free: Records data at all times.
Trigger: Starts recording data when a certain event occurs and records for the specified interval.
Combinations of saved data Display data only, event data only, or display data and event data.
File size See appendix 1.

12-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.3 Data Saving Function

Manual Sampled Data 1

Item Specifications
Item Measured value at an arbitrary time
Maximum number of data values that the internal memory can store
400 2
Data format Text

Report Data (/M1 and /PM1)

Item Specifications
3
Item Report at each scheduled time of report
Maximum number of reports that the internal memory can store
100
Data format Text or XML spreadsheet (release numbers 4 and later) 4

Snapshot Data
Item Specifications 5
Item Displayed screen image data
Data format PNG
Output destination CF card, USB flash memory, or communication output
6
Saving Data to the External Storage Medium
Item Specifications
Data Saving Saves the data in the internal memory to the external storage medium. 7
Manual save Saves when the external storage medium is inserted with a key operation.
Auto save Display data: Every file save interval
Event data: Every data length
Manual sampled data: When manual sampling is executed.
Report data: When report is created.
8
Snapshot data: When a snapshot is taken
Auto save operation Select “save data only if there is sufficient free space on the CF card” or “constantly retain the most
recent data files in the CF card (media FIFO)” (release number 2 or later).
File name  elect from “sequence number+user-assigned string+date,” “sequence number+user-assigned
S 9
string,” or “sequence number+batch name.”
Save destination  uto save: CF card. Manual save: CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1)
A
Directory name: Specify using up to 20 characters.
10
Change Settings Log Data (/AS1; release numbers 4 and later)
Item Specifications
Item Log of setting changes
Maximum number of data values that 200 11
the internal memory can store
Data format Text
Output destination (auto save) SET0 directory on the CF card
A file name that includes the execution date is automatically attached.
12
Setup Data
Specifications

Item Specifications
Item DX setup data
App
Data format Binary
File name Specify using up to 32 characters.
Output/read destination (for saving/loading)
CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1) Index
Output destination (auto save; when the settings are changed on a DX with the /AS1 option)
SET0 directory on the CF card
A file name that includes the execution date is automatically attached.

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-7
12.3 Data Saving Function

Custom Display Setup Data

Item Specifications
Contents Custom display layout settings
Format Text
File name Up to 32 characters
Save/load destination CF card

Data File Loading

Item Specifications
Function Load and show the display data or event data in a CF card or USB flash memory (/USB1).

Miscellaneous
Item Specifications
Header comment  dd up to 50 characters of comment to display data, event data, manual sampled data, or report
A
data file.

12-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.4 Other Standard Functions 1

Event Action Function

Item Specifications
2
Event action Execute a specified operation when a given event occurs.
Number of settings 40
Events Remote control input, etc. 3
Timer Number of timers: 4
Match time timer Number of timers: 4
Action Specify memory start/stop, alarm ACK, etc.
There are limitations on the combinations of events and actions.
4

Security Function
Item Specifications 5
Key lock function Limitations to key operation, access to the external storage medium, and various operations
Login function Only registered users can operate the DX.
System administrators 5 administrators
Users 30 users 6

Time Related Functions 7

Item Specifications
Clock With a calendar function
Accuracy ±10 ppm (0 to 50°C), excluding a delay (of 1 second, maximum) caused each time the power is
turned on. 8
Time setting Using key operation, communication command, event action function, or SNTP client function
Time adjustment method
While memory sampling Corrects the time by 40 ms for each second.
Limit in which the time is gradually adjusted: Select from the available settings between 10 s and 5
min.
9
If the time is outside the limit, the time is immediately corrected.
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2038.
While memory is stopped Immediately change the time.
DST The date/time for switching between standard time and DST can be specified.
10
Time zone Sets the time difference from GMT.
Date format Select YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY, or DD.MM.YYYY.

11
Types of Characters That Can Be Handled
Item Specifications
Characters Alphabet characters, numbers, and symbols (limitation exists) 12
Specifications

Miscellaneous
Item Specifications App
Decimal point type (release number 3 or later)
Period or comma

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-9
12.4 Other Standard Functions

Communication Functions
Item Specifications
Electrical and mechanical specifications
Conforms to IEEE 802.3 (Ethernet frames conform to the DIX specification).
Medium Ethernet (10BASE-T)
Implemented protocols TCP, IP, UDP, ICMP, ARP, DHCP, HTTP, FTP, SMTP, SNTP, Modbus, and DX-dedicated protocols
E-mail client Automatically send e-mail at specified times.
FTP client Automatically transfer data files to the FTP server.
Applicable files: Display data, event data, screen image data, and report data
FTP Server Transfer files, delete files, manipulate directories, and output file lists of the DX.
Web server Shows the DX display on a Web browser.
SNTP client Inquires the time to the SNTP server and sets the DX.
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2036.
SNTP server Outputs the DX time.
Time resolution: 5 ms
Cannot be used after hour 0 on January 1st, 2036.
DHCP client Automatically obtain the network address settings from the DHCP server.
Modbus client Reads data from another device and writes to the registers.
Modbus server Loads measurement and computation channel data
Loads and writes communication input data
Some control commands such as memory start
Modbus client register access limitations
Setting/Measurement server Operate, set, and output data of the DX using a dedicated protocol.
Maintenance/test server Outputs connection information and network information.
Instrument information server
Outputs information (serial number, model name, etc.) of the connected DX.
EtherNet/IP server Can join an EtherNet/IP network as an adapter (server)
Loads measurement and computation channel data
Loads and writes communication input data

Batch Function
Item Specifications
Function Data management using batch names. Enter text fields and batch comments in the data file.
Batch name Added to the file name of the display data and event data.
Structure Batch number (up to 32 characters) + lot number (up to 8 digits)
Text field  dds text to the display data and event data. There are 24 available text fields for release numbers 3
A
and later. There are 8 available text fields for release numbers 2 and earlier. Up to 20 title characters
and 30 other characters can be entered per field.
Batch comment Adds text to the display data and event data. Up to 3 comments with 50 characters or less.

12-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.5 Options 1

Alarm Output Relay (/A1, /A2, and /A3)

Item Specifications
2
Action Outputs relay contact signals from the terminals on the rear panel when alarms occur.
Number of outputs 2 outputs (/A1), 4 outputs (/A2), and 6 outputs (/A3)
Relay contact rating
Output format
250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
NO-C-NC
3
Relay operation Energized/deenergized, AND/OR, hold/non-hold, and reflash settings are selectable.

4
RS-232 Interface (/C2) and RS-422/485 Interface (/C3)
Item Specifications
Connection EIA RS-232(/C2) or EIA RS-422/485(/C3)
Protocol Dedicated protocol or Modbus protocol 5
Synchronization Start-stop synchronization
Transmission mode (RS-422/485)
Four-wire half-duplex multi-drop connection (1:N (N = 1 to 32))
Data rate 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200, or 38400 bps 6
Data length 7 or 8 bits
Stop bit 1 bit
Parity Odd, even, or none
Handshaking Off:Off, XON:XON, XON:RS, and CS:RS
Communication distance (RS-422/485)
7
1200 m
Modbus communication Operation modes: Master or slave

8
FAIL/Status Output Relay (/F1)
Item Specifications
Relay operation assignment You can select which operations to assign to the two relays (release numbers 4 and later). 9
FAIL output Relay contact output on CPU error
Relay operation Energized during normal operation and de-energized on system error.
Status output Output a relay contact signal when a selected condition occurs.
A combination of the following conditions can be selected: 10
Low memory, memory failure, media error, A/D hardware error, burnout detection, communication
error (Modbus master or client communication error), alarm occurrence
Relay operation Relay is energized when a condition occurs.
Relay contact rating 250 VAC (50/60 Hz)/3 A, 250 VDC/0.1 A (for resistance load)
11

Clamped Input Terminal (Detachable) (/H2)

Item Specifications 12
Input terminal Make the input section clamp input terminals (detachable).
Specifications

2
Recommended wire size: 0.08 to 1.5 mm (AWG 28 to 16)

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-11
12.5 Options

Desktop Type (/H5[ ])

Item Specifications
Construction With carrying handle.
/H5D, /H5F, /H5R, /H5J, /H5H: Power Inlet connector. With a power cord.
/H5: Can only be specified when /P1 is simultaneously specified. Screw type power terminal.
Without power cord.

Computation Function (including the report function) (/M1)

Item Specifications
Number of computation channels
DX1002, DX1004, DX1002N, and DX1004N: 12 channels (101 to 112)
DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N: 24 channels (101 to 124)
Operation General arithmetic operations: Four arithmetic operations, square root, absolute, common logarithm,
natural logarithm, exponential, and power
Relational operations: <, ≤, >, ≥, =, and ≠
Logic operations: AND, OR, NOT, and XOR
Statistical operations: TLOG or CLOG
Special operations: PRE, HOLD, RESET, and CARRY
Conditional operation: [a?b:c]
Computation accuracy Double-precision floating point
Data that can be used
Channel data Measurement and computation channels
Constants 60 constants
Communication input data 24
Remote control input status 0/1 (/R1)
Pulse input Counts the number of pulses (/PM1)
Status input Internal switch, alarm output relay (/A[ ]), flags, and recording (memory sampling) status (release
number 3 or later)
Rolling average Performs moving average on the computed results.
Measurement range –9999999 to 99999999
Decimal place: 0 to 4 digits to the right of the decimal point
Alarms High limit, low limit, delay high limit, and delay low limit
Hysteresis: High and low limit alarm: 0.0% to 5.0% of the span.
Display Same as the measurement channels
Data saving Same as the measurement channels
Report function Number of report channels: 12 or 24 (same as the number of computation channels)
Computation types: Average, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
Report types: Hourly, daily, hourly + daily, daily + weekly, daily + monthly
Report templates (report output according to templates in XML spreadsheet format; release
numbers 4 and later). Templates (xml files) are available on Excel 2003 or later.

12-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.5 Options

Cu10, Cu25 RTD Input/3 Leg Isolated RTD Input (/N1) 1

Item Specifications
Function In addition to the standard input, the DX can also receive Cu10 and Cu25 input.
On the DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N, all the RTD input terminals (A, B,and b)
are isolated on each channel. 2
Measurement/display accuracy
Under standard operating conditions

Accuracy Measurement Accuracy
Input Type Setting
Measurement
Range
Guaranteed A/D integration time: A/D integration time:
Max.
Resolution
3
Range 16.7 ms or more 1.67 ms
Cu10 (GE) Cu1 –70.0 to 170.0°C
Cu10 (L&N) Cu2 –75.0 to 150.0°C
Cu10 (WEED) Cu3 –200.0 to 260.0°C ±(0.4% of rdg + 1.0°C) ±(0.8% of rdg + 5.0°C)
Cu10 (BAILEY) Cu4 –200.0 to 300.0°C 0.1°C 4
Cu10:α=0.00392 at 20°C Cu5 –200.0 to 300.0°C
Cu10:α=0.00393 at 20°C Cu6
Cu25:α=0.00425 at 0°C Cu25 ±(0.3% of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.5% of rdg + 2.0°C)
* Measuring current i = 1 mA
Input source resistance 1 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal). 5
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater)
±(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
Input source resistance With variation of 1 Ω per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit)
or less
With maximum difference of 40 mΩ between wires: Approx. 1 °C 6

10

11

12
Specifications

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-13
12.5 Options

3 Leg Isolated RTD Input (/N2)

Item Specifications
Input terminal All the RTD input terminals (A, B, and b) are isolated on each channel.
Applies to DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N
Note: On the DX2004 and DX2008 standard models, all the terminals (A, B, and b) are already
isolated on each channel

Extended Input Type (/N3)

Item Specifications
Measurement/display accuracy
Under standard operating conditions
Measurement Measurement Accuracy
Input Type A/D integration time: Max.
Range A/D integration time: 16.7 ms or more
1.67 ms Resolution
Kp vs Au7Fe 0.0 to 300.0K 0 to 20 K Within ±4.5 K Within ±13.5 K
0.1K
20 to 300 K Within ±2.5 K Within ±7.5 K
PLATINEL 0.0 to 1400.0°C ±(0.25% of rdg + 2.3°C) ±(0.25% of rdg + 8.0°C)
0 to 450°C Accuracy not guaranteed Accuracy not guaranteed
PR40-20 0.0 to 1900.0°C 450 to 750°C ±(0.9% of rdg + 3.2°C) ±(0.9% of rdg + 15.0°C)
750 to 1100°C ±(0.9% of rdg + 1.3°C) ±(0.9% of rdg + 6.0°C)
Thermocouple
1100 to 1900°C ±(0.9% of rdg + 0.4°C) ±(0.9% of rdg + 3.0°C)
NiNiMo 0.0 to 1310.0°C ±(0.25% of rdg + 0.7°C) ±(0.5% of rdg + 3.5°C)
W/WRe26 0.0 to 2400.0°C 0 to 400°C ±15.0°C ±30.0°C
400 to 2400°C ±(0.2% of rdg + 2.0°C) ±(0.4% of rdg + 4.0°C) 0.1°C
Type N(AWG14) 0.0 to 1300.0°C ±(0.2% of rdg + 1.3°C) ±(0.5% of rdg + 7.0°C)
XK GOST*2 –200.0 to 600.0 –200 to –100°C ±(0.25% of rdg +1.0°C) ±(0.5%of rdg +5.0°C)
–100 to 600°C ±(0.25% of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.5%of rdg +4.0°C)
Pt50 –200.0 to 550.0°C ±(0.3% of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.6% of rdg + 3.0°C)
Ni100(SAMA) –200.0 to 250.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)

Ni100(DIN) –60.0 to 180.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)
Ni120 –70.0 to 200.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.4°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 2.0°C)
J263*B 0.0 to 300.0K 0 to 40 K Within ±3.0 K Within ±9.0 K
0.1K
40 to 300 K Within ±1.0 K Within ±3.0 K
RTD*1 Cu53 –50.0 to 150.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 4.0°C)
Cu100 –50.0 to 150.0°C ±(0.2% of rdg + 1.0°C) ±(0.4% of rdg + 5.0°C)
Pt25 –200.0 to 550.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 3.0°C)
Pt100GOST*2 –200.0 to 600.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 1.5°C)
0.1°C
Cu100 GOST*2 –200.0 to 200.0°C ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 1.5°C)
Cu50 GOST*2 –200.0 to 200.0°C ±(0.4% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.8% of rdg + 2.5°C)
Cu10 GOST*2 –200.0 to 200.0°C ±(1.5% of rdg + 3.0°C) ±(3.0% of rdg + 15.0°C)
Pt46 GOST*2 –200.0 to 550.0°C ±(0.3% of rdg + 0.8°C) ±(0.6% of rdg + 4.0°C)
Pt200 (WEED)*3 –100.0 to 450.0°C ±(0.3% of rdg + 0.6°C) ±(0.6% of rdg + 3.0°C)
*1 Measuring current i = 1 mA
*2 Available for release numbers 3 and later.
*3 Available for release numbers 4 and later. Double the resistance of a 100 ohm Platinum (TCR = .003902 ohms/ohm/°C) Curve A resistor
made by Weed Instrument.

Input source resistance Thermocouple input: 2 kΩ or less

RTD input: 1 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
Ambient temperature influence (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.67 ms or greater)
TC input ±(0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less, excluding the error of reference junction compensation
RTD input ±(0.2% of range + 2 digits) or less
Input source resistance
TC input With variation of +1 kΩ: ±10 µV or less
RTD input With variation of 1 Ω per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit)
or less
With maximum difference of 100 mΩ between wires: Approx. 1 °C

12-14 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.5 Options

Remote Control (/R1) 1

Item Specifications
Number of input terminals 8
Input type Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler, built-in isolated power supply for the input
terminals, and shared common. 2
Input type and signal level
Voltage-free contact Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and contact open at 100 kΩ or greater.
 The remote contact input operation can be set to normal open or normal close (release number 3 or
later) 3
Open collector ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when OFF: 0.25 mA or less
Allowable input voltage 5 VDC
Signal type Level or edge (250 ms or more)
Action Executes a specified action by applying a given signal to the remote signal input terminal.
4
Action assignment: Set using the event action function

24 VDC Transmitter Power Supply (/TPS2 and /TPS4)

Item Specifications 5
Number of loops 2 (/TPS2) or 4 (/TPS4)
Output voltage 22.8 to 25.2 VDC (under rated load current)
Rated output current 4 to 20 mADC
Max. output current 25 mADC (overcurrent protection operation current: approx. 68 mADC) 6
Allowable conductor resistance
RL ≤ (17.8 – minimum transmitter operation voltage)/0.02 A
where 17.8 V is the result obtained by subtracting the maximum drop voltage of 5 V when the load
shunt resistance is 250 Ω from the minimum output voltage of 22.8 V
Max. length of wiring 2 km (when using the CEV cable) 7
Insulation resistance 20 MΩ or more at 500 VDC between output terminal and ground
Dielectric strength 500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminal and ground
500 VAC (50/60 Hz, I = 10mA) for one minute between output terminals
8
Easy Text Entry (/KB1 and /KB2)
Item Specifications
Remote control terminal (438227)
Operating temperature range 9
0 to 40°C
Operation humidity range 20% to 80% RH (at 5 to 40°C no condensation)
Power supply 3 VDC AA dry batteries × 2
Weight Approx. 60 g (excluding the batteries) 10
External dimensions 170 (H) × 50 (W) × 23.7 (D) mm
Signal Infrared
Combination with the DX
Number of units that can be controlled individually
Up to 32 units by setting the ID number 11
Communication distance Up to 8 m from the front of the light receiving section of the DX (reference value)*
Directional characteristics
See the figure below (reference characteristics)*
* Varies depending on the operating environment such as the battery voltage and the presence or
absence of external light.
12
Standard accessories (/KB1)
Specifications

Remote control unit, two alkaline dry batteries, and ID number label
Horizontal Vertical
-30
0
30 -30
0
30 App
-45 45 -45 45
(+)
-60 60 -60 60
(+)
0 0
(- ) (- )
-90 -90
Index
90 90
15 10 5 1 1 5 10 15 15 10 5 1 1 5 10 15
Distance (m) Distance (m)

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-15
12.5 Options

USB Interface (/USB1)

Item Specifications
USB port Complies with Rev. 1.1 and host function
Number of ports 2 (one each on the front panel and rear panel)
Power supply 5 V , 500 mA (per port)
Devices which need more than 500 mA total bus power for 2 ports can not be connected at the
same time.
Connectable devices Only connect the devices listed below to prevent damage to the devices.
Keyboard Complies with HID Class Ver. 1.1
104 keyboard/89 keyboard (US) and 109 keyboard/89 keyboard (Japanese)
Number connectable units: 1
External medium USB flash memory
Does not guarantee the operation of all USB flash memories.
External medium such as a hard disk, ZIP, MO, and optical discs are not supported.
Number connectable units: 1
Barcode reader (release number 3 or later)
USB HID Class Ver. 1.1 compatible
English (U.S.) standard USB keyboard compatible

Pulse Input (/PM1)

Item Specifications
Pulse input
Number of inputs 3 (8 when using the remote control input terminals)
Input type Isolated from the main circuitry through a photocoupler and built-in isolated power supply for the
input terminals.
Shared common for pulse inputs.
Input type and signal level Voltage-free contact Contact closed at 200 Ω or less and contact open at 100 kΩ or greater
Open collector ON voltage: 0.5 V or less (sink current 30 mA or more), leakage current when
OFF: 0.25 mA or less
Counting Counts the rising edges of pulses.
For voltage-free contact input: Contact open to contact close
For open collector: Voltage level of the terminal H from high to low
Allowable input voltage 30 VDC
Max. sampling pulse period 100 Hz
Minimum detected pulse width
5 ms or more for both low (closed) and high (open)
Pulse detection period Approx. 3.9 ms (256 Hz)
Pulse measuring accuracy ±1 pulse
Pulse count interval Scan interval or 1 s
Miscellaneous Pulse input terminals can be used as remote control input terminals, isolated from remote control
input terminals
Remote control Number of inputs: 5. Same as remote control (/R1) for the other specifications
Computation function Same as the computation function (/M1)

Calibration Correction (/CC1)

Item Specifications
Calibration correction method
Corrects the measured value of each channel using segment linearizer approximation.
Number of segment points: 2 to 16 (including the start and end points)
Calibration management A function to make sure that calibration is performed regularly (release numbers 4 and later)

12-16 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.5 Options

DC/AC 24 V power supply (/P1) 1

Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage 24 VDC and 24 VAC (50/60Hz)
Allowable power supply voltage range
21.6V to 26.4 VDC/AC 2
Insulation resistance Between power terminal and earth: 20 MΩor greater at 500 VDC.
Withstand voltage Between power terminal and earth: 500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Rated power supply frequency (for AC)
50/60 Hz 3
Allowable power supply frequency range (for AC)
50 Hz ±2%, 60 Hz ±2%
Power supply fluctuation (for AC)
With variation within 21.6 to 26.4 VDC/AC: ±1digit or less 4
With variation of ±2 Hz from rated power supply frequency (at 24 VAC): ±(0.1% of rdg+1digit) or less
Rated power consumption 28 VA (for DC), 45 VA (for AC)
Power consumption
Supply voltage LCD backlight off Normal Maximum 5
24 VDC 8 VA 15 VA 28 VA
24 VAC (50/60Hz) 15 VA 24 VA 45 VA

6
Multi batch function (/BT2; release number 3 or later)
Item Specifications
Function

Individual recording start/stop and file generation operations can be performed for each batch.
Equippable models: DX1006, DX1012, DX1006N, and DX1012N
7
Number of batches 2 to 6
Batch single operations Recording start/stop, computation reset, message write
Batch overview operations Computation start/stop, report start/stop, manual sampling, setup data save/load
Scan interval Maximum speed of 1 s in normal mode only (same for all batches) 8
Data type Display or event data only. Trigger mode cannot be used for event data.
Data recording interval Same for all batches
Data files Can be displayed or made into an event data file separately for each batch
Number of display groups Up to six per batch
The maximum number of channels per group is six.
9
Channels in a display group are sampled for display or event data.
Timers and match time timers
12 max.
Batch single settings Group, trip line, file header, data file name, text field, batch number, and lot number 10
PROFIBUS-DP (/CP1 option; release number 3 or later)
Item Specifications
Function A PROFIBUS-DP master device can access internal data in the following ways:
11
Load measurement channel data
Load computation channel data
Write to communication input data (for up to 32 channels)
Data mapping 12
Buffer Description Maximum
Specifications

Size
Input Measurement channels are arranged at the start of the buffer. As many 128 bytes
computation channels as can be placed into the buffer are inserted after App
the measurement channels.
Output Up to 32 communication input data values are arranged. 128 bytes
Node address 0 to 125
Interface PROFIBUS-DP-V0 Slave
Transmission medium Two dedicated cables (one for each signal line)
Index
Transmission speed/distance 9.6 kbps/1200 m to 12 Mbps/100 m
Terminator No internal terminator (must be terminated externally)

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-17
12.5 Options

Advanced Security Function (/AS1; release numbers 4 and later)

Item Specifications
Login function Only registered users can operate the DX.
Administrators 5 administrators
Users 90 users
User identification User name, user ID, and password
Password management function Password management feature that uses Windows Server 2003 or 2008 Active Directory
feature
Supports login authentication through a Kerberos authentication server
Audit trail function
Operation log storage The operation history from the previous memory stop to the current memory stop is attached
to a data file.
Maximum operation logs: 2000
Change settings log and setup file storage
A setup file and change settings log are saved to the CF card when the settings are
changed.
Signature function (digital signature) Attaches approval information to measured data files.
Information that can be attached User name, date and time, pass/fail, comment
Number of signatures Up to 3 per file
Signature record Can be set for each user
The attached approval information cannot be deleted or changed.
Applicable files Display data files and event data files in the internal memory
When the process type is “Batch”: Undivided data files (one data file per batch)
When the process type is “Continue”: Each data file
Measured Data File Protection Measured data files are protected through operation logs, setup file storage, and encryption.
Data Formats and Extensions Files that use this function have special extensions.
Display data: .DSD, event data: .DSE, setup data: .PEL, change settings log data: .TXT
Miscellaneous (main differences from DXs without the /AS1 option)
Data types Display or event data only. Trigger mode cannot be used for event data.
Individual alarm ACK ACK operations can be performed on individual alarms.
Alarm delay time Up to 24 h
Event Action The “PnlLoad” action is not available
Key lock No
Deletion of external storage medium files
Not allowed.
Formatting of external storage media
Not allowed.
Loading of setup files You can choose whether or not to load login information.
FAIL/status output relay (/F1 and /F2 options)
You can choose from five operations to assign to the two output relays.
Automatic messages A message is written when the setting mode setup items are changed during memory
sampling.
Logs There is no login log. There is an operation log and a change settings log.

12-18 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.6 General Specifications 1

Construction
Item Specifications
2
Mounting Flush panel mounting (on a vertical plane) (excluding the desktop type)
Mounting angle Inclined backward up to 30 degrees from a horizontal plane.
Allowable panel thickness 2 to 26 mm
Material Case: Metal plate 3
Bezel and display cover: Polycarbonate
Color Case: Grayish blue green (Munsell 2.0B5.0/1.7 or equivalent)
Bezel: Charcoal gray light (Munsell 10B3.6/0.3 or equivalent)
Front panel Water and dust proof: Complies with IEC529-IP65 and NEMA No.250 TYPE 4 (except External Icing
Test) (Style number 2 or later), except side-by-side mounting 4
External dimensions 144 (W) × 144 (H) × 229 (D) mm (D: depth from the panel mounting plane)
Weight DX1000: Approx. 2.9 kg excluding options, DX1000N: Approx. 3.7 kg excluding options

Normal Operating Conditions 5

Item Specifications
Supply voltage 90 to 132, 180 to 250 VAC
Power supply frequency 50 Hz ± 2%, 60 Hz ± 2%
Ambient temperature 0 to 50°C 6
Ambient humidity 20 to 80%RH (at 5 to 40°C), 10 to 50% (at 40 to 50°C)
2
Vibration 10 to 60 Hz, 0.2 m/s
Shock Not allowed
Magnetic field 400 A/m or less (DC and 50/60 Hz)
Noise Normal mode (50/60 Hz) 7
DC voltage The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring range.
Thermocouple The peak value including the signal must be less than 1.2 times the measuring thermal
electromotive force.
RTD
Common mode noise
50 mV or less
250 VACrms or less for all ranges (50/60 Hz)
8
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50/60 Hz) or less
Mounting position Can be inclined up to 30 degrees backward. Left and right horizontal.
Warm-up time At least 30 minutes after power on 9
Installation location Indoors
Operating altitude 2000 m or less

Power Supply 10
Item Specifications
Rated supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC
Allowable power supply voltage range
90 to 132, 180 to 264 VAC
Rated power supply frequency 50 Hz, 60 Hz 11
Power consumption Supply voltage LCD backlight off Normal Maximum
100 VAC 15 VA 24 VA 45 VA
240 VAC 25 VA 32 VA 60 VA
Allowable interruption time Less than 1 cycle of the power supply frequency 12
Isolation
Specifications

Item Specifications
Insulation resistance Between the Ethernet, RS-422/485, and insulation terminals and earth: 20 MΩ or greater at 500 VDC App
Withstand voltage Between the power terminal and earth: 2300 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the contact output terminal and earth: 1600 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Between the measurement input terminal and earth: 1500 VAC at 50/60 Hz for one minute
Mutually between measurement input terminals: 1000 VAC (50/60 Hz) for one minute (excluding
the RTD input terminal of DX1006, DX1012,
Index
DX1006N and DX1012N)
Between the remote input terminal and earth: 1000 VDC for one minute
Between the pulse input terminal and earth: 1000 VDC for one minute
Ground Grounding resistance: 100 Ω or less
IM 04L41B01-01E 12-19
12.6 General Specifications

Transport and Storage Conditions

Item Specifications
Ambient temperature –25 to 60°C
Ambient humidity 5 to 95%RH (no condensation)
2
Vibration 10 to 60 Hz, 4.9 m/s maximum
2
Shock 392 m/s maximum (in packaged condition)

Supported Standards
Item Specifications
*1 *2
CSA CSA22.2 No.61010.1, CSA C22.2 No.61010-2-030, installation category II , pollution degree 2 ,
*3
and measurement category II
UL UL61010-1, UL 61010-2-030 (CSA NRTL/C)
CE
EMC directive EN61326-1 compliance, Class A, Table 2 (For use in industrial locations)
EN61000-3-2 compliance
EN61000-3-3 compliance
EN55011 compliance, Class A, Group 1
*1 *2
Low voltage directive EN61010-1, EN 61010-2-030 compliance, installation category II , pollution degree 2 , and
*3
measurement category II
EMC regulatory arrangement in Australia and New Zealand
EN55011 compliance, Class A, Group 1
KC marking Electromagnetic wave interference prevention standard, electromagnetic wave protection standard
compliance
*4
WEEE directive Compliant
*1 Installation category (overvoltage category) II: Describes a number which defines a transient overvoltage condition. Iimplies the regulation for
impulse withstand voltage. “II” applies to electrical equipment which is supplied from the fixed installation like a distribution board.
*2 Pollution degree 2: Describes the degree to which a solid, liquid, or gas which deteriorates dielectric strength or surface resistivity is adhering. “2”
applies to normal indoor atmosphere. Normally, only non-conductive pollution occurs.
*3 Measurement category II: Applies to measuring circuits connected to low voltage installation, and electrical instruments supplied with power
from fixed equipment such as electric switchboards.
*4 DX1000N is excluded.

12-20 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.6 General Specifications

Standard Performance 1
Item Specifications
Measurement/display accuracy
Standard operating conditions:
Temperature: 23 ± 2°C 2
Humidity: 55% ± 10%RH
Power supply voltage: 90 to 132 or 180 to 250 VAC
Power supply frequency: 50/60 Hz ± 1%
Warm-up time: At least 30 minutes.
Other ambient conditions such as vibration should not adversely affect the operation. 3
Input Type Range Measurement Accuracy (Digital Display) Max. Resolution
A/D integration time: 16.7 ms or more A/D Integration Time: 1.67 ms of Digital Display
20 mV ±(0.05% of rdg + 12 digits) ±(0.1% of rdg + 40 digits) 1 μV
60 mV
200 mV
±(0.05% of rdg + 3 digits) ±(0.1% of rdg + 15 digits)
10 μV
10 μV
4
2V ±(0.05% of rdg + 12 digits) ±(0.1% of rdg + 40 digits) 100 μV
DC voltage
1-5 V 1 mV
6V 1 mV
20 V
±(0.05% of rdg + 3 digits) ±(0.1% of rdg + 15 digits)
1 mV 5
50 V 10 mV
R ±(0.15% of rdg + 1°C) ±(0.2% of rdg + 4°C)
R, S 0 to 100°C:±3.7°C, R, S 0 to 100°C: ±10°C,
S 100 to 300°C:±1.5°C 100 to 300°C: ±5°C
B 400 to 600°C:±2°C, B 400 to 600°C: ±7°C, 6
B Accuracy not guaranteed Accuracy not guaranteed for values
Thermocouple for values less than 400°C. less than 400°C.
(Not including K ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C) ±(0.2% of rdg + 3.5°C)
the accuracy of
–200 to –100°C: ±(0.15% of rdg + 1°C) –200 to –100°C:±(0.15% of rdg + 6°C)
reference
junction E ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C) 7
compensation; J –200 to –100°C: ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C) –200 to –100°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C) 0.1°C
when burnout T
detection N ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 3.5°C)
function is off.) –200 to 0°C: ±(0.35% of rdg + 0.7°C)
Accuracy not guaranteed for values less
–200 to 0°C: ±(0.7% of rdg + 3.5°C)
Accuracy not guaranteed for values less
8
than –200°C. than –200°C.
W ±(0.15% of rdg + 1°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 7°C)
L ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.5°C) ±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
U
WRe
–200 to –100°C: ±(0.15% of rdg + 0.7°C)
±(0.2% of rdg + 2.5°C)
–200 to –100°C: ±(0.2% of rdg + 5°C)
±(0.3% of rdg + 10°C)
9
0 to 200°C: ±4.0°C 0 to 200°C: ±18.0°C
RTD Pt100
±(0.15% of rdg + 0.3°C) ±(0.3% of rdg + 1.5°C)
JPt100
DI Voltage Threshold level (Vth=2.4 V) accuracy ± 0.1 V 10
Contact With parallel capacitance of 0.01 µF or less, 1 kΩ or less: 1 (ON). 100 kΩ or more: 0 (OFF).

11

12
Specifications

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-21
12.6 General Specifications

Item Specifications
Measuring accuracy in case of scaling
Accuracy during scaling (digits) = measurement accuracy (digits) × multiplier + 2 digits (rounded up)
* Fractions rounded up
where the multiplier = scaling span (digits)/measuring span (digits).
Example For 1-5 V range (A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or more), measurement span of 1.000 to
5.000 V, and scaling span of 0.000 to 2.000
The measuring accuracy for 5 V input is as follows.
Measuring accuracy (1-5 Vrange) = ±  (0.05% × 5 V + 3 digits) = ±(0.0025 V [3 digits] + 3
digits) = ±6 digits
Multiplier = {2000 digits (0.000 to 2.000)}/4000 digits (1.000 to 5.000) = 0.5
Thus, accuracy during scaling = ±(6 × 0.5 + 2) digits = 5 digits (rounded up)
Reference junction compensation accuracy
When measuring temperature greater than or equal to 0 °C and when input terminal temperature is balanced
Type R, S, W, WRe: ±1.0°C
Type K, J, E, T, N, L, and U: ±0.5°C. Type B: Internal reference compensation is fixed to 0°C
Maximum input voltage ±60 VDC (continuous)
Input resistance 200 mV range or less and TC: 10 MΩ or more
2 V range or higher: Approx. 1 MΩ
Input source resistance
Volt, TC 2 kΩ or less
RTD input 10 Ω or less per wire (The resistance of all three wires must be equal).
Bias current 10 nA or less (except when burnout detection function is enabled)
Maximum common mode noise voltage
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Maximum noise voltage between channels
250 VACrms (50 Hz/60 Hz)
Interference across channels 120 dB (when the input source resistance is 500 Ω and the input to other channels is 60 VDC)
Common mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
120 dB (50 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
When the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms
120 dB (60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
When the A/D integration time is 1.67 ms
80 dB or higher (50/60 Hz ± 0.1%, 500 Ω unbalanced, between the minus terminal and ground)
Normal mode rejection ratio
When the A/D integration time is 20 ms
40 dB or more (50 Hz ± 0.1%)
When the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms
40 dB or more (60 Hz ± 0.1%)
When the A/D integration time is 1.67 ms
Not reject 50/60 Hz

Effects of Operating Conditions

Item Specifications
Ambient temperature (applies when the A/D integration time is 16.7 ms or greater, with temperature variation of 10°C)
DC voltage, TC range ±(0.1% of rdg + 0.05% of range) or less
* Excluding the error of reference junction compensation
RTD range ±(0.1% of rdg + 2 digits) or less
Power supply fluctuation With variation within 90 to 132 V and 180 to 250 VAC (50/60 Hz):
Accuracy specifications are satisfied.
With variation of ±2 Hz from rated power frequency (power supply voltage 100 VAC):
Accuracy specifications are satisfied.
Magnetic field AC (50/60 Hz) and DC 400 A/m fields: ±(0.1% of rdg + 10 digits) or less
Input source resistance
DC voltage range With variation of +1 kΩ:
200 mV range or less: ±10 µV or less
2 V range or higher: ±0.15% of rdg or less
TC range With variation of +1 kΩ: ±10 µV or less
RTD range (Pt100) With variation of 10 Ω per wire (resistance of all three wires must be equal): ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digits) or less
With maximum difference of 40 mΩ between wires: Approx. 0.1 °C
Effects of vibration Effects from a sinusoidal vibration along all three axis at a frequency between 10 to 60 Hz and an
2
acceleration of 0.2 m/s : ±(0.1% of rdg + 1 digit) or less

12-22 IM 04L41B01-01E
 12.6 General Specifications

Miscellaneous 1
Item Specifications
Memory backup A built-in lithium battery backs up the settings and runs the clock
Battery life: Approximately 10 years (at room temperature)
2

10

11

12
Specifications

App

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E 12-23
 12.7 External Dimensions
See the DX1000/DX1000N Operation Guide (IM04L41B01-02E).

12-24 IM 04L41B01-01E
Appendix

Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data 1

This section explains how to calculate the file size of display data files and event data
2
files. The calculation examples are given for the display data only and event data only
cases. If you are recording both display and event data, calculate the data size of each
and add them together.
Use the calculated file size as a rough guide. 3
These calculation examples only apply to DXs that do not have the /AS1 advanced
security option.

File Size
4
A file consists of the following data.
Information other than the sampled data + the sampled data
The maximum size of a single display data file or event data file is 8 MB.
5
Size of Information Other Than the Sampled Data
Item Size [Bytes]
File header
Channel information
216
88×N + 32
6
Group information 96×10 + 32 = 992
Message information 104*50 + 32 (an add message area is reserved by default)
Batch information 832
Sampled data header 80 + 32 + N×8 + 16 + 2 7
Alarm information header 24 + 8 (add the size of this item even if there is no alarm)
Message information Up to 104×1050 (varies depending on the number of messages)
Alarm information Up to 32×5000 (varies depending on the number of alarms)
Release number 3 expansion
information
1696 + 80×N 8
Expansion information is always stored.
N is the number of channels (measurement channels + computation channels).

Example 1: If display data of 12 measurement channels and 24 computation

channels is recorded. There are no messages or alarms. 9
216 + (88 × 36 + 32) + 992 + (104 × 50 + 32) + 832 + (80 + 32 + 36 × 8 + 16 + 2) + (24
+ 8) + 4,576
= 15,498 bytes 10
Sampled Data Size
• Data Size of Display Data and Event Data
Channel Display Data Event Data
11
Measurement channel 4 bytes/channel 2 bytes/channel
Computation channel 8 bytes/channel 4 bytes/channel

Time data common to all channels is added for each sample.

12
Time data 8 bytes/sample

• Data Size per Sample App

Display Data
(Number of measurement channels×4 bytes) + (number of computation channels×8
Appendix

bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)

Index
Event Data
(Number of measurement channels×2 bytes) + (number of computation channels×4
bytes) + 8 bytes (time data)

IM 04L41B01-01E App-1
Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data

• Sampled Data Size per File

Display Data
Data size per sample × file save interval/sampling interval
The sampling interval is determined by dividing the trend interval (in seconds) by 30 (40
if the trend interval is 5 or 10 s).

Example 2: If the display data of 12 measurement channels and 24 computation

channels is recorded with a trend interval of 30 min/div (the sampling interval of
display data is 60 s) and a file save interval of 1 day (24 h)

(12×4 bytes + 24×8 bytes + 8 bytes)×24 h×60×60/60 s

= 248 bytes×24 h×60×60/60 s
= 357,120 bytes

Event Data
Data size per sample×data length/sample rate

Example 3: If the event data of 12 measurement channels and 24 computation

channels is recorded with a sample rate of 1 s and data length of 2 h

(12×2 bytes + 24×4 bytes + 8 bytes)×2 h×60×60/1 s

= 128 bytes×2 h×60×60/1 s
= 921,600 bytes

Size per File

The size per file is the sum of the size of information other than the sampled data and the
size of the sampled data.
Display Data
Example 4: If recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 2
From examples one and two, we obtain 15,498 + 357,120 = 372,618 bytes = 0.355
MB

Event Data
Example 5: If recording under the conditions of examples 1 and 3
From examples one and three, we obtain 15,498 + 921,600 = 937,098 bytes = 0.893
MB

App-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Appendix 1 File Size of Display Data and Event Data

Save Duration to the CF Card 1

We will estimate the duration over which measured data can be saved to a CF card when
measured data is being saved automatically.
Display Data
Save duration to the CF card (estimate) = (Size of the CF card/size of a file)×[file save 2
interval]
Example 6: We will estimate the save duration to the CF card under the conditions
of examples 1 and 2. In this example, the size of the CF card is assumed to be 256
MB.
3
256 MB/0.355 MB × 24 h
= 17,307 h
= 721 days 4
Event Data
Save duration to the CF card (estimate) = (Size of the CF card/size of a file)×[data
length] 5
Example 7: We will estimate the time until the CF card needs to be replaced
under the conditions of examples 1 and 3. In this example, the size of the CF card is
assumed to be 256 MB.
6
256 MB/0.893 MB × 2 h
= 573 h
= 23 days
7
Note
If you format a 256-MB CF card, you will be able to use approximately 246 MB.

8
Time until the Internal Memory Becomes Full
If you are manually saving the measured data in the internal memory, old data is
overwritten when the internal memory is full. You must save the measured data to the CF
card before the data is overwritten. 9
Display Data
Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/
size of a file)×[file save interval]
Example 8: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under 10
the conditions of examples 1 and 2. The size of the internal memory is 400 M bytes.

400 MB/0.355 MB × 24 h
= 1,126 files × 24 h 11
Because the maximum number of the files that can be held in the internal memory is
400, the time until the internal memory becomes full is 400 files × 24 h = 400 days.

Event Data
12
Time until the internal memory becomes full (estimate) = (Size of the internal memory/
size of a file)×[data length]
Example 9: We will estimate the time until the internal memory becomes full under App
the conditions of examples 1 and 3. The size of the internal memory is 400 M bytes.
Appendix

400 MB/0.893 MB × 2 h
= 447 files × 2 h
Because the maximum number of the files that can be held in the internal memory is
Index
400, the time until the internal memory becomes full is 400 files × 2 h = 800 h = 33
days.

IM 04L41B01-01E App-3
 Appendix 2 Types of Data FilesThat the DX Can
Create and Their Application
This section explains the types of data files that the DX can create and their application.
*1
Data Type Extension Format Display Method
DX DAQ Application
*2, *3
Display data DAD Binary (undisclosed) Yes Yes Yes
*2, *3
DSD Yes Yes Yes
*2, *3
Event data DAE Binary (undisclosed) Yes Yes Yes
*2, *3
DSE Yes Yes Yes
Report data DAR Text (see appendix 3) - Yes Yes
xml XML spreadsheet - - Yes
Manual sampled data DAM Text (see appendix 3) - - Yes
Setup data PDL Binary (undisclosed) - - -
PEL - - -
Snapshot data PNG PNG (general format) - - Yes
Custom display setup data CDC Text - - -
Change settings log TXT Text - - Yes
*1 DX: DX main unit, DAQ: DAQSTANDARD, Application: Software application
*2 The data format can be converted on DAQSTANDARD and displayed on a software application
such as Microsoft Excel.
*3 The data can be retrieved from the DX using the communication function and displayed on a
software application.

App-4 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Appendix 3 Text File Data Format 1

This section explains the format of text files. The text files that the DX can create are
2
manual sampled data files and report files.
In the explanation below, CRLF represents a terminator.

Format of the Manual Sample Data File 3

• The manual sampled data is output using numerical values and strings in text format
delimited by tabs.
• Values of measurement channels set to Skip and computation channels set to Off are
not output. 4
• The data is appended to the file each time manual sample operation is performed.

Format 5
YRECCRLF
Manual Sample Data Version 1.02.00 CRLF
Model DX1000 CRLF
Language Code shift-JIS CRLF 6
File Status ffffffff CRLF
Serial No. III···I CRLF
File Header HHH···H CRLF
7
Ch ccccc ccccc ··· cccccCRLF
Ch Id ddd···d ddd···d ··· ddd···dCRLF
Tag ttt···t ttt···t ··· ttt···tCRLF
Unit uuuuuu uuuuuu ··· uuuuuuCRLF 8
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss nnn···n nnn···n ··· nnn···nCRLF
* Ch Id is only output when Tag numbers are being used, on DXs with release number 3 or
later.
9
ffffffff File status (8 characters)
Complete Completed. (A file with 100 manually sampled
data acquisitions that is now complete.)
Progress D  ata is being added. (An incomplete file that 10
does not yet have 100 manually sampled data
acquisitions.)
Decrease The file is defective. (A file that is missing some
of the manually sampled data that was stored
11
on it.)
III···I Serial number of the DX (16 characters)
HHH···H File header (50 characters) 12
ccccc Channel number (5 characters)
ddd···d Tag number (16 characters)
ttt···t Tag comment (32 characters)
uuuuuu Unit (6 characters) App
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Sampling year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
Appendix

nnn···n Measured value (13 characters)

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E App-5
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

File Output Example

Below is a manual sample data example of channels 1, 2, 3, and 4.

YREC
Manual Sample Data Version 1.02.00
Model DX1000
Language Code shift-JIS
File Status Progress
Serial No. S5E701600
File Header
Ch CH001 CH002 CH003 CH004
Ch Id TI-101 OUT-102 FI-103 VA-204
Tag abc def hij klmn
Unit °C V m3/h %
2005/10/01 08:57:22 213.8 0.517 368.4 68.9
2005/10/01 08:57:28 208.6 0.494 363.0 68.1

Note
• Output when error data, overrange data, or computation overflow data is detected
Channel Data Output
Measurement channels Error (Space)
+over range (includes burnout detection) 99999
–over range (includes burnout detection) –99999
Computation channel Error 999999999
Positive computation overflow 999999999
(when the value exceeds 99999999)
Negative computation overflow –999999999
(when the value falls below –9999999)
The decimal place that was specified when the span for
the channel was specified applies to the output values. For
example, if the span setting of the channel is “200.0,” then
“999999999” is output when the value exceeds “9999999.9”
and “–999999999” is output when the value is below “–
999999.9.”

• A new manual sampled data file is created in the following cases.

• A measurement channel is changed to Skip from a range other than Skip.
• A measurement channel is changed from Skip to a range other than Skip.
• A computation channel is changed from On to Off or Off to On.
• The unit is changed.

App-6 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

Report File Format 1

• The hourly, daily, weekly, and monthly reports are output using numeric values and
strings in text format delimited by tabs.
• Values of measurement channels set to Skip and computation channels set to Off are
not output. 2
• The data is appended to this file every time a report is created.

Format
YRECCRLF 3
Report Data Version 1.02.00 CRLF
Model DX1000 CRLF
Language Code shift-JIS CRLF
File Status ffffffff CRLF 4
Serial No. III···I CRLF
File Header HHH···H CRLF
Report Set RRR···R CRLF
File Data rrr···r CRLF
5
Math Set MMM MMM MMM MMMMCRLF
Start Time YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SS CRLF
Ch ccccc ccccc ··· cccccCRLF 6
Ch Id ddd···d ddd···d ··· ddd···dCRLF
Tag ttt···t ttt···t ··· ttt···tCRLF
Unit uuuuuu uuuuuu ··· uuuuuuCRLF
Data Type sss···s CRLF 7
Time yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss CRLF
Status eeeeeeeeee CRLF
Ave nnn···n nnn···n ··· nnn···nCRLF
Max nnn···n nnn···n ··· nnn···nCRLF 8
Min nnn···n nnn···n ··· nnn···nCRLF
Sum nnn···n nnn···n ··· nnn···nCRLF
* Ch Id is only output when Tag numbers are being used, on DXs with release number 3 or
later.
9

ffffffff File status (8 characters)

Complete  Completed. (A file with the necessary number of 10
acquisitions for its report type, for example one
acquisition for an Hourly report type, that is now
complete.)
Progress  Data is being added. (An incomplete file that does 11
not yet have the necessary number of acquisitions
for its report type.)
Decrease  The file is defective. (A file that is missing some of
the report data that was stored on it.)
12
III···I Serial number of the DX (16 characters)
HHH···H File header (50 characters)
RRR···R Report setting (setting on the DX) (13 characters) App
Hourly
Daily
Appendix

Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly Index
Daily+Monthly

IM 04L41B01-01E App-7
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

rrr···r Contents of the report file (13 characters)

Hourly
Daily
Hourly+Daily
Daily+Weekly
Daily+Monthly
Example: When the DX is set to Hourly+Daily and
Combine, Hourly+Daily is output.
When the DX is set to Hourly+Daily and
Separate, the hourly report is output as Hourly,
and the daily report as Daily.
MMMM Report items (16 characters (including tabs that are counted
as one character each), up to four types)
Ave
Max
Min
Sum
Inst Instantaneous value
YYYY/MO/DD HH:MI:SS Report start year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
ccccc Channel number (5 characters)
ddd···d Tag number (16 characters)
ttt···t Tag comment (32 characters)
uuuuuu Unit (6 characters)
eeeeeeeeee Status (output the events that occurred while creating report
data) (10 characters)
Bo Burn out detected
Er Error (error detection)
Ov Over (overrange/computation overflow detection)
Pw Power failure (power failure occurrence)
Cg Change (time change present)
SSS···S Report type (7 characters)
Hourly
Daily
Weekly
Monthly
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Report year, month, day, and time (19 characters)
nnn···n Average, maximum, minimum, sum, or instantaneous value
(13 characters)

App-8 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

File Output Example 1

Below is an example of an hourly report of 4 channels while creating hourly and daily
reports and saving each type of report to a separate file.
YREC
Report Data Version 1.02.00 2
Model DX1000
Language Code shift-JIS
File Status Complete
Serial No. S5E701600 3
File Header
Report Set Hourly+Daily
File Data Hourly
4
Math Set Ave Max Min Sum
Start Time 2005/10/01 08:10:56
Ch Id TI-101 OUT-102 FI-103 VA-204
Tag abc def hij klmn 5
Unit °C V m3/h %
Data Type Hourly
Time 2005/10/01 09:00:00
Status 6
Ave 91.5 -0.039 241.1 48.6
Max 259.8 0.726 416.5 76.6
Min -59.9 -0.727 83.4 23.3
Sum 3.293636E+05 -1.392980E+02 8.680871E+05 1.748983E+05
7

10

11

12

App
Appendix

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E App-9
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

Note
• When the channel data is in the condition shown in the table below, the Er, Ov, or Bo status
is output to a report.
Data Condition Status
Error Er
Measurement channels
Positive over range Ov
Negative over range Ov
Burn out detection Bo
Computation channels
Positive computation overflow (when the value exceeds 1.79E + 308) Ov
Negative computation overflow (when the value falls below –1.79E + 308) Ov

• The report output value of Ave, Max, Min, Sum, and Inst varies depending on the channel
data condition as shown in the table below.
Item Data Condition of Measurement Channels Report
Output Value
Ave When all of the data are errors or over range (Space)
Max, • When all of the data are errors (Space)
Min, • For +over range (includes burnout detection) 99999
Inst • For –over range (includes burnout detection) –99999
Sum • When all of the data are errors or over range (Space)
• When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E + 38 9.999999E+99
• When the sum value is below approx. –3.4E + 38 –9.999999E+99

Item Data Condition of Computation Channels Report

Output Value
Ave When all of the data are errors or computation overflow (Space)
Max, • When all of the data are errors (Space)
Min, • When the maximum value or instantaneous value 999999999
exceeds 99999999
Inst • When the minimum value or instantaneous value is –999999999
less than –9999999
Sum • When all of the data are errors or computation overflow (Space)
• When the sum value exceeds approx. 3.4E + 38 9.999999E+99
• When the sum value is below approx. –3.4E + 38 –9.999999E+99
* The decimal place that was specified when the span for the channel was specified
applies to the maximum and minimum values or the instantaneous values. For example,
if the span setting of the channel is “200.0,” then “999999999” is output when the value
exceeds “9999999.9” and “–999999999” is output when the value is below “–999999.9.”

App-10 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

Format of the Change Settings Log (/AS1 option) 1

• The change settings log is output as a tab-separated text file.
• Each time a report is created, data is added to the file.

Format 2
YRECCRLF
Setting Change Data Version 1.00.00CRLF
File Status ffffffffCRLF
Serial No. III•••ICRLF 3
Changed yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ssCRLF
Contents ccc•••cCRLF
File Info ddd•••d nnn•••nCRLF
User Info ppp•••p ttt•••t uuu•••uCRLF 4
ffffffff File status (8 characters)
Complete Completed (A file with 100 change settings
log entries that is now complete.)
5
Progress Data is being added. (An incomplete file that
does not yet have 100 change settings log
entries.) 6
III•••I Serial number (up to 16 characters)
yyyy/mo/dd hh:mi:ss Year, month, day, and time when the setting change was
executed (19 characters)
ccc•••c The following are connected with pluses (16 characters). 7
Eng Changing of setting mode settings
Sys Changing of basic setting mode settings
Login Changing of login information
ddd•••d File serial number (10 characters)
8
nnn•••n File name (12 characters)
ppp•••p Type of setting change (10 characters)
Manual Settings changed by the user
9
ttt•••t Input method (8 characters)
Key Settings changed by the user
Communication Settings changed by the user
uuu•••u User name (20 characters) 10

11

12

App
Appendix

Index

IM 04L41B01-01E App-11
Appendix 3 Text File Data Format

File Output Example

Below is an example of a change settings log file with two change settings log entries.

YREC
Setting Change Data Version 1.00.00
File Status Progress
Serial No. S5H907377
Changed 2010/04/01 00:55:44
Contents Sys
File Info 209 40100550.PEL
User Info Manual KEY
Changed 2010/04/02 00:56:18
Contents Login
File Info 210 40100560.PEL
User Info Manual KEY Admin1

App-12 IM 04L41B01-01E
Index

Index 1

Symbols batch function.............................................................. 6-7, 12-10

batch name.............................................................................. 6-7 2
**.............................................................................................. 9-6 brightness...................................................................... 1-25, 2-8
[a?b:c].................................................................................... 9-10 burnout.......................................................................... 1-15, 3-2
-Over...................................................................................... 1-15 burnout Detection.................................................................... 1-2
+Over..................................................................................... 1-15
C 3
Numerics
calculate the file size........................................................... App-1
3 leg isolated RTD input...................................................... 12-14 calendar................................................................................. 4-16
24 VDC transmitter power supply........................................ 12-15 calibration...............................................................................11-2
24 V power supply............................................................... 12-17 calibration correction......................................... 1-3, 3-16, 12-16 4
calibration due date............................................................... 3-32
A calibration management.......................................................... 1-3
ABS......................................................................................... 9-6 calibration notification screen................................................ 3-31
absolute time......................................................................... 4-19 CARRY.................................................................................. 9-10
absolute time mode............................................................... 1-38 change message..................................................................... 5-5 5
action..................................................................................... 1-39 change settings log..................................................... 4-39, 12-7
added messages................................................................... 1-17 changing settings during recording....................................... 6-13
A/D integration time................................................................. 3-1 channel (computation)........................................................... 1-44
channel display colors........................................................... 5-10
administrator.................................................................. 1-43, 8-5
advanced security function........................................ 1-56, 12-18 channel number....................................................................... 5-3 6
advanced security option....................................................... 1-40 clamped input terminal.........................................................12-11
alarm............................................................................. 1-4, 12-2 CLOG computation.................................................................. 9-9
alarm ACK..................................................................... 1-7, 3-15 color scale band.................................................................... 5-16
alarm acknowledge................................................................. 1-7
alarm acknowledge operation............................................... 3-15
comma................................................................................... 2-26
comment text block............................................................... 5-34
7
alarm annunciator.......................................................... 1-8, 3-21 comment text field................................................................. 5-34
alarm colors............................................................................. 1-5 communication application errors.......................................... 10-9
alarm delay time............................................................ 3-14, 9-3 communication errors.......................................................... 10-15
alarm hide function.................................................................. 1-5 communication functions..................................................... 12-10
communication log................................................................ 4-36
8
alarm indication....................................................................... 1-5
alarm levels............................................................................. 1-5 computation channel............................................................... 9-1
alarm mark indication............................................................ 5-15 computation data dropout............................................ 1-47, 9-15
alarm output relay.................................................1-6, 3-8, 12-11 computation error.................................................................... 9-4
alarm settings.........................................................................3-11 computation function................................................. 1-44, 12-12 9
alarm summary............................................................ 1-20, 4-28 computation types................................................................. 1-44
alarm value............................................................................ 3-13 conditional expression........................................................... 9-10
all channel............................................................................. 4-17 configuration (storage).......................................................... 12-6
all channel display......................................................... 4-6, 4-17 construction (DX)................................................................. 12-19
all data display....................................................................... 4-13 continuing data...................................................................... 4-12 10
AND......................................................................................... 9-7 count (moving average)........................................................... 3-6
AND/OR................................................................................... 1-6 Cu10, Cu25 RTD input........................................................ 12-13
annunciator display............................................................... 3-23 current value display............................................................. 5-14
annunciator sequence................................................. 3-21, 3-25 cursor (historical trend).......................................................... 4-12
annunciator windows............................................................. 3-23 cursor time............................................................................. 4-19 11
auto increment......................................................................... 6-7 custom display....................................................................... 1-56
auto logout............................................................. 1-43, 8-4, 8-6 custom display setup data........................................... 1-35, 12-8
automatic message writing.................................................... 1-12 customizing the display selection menus.............................. 5-29
customizing the FUNC key menus........................................ 5-29
auto save....................................................................... 1-31, 6-5
auto scroll................................................................................ 4-6 customizing the menus.................................................. 1-24, 4-3 12
auto span............................................................................... 4-20
auto span display.................................................................. 1-18 D
auto zone............................................................. 1-13, 4-6, 4-17 data display section................................................................. 1-9
data file loading..................................................................... 12-8 App
B data files that the DX can create......................................... App-4
background color......................................................... 1-25, 5-23 data kind.................................................................................. 6-2
background color (historical trend)........................................ 4-21 data length............................................................................... 6-3
backlight saver.............................................................. 1-25, 2-8 data save mode........................................................... 2-24, 4-33
barcode reader...................................................................... 2-22 data that can be used in equations....................................... 1-46 Index
bar graph display........................................................... 1-16, 4-4 data type................................................................................ 12-6
data types.............................................................................. 1-26
Index

base position (bar graphs)..................................................... 5-20

basic setting mode................................................................ 2-27 date format.................................................................... 1-54, 2-4
batch comment.............................................................. 1-36, 6-7 date/time.................................................................................. 2-1

IM 04L41B01-01E Index-1
Index
decimal point type................................................................. 2-26 fixed (alarm mark).................................................................. 5-15
de-energize............................................................................. 1-7 flag......................................................................................... 1-46
delay high limit alarm............................................................... 1-4 flow of data recording and storage........................................ 1-27
delay low limit alarm................................................................ 1-4 format of the change settings log...................................... App-11
deleting a file......................................................................... 6-17 formatting.............................................................................. 6-17
desktop type........................................................................ 12-12 format type............................................................................ 6-17
detect (alarm hide function)................................................... 3-14 four arithmetic operation.......................................................... 9-6
DHCP log............................................................................... 4-38 free (event data)............................................................ 1-29, 6-3
difference computation............................................................ 1-3 free messages............................................................... 1-12, 5-9
difference lower limit alarm...................................................... 1-4 free space.............................................................................. 6-17
difference upper limit alarm..................................................... 1-4 FTP log.................................................................................. 4-36
digital display................................................................. 1-15, 4-4 FUNC key menu............................................................ 4-2, 5-30
digit (scale value).................................................................. 5-14
directory (data save).............................................................. 1-31 G
display color (channels)......................................................... 5-10
GE........................................................................................... 9-6
display color (messages)......................................................... 5-9
gradually correcting the internal clock................................... 1-54
display comments.................................................................. 5-33
graph display........................................................................... 1-9
display data................................................ 1-261-56, 1-28, 12-6
grid........................................................................................ 5-19
display direction (bar graphs)................................................ 5-20
groups..................................................................................... 5-1
display direction (messages)................................................. 5-19
group set................................................................................. 5-1
display direction (trend)......................................................... 5-19
GT............................................................................................ 9-6
displayed information............................................................ 12-3
displayed language............................................................... 1-55
display group........................................................................... 5-1 H
display (LCD)......................................................................... 12-3 historical trend display................................................... 1-17, 4-9
display menu................................................................. 4-1, 5-31 HOLD.................................................................................... 9-10
display positions.................................................................... 3-24 hold (alarm indication)............................................................. 1-5
display selection menu.................................................. 4-1, 5-31 hold (alarm output relay)......................................................... 1-7
display window...................................................................... 3-24 hysteresis........................................................................ 1-4, 3-9
display zone...........................................................................5-11
divided (report file)................................................................. 9-17 I
division (scale)....................................................................... 5-13
identified strings...................................................................... 6-5
DST (daylight saving time)............................................ 1-54, 2-1
ID number.............................................................................. 2-15
indicator................................................................................... 3-8
E individual alarm ACK operation............................................. 4-23
easy text entry........................................................... 1-55, 12-15 information on the displayed measured data........................ 4-21
effects of operating conditions............................................. 12-22 initialize.................................................................................. 2-10
e-mail log............................................................................... 4-37 inner instrument......................................................................11-4
energize................................................................................... 1-7 input calibration interval......................................................... 3-30
EQ........................................................................................... 9-6 input processing...................................................................... 1-2
error codes............................................................................ 10-1 input range.............................................................................. 3-3
error data............................................................................... 1-50 input type......................................................................... 1-1, 3-4
error log................................................................................. 4-36 integration time........................................................................ 1-1
error messages..................................................................... 10-1 internal memory..................................................................... 1-27
errors related to parameter settings...................................... 10-1 internal switch........................................................ 1-7, 1-37, 3-8
event...................................................................................... 1-37 interval (rate-of-change alarm)........................................ 1-4, 3-7
event action......................................................... 1-37, 7-1, 12-9 invalid keys............................................................................ 2-21
event data.......................................................... 1-26, 1-28, 12-6 invalid user relay................................................................... 1-52
event level switch status........................................................ 1-24 ISA-A..................................................................................... 3-27
event level switch status display........................................... 4-27 ISA-A-4.................................................................................. 3-25
EXP......................................................................................... 9-6 ISA-M..................................................................................... 3-29
expressions (computation)...................................................... 9-5 isolation............................................................................... 12-19
extended input type............................................................. 12-14
extension (file)....................................................................... 1-33 J
external dimensions............................................................ 12-24
jump default display............................................................... 5-25
external storage medium....................................................... 1-31

F K
keyboard................................................................................ 2-20
FAIL output.................................................................. 1-52, 2-13
key lock......................................................................... 1-42, 8-1
FAIL/status output relay........................................................12-11
keywords............................................................................... 9-20
fast sampling mode................................................................. 1-1
favorite key.................................................................. 1-24, 5-26
file header................................................................................ 6-5 L
file name................................................................................ 1-33 LE............................................................................................ 9-6
file size................................................................................ App-1 limitations (expressions).......................................................... 9-5
fine grid.......................................................................... 4-6, 4-18 linear scaling........................................................................... 1-3
firmware version...................................................................... 2-5 line width of the trend............................................................ 5-19
first weekday......................................................................... 4-16 list of files............................................................................... 6-16

Index-2 IM 04L41B01-01E
 Index
LN............................................................................................ 9-6 operation logs........................................................................ 4-35
loading a file.......................................................................... 6-18 operations that can be carried out when logged out............. 1-43 1
loading a template file........................................................... 6-22 OR........................................................................................... 9-7
loading setup data................................................................. 6-21 order of precedence (computation)......................................... 9-5
LOG......................................................................................... 9-6 overflow data................................................................. 1-50, 9-4
log display............................................................................. 1-24
logging in................................................................................. 8-6
overview display.......................................................... 1-19, 4-22
2
logging out............................................................................... 8-6 P
logical computation.................................................................. 9-7
parameters............................................................................ 9-22
login function................................................................. 1-43, 8-4
partial expanded display.............................................. 1-14, 5-17
login log................................................................................. 4-35
log into the DX......................................................................... 8-6
parts replacement...................................................................11-1 3
password change.................................................................... 8-7
lot-No. digit.............................................................................. 6-7
password (login function)........................................................ 8-5
lot number............................................................................. 1-36
point....................................................................................... 2-26
low-cut............................................................................. 1-3, 3-5
power computations................................................................ 9-6
LT............................................................................................. 9-6
power-fail message............................................................... 5-28 4
power failure operation.......................................................... 1-50
M power supply....................................................................... 12-19
MAC address........................................................................... 2-5 power supply for transmitter.................................................. 1-55
maintenance...........................................................................11-1
maintenance and test communication command errors...... 10-15
PRE....................................................................................... 9-10
preset display........................................................................ 5-25
5
manuals........................................................................................i pre-trigger................................................................................ 6-3
manual sampled data.............................. 1-26, 1-30, 6-14, 12-7 pretrigger............................................................................... 1-29
manual sampled data (format)............................................ App-5 processing order of computation........................................... 1-46
manual save.......................................................................... 1-32
match time timer............................................................ 1-37, 7-4
PROFIBUS-DP.................................................................... 12-17
progress of the save operation.............................................. 4-34
6
math start action.................................................................... 9-14 pulse input................................................................... 1-3, 12-16
measurement channel............................................................. 1-1 pulse sum value.................................................................... 3-17
measurement input................................................................ 12-1
measure soft key................................................................... 3-16 R 7
media FIFO................................................................... 1-32, 6-5
range (input range).................................................................. 3-4
memory backup................................................................... 12-23
rate-of-change alarm............................................................... 1-4
memory sample....................................................................... 6-2
recommended replacement periods for worn parts................11-1
memory sample relay............................................................ 1-52
memory start.......................................................................... 6-10
recording conditions (display data)........................................ 1-28
recording conditions (event data).......................................... 1-29
8
memory stop...........................................................................6-11
ref. CH..................................................................................... 3-5
memory summary........................................................ 1-22, 4-32
reference channel.................................................................... 3-5
message colors....................................................................... 5-9
reference junction compensation.................................... 1-2, 3-2
message display............................................................ 4-6, 4-19
message display methods..................................................... 4-31
reflash.............................................................................. 1-6, 3-7 9
relational computation............................................................. 9-6
messages...................................................................... 1-12, 5-7
relative time........................................................................... 4-19
messages (errors, status, etc)............................................... 10-1
relative time mode................................................................. 1-38
message summary...................................................... 1-21, 4-30
relay action............................................................................ 2-12
modbus client status display................................................. 1-24
modbus master status display............................................... 1-24
Relay Action on Ack................................................................. 3-9 10
relay status display...................................................... 1-24, 4-26
modbus status display........................................................... 4-26
release number.......................................................................... iii
modbus status log................................................................. 4-38
releasing the key lock.............................................................. 8-2
mode (input range).................................................................. 3-4
remote contact input operation.............................................. 7-10
moving average............................................................... 1-2, 3-6
multi batch function................................................... 1-56, 12-17
remote control function.................................................. 1-37, 7-1 11
remote controller ID....................................................... 2-5, 2-14
remote control (/R1)............................................................ 12-15
N remote control terminal.......................................................... 2-15
NE........................................................................................... 9-6 repeat (event data)................................................................ 1-29
network information................................................................. 2-5 report..................................................................................... 9-16 12
next soft key............................................................................ 4-2 report channel....................................................................... 9-18
No logging............................................................................. 3-10 report data............................................... 1-23, 1-26, 1-30, 12-7
non-hold (alarm indication)...................................................... 1-5 report data keyword examples.............................................. 9-23
non-hold (alarm output relay).................................................. 1-7 report data keywords............................................................. 9-21
normal operating conditions................................................ 12-19 report display......................................................................... 4-25
App
NOT......................................................................................... 9-7 report file (format)................................................................ App-7
number of pulses per minute................................................. 3-18 report function....................................................................... 1-49
numeric display............................................................. 1-15, 4-6 report group........................................................................... 9-18
report template.................................................. 1-51, 6-24, 9-19 Index
O RESET................................................................................... 9-10
resets the computed result (Rst+St)...................................... 9-14
operating event switches......................................................... 7-5
Index

reset the sum value............................................................... 3-18

operation errors..................................................................... 10-7
resetting the computed results.............................................. 9-15
operation log.......................................................................... 4-39
resetting the match time timer................................................. 7-6
IM 04L41B01-01E Index-3
Index
resetting the relative timer............................................... 7-5, 7-6 tag detail.................................................... 4-7, 4-18, 4-24, 4-29
reset (TLOG)......................................................................... 1-48 tag display............................................................................... 4-1
revisions...................................................................................... ii tag no. use/not......................................................................... 5-4
rolling average............................................................... 1-47, 9-4 tag number.............................................................................. 5-4
RS-232 interface..................................................................12-11 temperature unit............................................................ 1-56, 3-3
RS-422A/485 interface.........................................................12-11 template-based report file...................................................... 1-51
text field................................................................. 1-36, 6-7, 6-9
S text file data format.............................................................. App-5
time at the grid position................................................... 2-4, 5-6
sample rate.............................................................................. 6-3
time axis................................................................................ 4-20
save directory.......................................................................... 6-5
time correction operation....................................................... 1-54
save duration to the CF card............................................... App-3
time deviation limit................................................................... 2-3
save interval............................................................................ 6-2
timer............................................................................... 1-38, 7-4
saving a template file............................................................. 6-23
timer action.............................................................................. 7-5
saving data to the external storage medium......................... 1-31
time related functions............................................................ 12-9
saving measured data (automatically)................................... 6-10
time set.................................................................................... 2-1
saving measured data (manually)..........................................6-11
time until the internal memory becomes full........................ App-3
saving setup data.................................................................. 6-19
time zone....................................................................... 1-54, 2-2
saving the data...................................................................... 4-33
TLOG....................................................................................... 9-3
scale.................................................................... 4-6, 4-17, 5-12
TLOG computation........................................................ 1-47, 9-8
scale lower.............................................................................. 3-5
top channel............................................................................ 4-20
scan interval.................................................................... 1-1, 3-1
top channel display................................................................ 1-18
screen image data....................................................... 1-26, 6-15
trademarks.................................................................................. ii
scroll time.............................................................................. 5-24
transport and storage conditions......................................... 12-20
search for measured data..................................................... 4-14
trend display............................................................................ 4-4
secondary interval................................................................... 5-6
trend display (T-Y)..................................................................1-11
security.................................................................................... 8-4
trend history............................................................................. 4-9
security function.................................................................... 12-9
trend interval.......................................................... 1-12, 5-5, 6-2
selecting a bar....................................................................... 4-42
trend rate switching................................................................. 5-5
separators............................................................................. 5-30
trend sapce.............................................................................. 4-8
setup data.......................................................... 1-26, 1-35, 12-7
trigger.................................................................................... 6-10
single/dual graph display....................................................... 4-41
trigger signal............................................................................ 6-3
single (event data)................................................................. 1-29
trip line..................................................................................... 5-2
snapshot...................................................................... 6-15, 12-7
troubleshooting.................................................................... 10-20
snapshot data.............................................................. 1-26, 1-35
types of characters................................................................ 12-9
SNTP log............................................................................... 4-38
sort item....................................................................... 4-28, 4-31
span lower............................................................................... 3-5 U
Special computation.............................................................. 9-10 unit in computations.............................................................. 1-46
special data........................................................................... 1-50 unsaved data......................................................................... 1-32
special keywords................................................................... 9-21 update interval (measured values).......................................... 1-9
SQR......................................................................................... 9-6 updating of the waveform...................................................... 1-12
square root computation.......................................................... 1-3 USB interface............................................................ 1-56, 12-16
stacked bar graph........................................................ 1-23, 4-40 user............................................................................... 1-43, 8-5
standard display soft key....................................................... 5-25 USER key...................................................................... 1-37, 7-1
standard performance......................................................... 12-21 user login status relay........................................................... 1-52
standards............................................................................. 12-20
standard temperature device..................................................11-2 V
starting the computation........................................................ 9-14
value indicator....................................................................... 5-14
start the recording................................................................. 6-10
value on over-range.............................................................. 3-20
status display section............................................................ 1-10
status messages................................................................. 10-17
status output.................................................................1-53, 2-11 W
status relay............................................................................ 2-13 warning messages.............................................................. 10-19
stopping the recording............................................................6-11 web log.................................................................................. 4-37
structure of the file name......................................................... 6-5
style number............................................................................... iii X
sub menu....................................................................... 4-1, 5-31
XOR......................................................................................... 9-7
sum scale.............................................................................. 1-49
symbols that can be entered................................................. 2-20
system display....................................................................... 1-55 Z
system errors....................................................................... 10-19 zone display.......................................................................... 1-13
system information.................................................................. 2-5
system keyword examples.................................................... 9-23
system keywords................................................................... 9-21

T
tag........................................................................................... 5-3
tag comment............................................................................ 5-4

Index-4 IM 04L41B01-01E